Withal We Tea; ell Wl!©^Sfe©iiid:Enroll And Kiaspras Wii^' inlernafioBsl CorrespondesGe Sctiools SCRAHTOW PA Book SS8 __ Copi^htN" COPKRICHT DEPOSrr. WHAT WE TEACH WHO SHOULD ENROLL AND REASONS WHY THIRD EDITION INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS SCRANTON. PA. UBRARY of CONGRESS Tvi{o Codes Received APh 23 \907 ^^pyriffht Entn/ ci^ss <^ XXc, No. COPY g. Copyright, 1907, by International Textbook Company All rights reserved 444W— 23098-2 15-07-2m Our Work Our work is to gather technical knowl- edge from all quarters, arrange it into Courses, and impart it. To gather this knowledge and classify it, we maintain our Faculty and on occasion employ the foremen, superin- tendents, managers, and engineering experts of the leading industrial estab- lishments. To dispense it, we have our Representatives for explaining the peculiar advantages of. our different Courses, and our Corps of Instructors for guiding the student after he enrolls. There are three phases of our work: 1. We teach unemployed people the theory of the work in which they want to engage. Results : positions easily se- cured; days of drudgery shortened, and sometimes avoided altogether; quick promotion, 2. We teach employed people to do their work better. Results : more respon- sible positions; better pay. 3. We teach dissatisfied people how to do what is congenial. Results : prepa- ration for new work before leaving the old; rapid progress in the new field. Our Plan It was in October, 1891, that Presi- dent Thomas J. Foster invented and first put into practice our arrangement of textbooks and system of instruction. The thoroughness and extreme prac- ticabiHty of his plan are the foundation of our success. This plan embodies the following distinctive features: 1 . We furnish all necessary prepara- tory instruction. 2. We provide drawing instruments and experimental apparatus with each Course requiring them. 3. We explain facts, principles, and processes so clearly that the student quickly comprehends and easily remem- bers them. 4. We illustrate our instruction with all views, plans, sections, and elevations that will contribute to its clearness. 5. We give concise rules, and practi- cal examples showing their application. 6. We grade our instruction so that at no stage of his progress is the stu- dent confronted with insurmountable difficulties. 7. We criticize and correct our stu- dent's written recitations, and send him special advice regarding his Course whenever necessary. Little Items We occupy in Scranton three of our o^vn buildings having a total floor space of about 7 acres. We employ 2,700 people. We spend $250,000 a year in improv- ing and revising our Instruction Papers. We use nearly $400 worth of postage stamps every day. Our Mailing Department handles about 15,000 pieces of mail daily. We issued about 63 million pages of instruction last year. In 1906 we received and corrected 809,858 recitations from our students. While there were tens of thousands of similar cases of which we are without specific knowledge, we know positively that 3,320 of our students last year had their wages substantially increased as a direct result of studying our Courses How to Secure Employment If a student has had experience in the work he desires to follow, he may file his application with the Stu- dents' Aid Department after he has completed one full subject of his Course. If a student has had no experience, he must finish enough of his Course to justify the Students' Aid Department in recommending him for a position. When these conditions have been complied with, we send to the student an Application Blank to be filled out for our files, and then advise him of all positions we are requested to fill and for which he is qualified. The Student of After finishing the AdvertisinP- ^'^^^ ^ P^^^^ °^ ^^^ AQvemsmg complete A d v e r - TisiNG Course, a student is prepared to take up ad writing for retail stores. He should interview all the merchants in his vicinity — taking printed samples of his work to show what he can do, or revisions of their ads showing how he can improve them — and endeavor to secure a permanent salaried position. If this is not possible, he may make arrangements w^ith several merchants to write their advertisements at so much an ad or at so much a month. In addi- tion to this, he can work up a mail- order business by writing ads for retail merchants all over the country. An excellent plan for an inexperienced person to get a start in advertising is to secure employment as advertising- solicitor with a local paper, then make a canvass of all merchants and offer to prepare ads for them if they will give him the business for the paper he represents. In this way a man may establish a reputation for good work and soon get into a profitable business for himself. The Student of A student of the Architecture Complete A r c h i - TECTURAL CoURSE Or the Architectural Drawing and De- signing Course, without practical experience in the building trades, should be able — after finishing the Drawing Plates of his Course — to make tracings, letter drawings, and be otherwise useful in an architect's office. To begin with he may get about $30 a month. The student paying close attention to his work will soon discover his weak points, and by remedying them will increase his efficiency and be justified in asking for more pay. A skilled m.echanic supplementing his practical knowledge of building construction with our Course should, after finishing the draw- ing instruction, start in at about $20 a week. A student finishing the Com- plete Architectural Course or the Architectural Drawing and Design- ing Course should get at least $40 a month to begin with, and by conscien- tious work and further study be able to so increase his earning power as to merit $40 a week. The Student of When the student BuildinS' enrolls for the Build- ^ , °. iNG Contractors' Contracting Course, and has had no experience in a department of the building trades and has no opportunity to learn a trade while studying his Course, he should finish the entire Course before seeking a position as a timekeeper on buildings, as a building clerk, as a draftsman, or as an estimator. He can fill any of these positions with- out serving time as a craftsman. A practical tradesman, after finishing the Course, may seek a position as a build- ing superintendent or a foreman, or he can set up in business as a contractor. The Student of After finishing any Chemistry %{ ^^}\ Courses in -^ Chemistry, if he has performed the analyses as required, a stu- dent is. qualified to do analytic work in a laboratory. The student desiring to begin with a fair salary should therefore finish his entire Course before applying for a position. But if he is satisfied to begin "at the bottom" in a laboratory, he may apply for employment as a laboratory helper or "porter" as soon as he has finished the Instruction Paper entitled Qualitative Analysis. Chem- ists are employed in the manufacture of sulphuric acid, alkalies, hydrochloric acid, cement, cottonseed oil, leather, soap, sugar, petroleum, gas, and in packing-house industries, as well as in many other pursuits. Salaries range from $40 to $60 a month for beginners. The Student of The student of any Civil Engineer- °^ ^^f l^.^^^'i'"^-^^ "DM A should finish the m- I'lgj _-^3-"^0^^ struction in mathe- Engineering, matics and survey- Municipal ing before seeking a Eno'ineering' position as a rodman -TT 'j r or a chainman in a nyaramiC surveying corps. Engineering, or The best time to Surveying and secure employment MapDing" °^ ^^-^^^ kind is in the ^^ ° early spring, for engi- neers as a rule make up their corps at that season. A student of the Bridge Engineer- ing Course can get a start in the draft- ing department of a bridge works in the same way as a student of the Courses in Mechanical Drawing. (See Mechanical Drawing.) The Student of A young man or Commerce ^^^^ woman pre- parmg at a resident school for a business position usually graduates before seeking employment. Our student of commerce should like- wise endeavor to finish his Course. But a student of the Complete Commercial Course can seek a position as stenog- rapher as soon as he has finished all the subjects embraced in his steno- graphic section, or as a bookkeeper as soon as he has finished his bookkeeping and business forms section. The daily papers of all large towns and cities con- tain advertisements for stenographers and bookkeepers, and a student of the Complete Stenographic Course or of the Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course should have little difficulty in securing a position if he answers these advertisements or makes personal appli- cation. The Student of A student of the Electricity Complete Electri- ^ CAL Engineering Course, even without practical experi- ence, has open to him several M^ays for entering his chosen profession. If he wishes to become a designer of electric machinery, he should enter a works where electric apparatus is made and work for a year or more in the shop — paying close attention to the methods of making the various parts of a machine , to their assembling into the completed device, and to the customary shop tests. After this shop experience, he can enter the drafting room, progress in the usual way, and eventually be- come a designer. To get the best results from this plan, the student should finish the instruction in mathe- matics and in the theory of electricity and magnetism before going into a shop ; he should likewise finish the drawing section of his Course before entering a drafting room. He will find the infor- mation obtained from the study of his Course of the greatest advantage to him in understanding thoroughly the opera- tion of electric apparatus and the designing problems he may meet with in his daily work. As one can start in at better pay in a drafting room, the student finding it necessary to begin at higher wages than is paid in the shop may, after finishing the mathematics and drawing of his Course, apply for a 10 position as junior draftsman. The preliminary shop experience, however, is invaluable to the student wanting to become competent as a designer. Of course, after securing employment in either the shop or the drafting room, the student should supplement his practical experience with a further study of his Course, applying the principles to whatever problems may arise. If a student of either the Complete Electrical Engineering Course or the Electric Lighting and Railways Course desires to enter the broad fields of electric lighting or electric railways, he may apply for a position as helper in an electric power station or on out- side construction work or inaintenance. It is best for a student of the Electric Lighting and Railways Course to finish his studies up to and including the Instruction Paper entitled Opera- tion of Dynamos and Motors before seeking employment. The usual line of advancement is through the posi- tions of dynamo tender, assistant engi- neer, engineer, superintendent, and manager for inside work, and foreman and superintendent of lines for outside work. The Student of A student of the Illustration ^ourses in Illustra- J —^ . tion or m Design and Design j^ust have had some practical experience before he can assume the responsibilities of a salaried position. This experience can be obtained by entering a photoengraving, photolithograph, or other designing establishment and doing — for the sake of experience and without expecting pay — whatever is required there in the way of simple drawing. A less direct method of getting experience is by making designs for selected subjects and sending the designs to the Director of the Department of Arts and Crafts at the I. C. S., for his correction and criticism. The student will, as soon as he shows enough ability to make salable designs, be put in touch with prospective buyers and told how to submit his work to them. The student far enough advanced in his Course is invited to enter competi- tions for bookcovers, chapter headings, and architectural and other designs for which cash prizes are awarded by various magazines and publications. Before entering these competitions or submiitting original work for criticism, the student must finish that part of his Course dealing with the branch he desires to take up. It is absolutely useless for a novice to submit designs for bookcovers, carpets, wallpapers, etc. until he has received thorough instruc- tion in these subjects and criticism of his work. The pay received by a beginner for work in illustration or design varies according to his inventive faculty, originality, and experience. The clever student — after devoting a reasonable length of time to practical work, either as outlined or in some practical design establishment — should earn from $50 to $75 a month. 12 The Student of If a student is will- Mechanical i^§ to begin work in TV . a drafting room as a Drawing "blueprinter" at small wages, he may apply for a position at any time ; but if he desires to start as a tracer or as a junior draftsman, he should finish his instruction in geomet- rical drawing and mechanical drawing before applying for a position. After the student has finished the drawing section of his Course, he should take with him some of his best drawings and tracings to show as samples of his work, and then apply for a position as junior draftsman at machine shops, engine works, boiler works, steel works, locomotive works, and electrical man- ufacturing plants. The salary the applicant may command depends entirely on his own personal qualifica- tions as well as on the locality and the character of the firm. Many of our graduates that have had no experience ■in drawing begin at from $40 to $50 a month, while experienced draftsmen earn anywhere from $75 to $150 a month. The Student of A student of the Mechanical Mechanical T^ . . Engineering Engineering course or the Me- chanical Course, without experience and desiring to become a machine designer, should finish the mechanical drawing section of his Course and then seek employment as suggested for stu- dents of Mechanical Drawing. If a student of the Mechanical Engineer- ing Course desires to make himself 13 proficient in shop work, he should first study the shop practice divisions of his Course and apply for employment as an apprentice in shop work. The Student of A student of the Mining ^ ^ ^ L M,J N I.N ^ ° Course, the Com- plete Coal Mining Course, or the Metal Mining Course, without practi- cal experience in mining, should finish the Instruction Paper entitled Mine Surveying and Mapping before seeking a position on a mine surveying corps. Once on a corps, he will rapidly obtain the experience that in connection with his studies will qualify him for the higher positions. The Student of The student finishing Navigation ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^i!'''f; ° TioN Course should be qualified to pass the examination for any grade of license for ocean-going steamers — provided of course that he has served the required time at sea. If the student is in the naval service and is qualified to apply for promotion to the grade of commissioned officer, his knowledge of navigation should enable him to pass the examination in that subject successfully. Before an appli- cant for license goes up for examination, his eyes must be tested for color blind- ness. The Inspectors issue a blank form for this eye test to all applicants for an officer's license. If no defect of vision is found, the applicant fills out his application blank, giving his sea experience together with certified copies of indorsements fronl masters, owners, or agents in whose service he has been; he also furnishes letters of recommenda- tion from captains or vessel owners by whom he has been employed. After these documents have been presented at the office of the local Inspector, the applicant's examination in navigation, seamanship, rules of the road, and stowage of cargo takes place. The different questions usually asked at these examinations will be found in the last Instruction Paper of the Ocean Navigation Course. As we require our student to write his answers to examination questions, and as the questions asked in license examinations have to be answered in writing, the training we give him is a decided ad- vantage. Ability to express oneself clearly in writing counts for much with the Inspectors. If successful in passing the examination, and if his testimonials are satisfactory to the Inspector, the applicant is granted a license. Accord- ing to present regulations, this license is good for 1 year and must be renewed for each succeeding year, though no examination is required at such re- newal. Of course, all applicants for any grade of license must be citizens, either native or naturalized, of the United States, Having finished the Coastwise Navi- gation Course, the student, if a first- class seaman, should have no difficulty in passing the license examination for third mate, second mate, or even chief mate, provided he passes the color test and has had the required sea experience. For particulars in regard to regulations 15 governing the issuing of licenses, fhe student should consult our Navigation Circular, where are reprinted the rules and regulations prescribed by the Board of Supervising Inspectors of Steamboats; or he may apply to the nearest office of United States Local Inspectors located in the principal ports (usually in the Post-Office building or the Custom-House building) ; or he may communicate direct with the office of the Supervising Inspector-General, Steamboat-Inspection Service, Wash- ington, D. C. After finishing the Lake Navigation Course, the student should be able to pass the license examination for pilot for any grade of license in any district of the Great Lakes or other waterways not included in deep-sea navigation, provided he has had the necessary prac- tical experience and is thoroughly familiar with the waters and the aids to navigation located in the district for which he applies for a license. A test for color blindness must be made before the applicant goes up for his examination. As the Lake Naviga- tion Course does not contain instruc- tion in the subject of finding latitude and longitude by astronomical observa- tions, the student of this Course should not attempt to go up for examinations in districts along the seaboard where a knowledge of that subject is required. 16 The Student of After a student (of Plumbing, ^^he Complete TT ^- ^ Plumbing AND Heating, or Heating Course) Steam Fitting that has had practi- cal experience fin- ishes the prehminary Instruction Papers entitled i\rithnietic, Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneu- matics, and Strength of Materials, and also finishes the Instruction Papers entitled Elementary Chemistry, Gas Making, Gas Supply and Distribution, and Domestic Uses of Gas, he is quali- fied to apph^ for a position as a gas- fitter, foreman, or superintendent of a gas-manufacturing plant. After he has studied the preliminary Instruc- tion Papers as well as the Instruction Papers on practical plumbing subjects, he should be competent to fill a posi- tion as foreman plumber or leading journeyman on a large job, and should command a higher salary than the regu- lar journeymen working on the same job. And after he has finished the Instruction Papers relating to the theory of plumbing, the student should be fitted to apply for a position as sanitary engineer, plumbing inspector, super- intendent of plumbing construction, assistant to architect, etc., or he may become a plumbing contractor. If, on the other hand, he finishes the Instruc- tion Papers pertaining to the theory and practice of heating and ventilation in addition to the Instruction Papers relating to plumbing and gas-fitting previously mentioned, he should be in 17 a position to fill any of the foregoing offices, or he may open a shop in any town in the United States or Canada as a plumbing and heating contractor and make a success of it. A plumbing shop alone in a small town does not pay so well as a combination plumbing and heating shop. Any plumber studying even the practical Instruction Papers of this Course and not taking up the theoretical Instruction Papers nor the drawing instruction, is in a position to command first-class wages as a high-grade plumber and fitter. The man able to do both plumbing and fitting is in demand and usually has steady employment at good wages. Any student finishing the en- tire Course can easily apply for a posi- tion as an architect's assistant, his duties being to draw plans and get out specifications for the plumbing and heating equipment of large buildings. A practical student finishing this Course should be able to fill any position in plumbing and heating engineering or in plumbing and heating contracting ; for the whole subject is taught in this Course very fully and clearly, and he should command a salary of $2,000 or more a year. After an apprentice has studied the preliminary Instruction Papers (of the Complete Plumbing Course) entitled Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumat- ics, and Strength of Materials, and also the Instruction Papers entitled Gas Making, Gas Supply and Distribution, 18 and Domestic Uses of Gas, he is quali- fied to apply for a position as a gas- fitter. After he has passed his exami- nations on the Instruction Papers entitled Plumbing Materials and Tools; Soldering and Wiping; Lead Work; Pipework ; Washing and Drinking Fix- tures ; Baths and Urinals ; Water Closets ; House Drains; Soil, Waste, and Vent Stacks ; Traps and Vents ; Drainage and Sewerage ; Sewage Disposal ; Sources of Water Supply; Water Filtration; Cold- Water Supply ; Hot-Water Supply ; and Reading Architect's Drawings; he is qualified to apply for a position as foreman in any first-class plumbing and gas-fitting establishment. When, in addition to the foregoing Instruction Papers, he has studied the Papers entitled Plumbing Inspection, Plumbing Plans and Specifications, Contracts, Geo- metrical Drawing, Principles of Mechan- ical Drawing, and Plumbing and Heating Drawing, it is safe for him to apply for a position as general superintendent of a large plumbing and gas-fitting estab- lishment, commanding a salary of $2,000 or more a year; or he is in a posi- tion to start a plumbing business of his own; or he may interest capital and organize a company of which he will become the manager. A thorough knowledge of this Course should qualify a practical plumber of average intelli- gence to become a first-class sanitary engineer. In the Plumbing Inspectors' Course the Instruction Papers entitled Arith- metic, Mensuration, Principles of Me- chanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, 19 and Strength of Materials are optional, but they should be studied by every student if possible. Any plumber reasonably good at practical work and having an average amount of intelli- gence can — after finishing our Course — safely apply for the position of plumbing inspector or sanitary inspector in any city in the United States or Canada; for the knowledge he will obtain by a study of this Course should qualify him to fill such a position satisfactorily. His salary should be at least $1,500 a year. In the Short Plumbing Course the Instruction Papers pertaining to the subjects Arithmetic, Mensuration, Prin- ciples of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, and Strength of Materials, though optional, should be studied by the student. When a student has fin- ished these Instruction Papers and passed our examinations in the remain- ing Instruction Papers, which consti- stute thorough instruction in the prac- tice of plumbing, he may apply for a position as foreman plumber on any kind of work — provided he has had prac- tical experience in plumbing. After the student (of the Complete Heating Course) has studied the pre- liminary Instruction Papers pertaining to Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumat- ics, and Strength of Materials, has passed his examinations in the subjects pertaining to the practical part of steam fitting, and has had a reasonable amount of practical experience, he is 20 qualified to apply for a position as leading journeyman, or as a journey- man in charge of a job, or as a shop fore- man, and should receive salary usually paid to men in those positions. After finishing the subjects pertaining to the theory of heating and ventilation and completing the Drawing Plates and the Instruction Papers on Heating Plans and Specifications, he should be fully equipped to apply for a position as superintendent, estimator, draftsman, or expert for a boiler or radiator manu- facturing concern, or he may open an office of his own as a consulting engi- neer, or he may — if he has sufficient capital back of him — open an estab- lishment as a heating contractor. There is a great ' demand today from heating engineers and contractors for first-class foremen, superintendents, esti- mators, and draftsmen, and the salaries range from $5 to $10 or more a day. In the Plumbing and Steam Fitters' Course the instruction in Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, and Strength of Materials are optional, but should be studied by every student if possible, because a thorough knowledge of these subjects forms an excellent foundation for the student to compre- hend properly all the instruction given in the succeeding Instruction Papers. The Instruction Papers relating to I practical plumbing should qualify an i apprentice to become a first-class [journeyman plumber, and the Instruc- [ tion Papers relating to heating should 21 qualify him to become a first-class practical fitter. The Instruction Paper entitled. Reading Architects' Drawings teaches the student how to read work- ing drawings and general drawings from architects, engineers, etc. A student finishing this Course should make a first-class foreman for a large plumbing and heating shop, where he should be able to command at least $5 a day. In the Steam Fitters' Course the Instruction Papers entitled Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, and Strength of Materials are optional in this Course; but the student should study them if possible, because a knowl- edge of these subjects is important. Any practical fitter that studies these Instruction Papers should, after he has finished the succeeding Papers on practical heating, be qualified to take a position as foreman on a heating job ; for he is in a position to erect a heating system quickly and in a scientific manner. The Student of The graduate of the Sheet-Metal Sheet-Metal Pat- p ,, T^ERN Drafting Jrattern Course is qualified Drafting to enter the draft- ing room of a boiler works or a tinware manufacturing establishment, or in fact any place where sheet-metal work is done. Or, if he is a sheet-metal worker by trade, he will be qualified to take a position as foreman or superintendent of a sheet-metal works. The demand for first-class sheet-metal workers is greater than the supply, and the daily papers of large cities publish a good number of "want ads" for trained men in this line. The Student of Before attempting to Show-Card ^^^^^® employment _„ . . as an expert show- Writing card writer, an inex- perienced student should finish the entire Advanced Show-Card Writing Course. He is then qualified to make show-cards for any business. The best way for a student to secure employment is to make personal application to several merchants, submitting samples of his work. Many merchants unable to employ a show-card writer constantly are glad to secure the occasional ser- vices of an expert when a contract can be made for a stated number of cards each week. By thus supplying several merchants, the competent person may build up a profitable business of his own. A student of the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course will find it profitable and a help in his work if he is employed as a salesman or clerk in a department store while studying his Course, though this is not necessary. The Student of A student of the Window Trim- Window Trimming J AND Mercantile mmg and Decoration Mercantile Course should en- Decoration deavor to secure em- ployment as a sales- man or a clerk in a dry-goods store or department store while studying his Course, so as to become familiar with 23 the stock and secure a business train- ing — a training that will be invaluable to him as a window trimmer and deco- rator. In such a position he will have plenty of opportunity to obtain practice in the work, and by the time he has finished his Course he will be qualified to take a position as trimmer. The Student of A student of the Steam Engi- Steam-E l e c t r i c ° Course, the Com- neering plete Steam Engi- neering Course, the Engine and Dynamo Running Course, or the En- gine Running Course, without experi- ence in steam engineering but desiring employment, should finish the studies up to and including the Instruction Paper entitled Combustion, Firing, and Draft. He is then ready to fill a position as oiler, wiper, or fireman in a steam plant or an electric plant. He will be able to advance in position as he gains experi- ence and continues with his studies. The Student of The student of the Structural Structural Engi- T, . . neering Course Engineering ^^y, after he has finished the Instruction Paper entitled Details of Construction, start in as a tracer in a drafting room. Here he will receive a salary of from $50 to $75 a month. Or he may begin at about the same pay as an inspector of structural work, or even as assistant engineer. Many have been able to get a position as engineer, assistant engineer, or salesman for a small company manufacturing some specialty in building construction. Mechanical Engineering Course This Course is the Mechanical Course and the Shop Practice Course combined. LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122 Elements of Algebra Logarithms Geometry and Trigonom- etry Examination Questions. . . Keys Tables 115 20 75 32 115 37 Geometrical Drawing 77 Mechanical Drawing 161 Sketching 47 Practical Projection 100 Development of Surfaces. 65 Elementary Mechanics.. Hydromechanics Pneumatics Heat Elementary Graphical Statics Strength of Materials . . . Examination Questions. Keys Tables and Formulas. . . Steam and Steam Engines Applied Mechanics Steam Boilers Examination Questions. . . Keys Tables and Formulas 64 42 46 74 85 70 62 130 5 138- 179 169 42 71 3 19 Machine Design 232 20 Dynamos and Motors 271 Examination Questions. . . 40 Keys 64 21 Reading Working Draw- ings 68 22 Measuring Instruments. . . 55 23 Precision Measurements. . 38 24 Lathe Work 283 Examination Questions. . . 24 Keys 32 25 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 LIST OF SUBJECTS Working Chilled Iron Planer Work Shaper and Slotter Work . Drilling and Boring Milling-Machine Work. . . . Gear Calculations Gear-Cutting Examination Questions. . . Keys. Tables Grinding Bench, Vise, and Floor Work Erecting Shop Hints Toolmaking Gauges and Gauge Making Dies and Die Making. . . . Jigs and Jig Making. Examination Questions. . . Keys Wood Working Wood Turning Pattemmaking Green-Sand Molding Core Making Dry-Sand and Loam Work Cupola Practice Mixing Cast Iron. Examination Questions. . . Keys Machine Molding Foundry Appliances Malleable Casting Brass Founding Blacksmith-Shop Equip- ment Iron Forging Tool Dressing Hardening and Tempering Treatment of Low-Carbon Steel Hammer Work Machine Forging Special Forging Opera- tions Examination Questions.. . PAGES 23 76 37 130 205 49 40 29 4 18 1261 112 101 72 119 48 70 33 30 3 91 48 217 168 31 49 57 65 32 1 32 95 102 39 38 53 36 45 37 36 34 54 30 7th Bound Volume Pages Illustrations, 3,706 Instruction Papers, 103 Drawing Plates, 43 Bound Volumes, 10 / 26 8th Bound Volume 9th Bound Volume 10th Bound Volume .6 020 Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted; no recitation is asked for in subject 14. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the student the math- ematical knowledge he requires in prac- ticing mechanical engineering. b. They include the elementary subjects of which the mechanical engi- neer must have a knowledge. c. They are replete with the best illustrations ever made of mechanical subjects. d. They are the most concise and clear ever prepared on mechanical engineering. e. They contain full instruction in the principles of machine design. /. They give the details of pattern- making, molding, casting, blacksmith- ing and forging, toolmaking, machine- shop practice, and erecting. 0-. They give the student help in his work as soon as he begins to study. //. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas. /. They give rules and examples showing the application of the rules in practice. /. They are so thoroughly practical, frequent reference to them will give the student knowledge worth many times their cost — even if he has not time for systematic study and recitation. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mechanical Engineers. b. Managers and Superintendents whose work requires a knowledge of machine design and shop practice. 27 c. Draftsmen. d. Toolmakers, e. Machinists. /. Blacksmiths. g. Patternmakers. k. Foundrymen. i. College Graduates having studied mechanical courses. /. Inventors and Experimenters. Remarks Here is the chance for our Representa- tives to exercise nice discrimination in helping the prospective student select the Course best suited to his needs. This is a matter to which it is important for us to give careful attention. All persons whose work requires them to have a knowledge of machine design and the other advanced subjects that the mechanical engineer must under- stand, and all persons wanting to take up such work, should enroll for the Mechanical Engineering Course. Nothing less will meet their needs. But among the classes just listed there are many men that need no more instruc- tion than is contained in our Shop Practice Course. These are: (a) Mechanical Engineers wishing to broad- en their knowledge of shop practice; (6) Draftsmen desiring to take up the study of shop practice without advanc- ing into mechanical engineering; (c) Men running special lathes, milling machines, shapers, etc., and desirous of learning the theory of general shop practice as a step toward qualifying for foremanship; {d) College Graduates wanting to supplement their college 28 training with a special Course in up-to- date shop practice. All these will find that our Shop Practice Course, or possibly one of its Divisions, will amply meet their requirements and prove an easier path than our Mechanical Engineering Course to the positions desired. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The designer of every appliance or system used for producing or trans- mitting power must have the knowl- edge contained in our Course, in order to adapt his calculations to physical laws. b. The competent mechanical engi- neer is in demand in all branches of machine manufacture. No one has so great a variety of work that he can turn his hand to with such certainty of suc- cess. The young designer in a loco- motive works today, for example, may in less than a year be called to design turbine waterwheels at a big advance in salary; or, already in the engineering department of an electrical manufac- tory, he may receive big inducements to enter the locomotive works. And so he stands with almost unlimited oppor- tunities in whichever industry he finds most congenial. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time given. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than 3 years. The average student requires a little more time. 29 Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Mechanical Engineering Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our students for $7.95. The stu- dent pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain all the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. Having successfully met the exacting reqmrements of thousands of corre- spondence students, it is evident that these Papers treat of the principles and the applications in mechanical engineer- ing with more thoroughness and con- ciseness than is possible in a work pre- pared on any other plan. b. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They are for reference purposes the most valuable work ever prepared on mechanical engineering. Some stu- dents have enrolled simply to secure these Bound Volumes, and have achieved success through the study of them alone, without even having taken time to submit written recitations to us. 30 Mechanical Course Nineteen subjects are taught in the Mechanical Course. The Bound Vol- umes of the Reference Library contain twenty, as follows : LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! Arithmetic 122 Elements of Algebra 115 Logarithms 20 Geometry and Trigonom- etry . . ._ 75 Examination Questions.. . 32 Keys 115 Tables 37 1st Bound Volume 5 Geometrical Drawing 77 6 Mechanical Drawing 161 7 Sketching 47 8 Practical Projection 100 9 Development of Surfaces. 65 10 Elementary Mechanics.. . . 64' 1 1 Hydromechanics 42 12 Pneumatics 46 13 Heat 74 14 Elementary Graphical Statics 85 15 Strength of Materials 70 Examination Questions.. . 62 Keys 130 Tables and Formulas 5 , 16 Steam and Steam Engines 138' 17 Applied Mechanics 179 18 Steam Boilers 169 Examination Questions. . . 42 Keys 71 I Tables and Formulas 3 J 19 Machine Design 2321 20 D^mamos and Motors 271 I 5th Bound Examination Questions.. . 40 ( Volume Keys 64j Pages 2,753 Illustrations, 1,451 Drawing Plates, 43 Instruction Papers, 33 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted; no recitation is asked for in subject 14. 31 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the student the mathe- matical knowledge he requires in prac- ticing machine design. h. They include the elementary sub- jects of which the machine designer must have a knowledge. c. They are replete with the best illustrations that were ever made of mechanical subjects. d. They are the most concise and clear ever prepared on the subject of machine design. e. They give the student help in his work as soon as he begins to study. /. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas. g. ' They give rules, and examples showing how to apply them in practice. h. They are so thoroughly practical, frequent references to them will give the student knowledge worth many times their cost — even if he has no time for systematic study and recitation. i. They contain full instruction in sketching — teaching the student to make accurate pencil sketches of tools, machinery, etc. /. They give clear, concise instruc-. tion in mechanical drawing. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mechanical Engineers. h. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen whose work requires a knowl- edge of machine design. c. Draftsmen desirous of becoming proficient in machine design. 32 d. Toolmakers, Machinists, Black- smiths, Patternmakers, Foundrymen, etc. that already have a thorough knowl- edge of shop practice and are desirous of learning machine design. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Machine design cannot be con- ducted on guesswork. A little error in calculation may cause the loss of hun- dreds of dollars worth of labor and material . b. To insure accuracy, the designer must have a clear idea of the work to be done by a proposed machine, the diffi- culties to be overcome in doing that work, and the general plan of construc- tion most likely to secure maximum efficiency. c. Through this Course the student can acquire a practical knowledge of mathematics. The instruction in theo- retical and applied mechanics will enable him to understand clearly the principles involved in the construction and operation of mechanisms; and the instruction regarding strength of mate- rials, steam engines, steam boilers, dynamos and motors, and machine design will give him the knowledge he must have of these subjects before he can become a successful designer. d. Hundreds of lines of work have been revolutionized by labor-saving i-nachinery. There is a constant de- mand for special machines, and the competent designer is well rewarded. Our Course teaches the student the underlying principles of machine design md will enable him to work out intelli- gently his own ideas. 2 33 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Note — -The student may take up drawing in the Course as early as he pleases, without wait- ing till he has finished the mathematics. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Mechanical Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain all the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. Having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands . of corre- spondence students, it is evident that these Papers treat of the principles and applications in machine design with more thoroughness and conciseness than would be possible if prepared on any other plan. b. They are for reference purposes the most valuable work ever prepared 34 on machine design. Some students have enrolled simply to secure these Boimd Volumes, and have achieved success through the study of them alone, without submitting written reci- tations to us after passing our examina- tions in the elementary subjects. c. They are fully indexed. Each important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 35 Shop Practice Course LIST OF SUBJECTS Reading Working Draw- ings Arithmetic Measuring Instruments. . . Precision Measurements. . Lathe Work Examination Questions. . . Keys Working Chilled Iron. ... Planer Work Shaper and Blotter Work . Drilling and Boring Milling-Machine Work. . . . Gear Calculations Gear-Cutting Examination Questions. . Keys Tables 68 52 55 38 283 24 32 23 76 37 130 205 49 40 29 4 18 1261 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Grinding Bench, Vise, and Floor Work 112 Erecting 101 Shop Hints 72 Toolmaking 119 Gauges and Gauge Making 48 Dies and Die Making 70 Jigs and Jig Making 33 Examination Questions.. . 30 Keys , 3 Wood Working 91 Wood Turning' 48 Patternmaking 217 Green-Sand Molding 168 Core Making 31 Dry-Sand and Loam Work 49 Cupola Practice 57 Mixing Cast Iron 65 Examination Questions. . . 32 Keys 1 36 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume oq LIST OF SUBJECTS P Machine Molding AGES 321 95 102 39 38 53 36 45 37 36 34 54 30, 267 ma\ 30 31 32 33 34 3i Foundrv x\ppliances Malleable Casting Brass Founding . Blacksmith-Shop Equip- ment Iron Forging Tool Dressing 5th Bound 36 37 3S Hardening and Temoering Treatment of Low-Carbon Steel Hammer W^ork Volume 39 40 Special Forginej Opera- tions Examination Questions. . . Pages 3 Illustrations. 2,255 Instruction Papers, 70 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subiects Nos. 1 and 6 / bp omitted. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the student the mathe- matical knowledge he requires in shop work. b. They give reliable instruction based on the best practice of the most up-to-date shops. c. They give the details of pattem- niaking, molding, casting, blacksmith- ing and forging, toolmaking, and ma- chine-shop practice. d. They give the student help in his work as soon as he begins to study. e. They are so thoroughly practical, frequent reference to them will give the student knowledge worth many times their cost — even if he has not time for systematic stud 3^ and recita- tion. 37 Persons That Should Enroll a. Apprentices, Journeymen, and Foremen in machine shops, tool rooms, pattern shops, foundries, and black- smith shops. b. Draftsmen in all classes of engi- neering works. c. College Graduates having studied mechanical courses. d. Teachers in manual training schools and technical schools. e. Owners of manufacturing estab- lishments in which machine work is carried on. /. Managers and Superintendents wishing to gain a knowledge of how work is done in the most advanced shops. g. Mechanical Engineers desiring to familiarize themselves with the best shop practice. Note — The person wantin,e a knowledge of both machine design and shop practice should enroll for the Mechanical Engineering Course. If the prospective student already has a thorough knowledge of shop practice and desires to learn machine design, he should enroll for the Mechan- ical Course. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Divisions of the Course There are five divisions of the Shop Practice Course: the Machine Shop Division; the Toolmaking Division; the 38 Patternmaking Division; the Foundry Work Division; and the Blacksmithing and Forging Division. The student may begin with any Division and take up the remaining Divisions in whatever order he wishes. Each student of any one or more Divisions is furnished with five Bound Volumes containing the entire Course. Subordinate Courses When the student desires only one Division of the Shop Practice Course, he enrolls for the Machine Shop Course; the Toolmaking Course; the Patternmaking Course; the Foundry Work Course; or the Blacksmithing and Forging Course, as the case may be. The instruction in each of these subordinate Courses is exactly the same as that given in the respective Divisions to the student that enrolls for the Shop Practice Course. Each student of any of these subordinate Courses is furnished with five Bound Volumes containing the entire Shop Practice Course. Time Required That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish a Division or a subordinate Course in about 5 months. The average stu- dent requires a little more time. Why Persons Should Enroll for the Shop Practice Course a. The apprentice usually begins with little or no knowledge of the 39 branch he is about to stud}^ One of the tendencies of all modem manufac- turing is to get the largest possible amount of work out of each man ; hence, the apprentice will be given a comparatively narrow line of work and will be confined to one machine as long as possible. Moreover, in most shops he will receive little or no instruction from the foreman or other men, aside from the general directions received when he is first put on a machine. If he is to gain a thorough knowledge of the principles of his machine and its cutting tools, the relative advantages of the different feeds, speeds, etc., the appren- tice must have such a Course as our Shop Practice Course. If he is in the blacksmith shop or the foiuidry, he can advance rapidly to a knowledge of the broader practice and better work of the shop by studying our Course. Follow- ing our instruction, he will obtain a ver}^ much larger variety of work and gain a m,ore thorough knowledge of his trade than will the man plodding along dependent on his observation alone. Our Course will help the apprentice become a broad, strong journeyman — one that will be able to command the highest wages paid in his trade. b. The old-style journeyman is rap- idly becoming a thing of the past. The majority of workmen are now unhappily mere machine runners. Thousands of these have at last awakened to the fact that they have perfected themselves in one specialty, and stuck to it so long that their restricted knowledge prevents their rising from the one machine with which they are familiar. To such our 40 Shop Practice Course comes as a liberator. It gives the specialist infor- mation that enables him to change from one machine to another and gain a knowledge of the underlying principles of all the branches of shop work. c. To the practical journeyman ma- chinist that has served an apprentice- ship and has gained a somewhat broad experience, our Shop Practice Course offers an opportunity to increase his knowledge greatly. From this Course he can obtain benefit equivalent to that derived from many years of traveling and working in different shops, and he can obtain many points that it would be impossible for any one man to gain by traveling and working. In other words, it places before him the details of the most modem shop practice — not only in his particular line, but in all allied lines. This Course will help journey- men machinists become toolmakers or foremen. d. Any workman that studies our Course thoroughly and is faithful in his work will be able to increase his earning capacity and reduce the liability of his being laid off in slack times. The gen- eral utility men, who can be used on more than one line, are usually the last to be laid off when the working force of a shop is being reduced. c. To the foreman or any man in charge of work in any branch of shop I practice, this Course offers an accumu- lation of experience that will enable him tM systematize and arrange his work in I lie very best manner, so that his i]c])artment will make the best possible showing. A careful study of the 41 Course should enable him to devise short methods of doing the work. It should enable him to tell whether or not the workmen are doing the required amoimt of work. In this day of rapid development, sharp competition, and constant change, every shop must either keep up with the latest practice or go to the wall. Hence, no foreman can be sure of holding his position unless he keeps abreast of the times and ahead of his men. The day is past when a man can learn all about his trade by experience, and it is only by taking advantage of results obtained by others that success is now attained. For this reason no foreman should be without our Shop Practice Course. /. Professors of manual training and those employed in the shops of tech- nical schools will find in this Course a very large amount of information for use in their lectures and all their instruc- tion work. One of the most difficult things associated with work in the col- lege shop, is to keep in touch with the rapidl}^ advancing methods outside. Many instructors are young men with- out extended experience. This Course offers such men an opportunity to broaden their knowledge and to gain more information than they could obtain from many years of travel and observation. g. The technical-school graduate will find our Shop Practice Course an excellent thing with which to supple- ment his previous training. It is in fact the only course from which he can quickly acquire a knowledge of modem shop methods — knowledge that he must 42 have, if he becomes successful in either designing or manufacturing. If a designer, he must adapt his plans to the most economical shop routine. If a superintendent or a manager, he must see that his shop routine is the most economical. 43 Draftsmen's Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122 2 Elements of Algebra 115 3 Logarithms 20 4 Geometry and Trigonom- 1st Bound etry 75 Volume Examination Questions . . . 32 Keys 116 Tables 37 J 5 Geometrical Drawing 77] 6 7 Mechanical Drawing Sketching _. . ._ 161 47 2d Bound Volume 8 Practical Projection 100 9 Development of Surfaces. 65 J 10 Elementary Mechanics. . . . 64 11 Strength of Materials 70 12 Applied Mechanics 116 3d Bound 13 Machine Design 152 Volume Examination Questions. . 44 Keys 88, Pages 1,501 Illustrations, 790 Drawing Plates, 43 Instruction Papers, 21 Bound Volumes, 3 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They will assist any student of average intelligence to qualify as a practical draftsman and machine de- signer. b. They are the most practical, thorough, and concise ever written on mechanical drawing. c. They contain full instruction in sketching — showing how to make accu- rate pencil sketches of tools, machinery, etc. d. They give full instruction in the making and reading of working draw- ings, and explain blueprinting. c. They were prepared with special reference to the needs of those engaged in the shop and the drafting room. /. They are iUustrated fully and in the greatest detail. g. They include the elementary sub- jects with which a first-class mechanical draftsman must be familiar. //. They contain nothing that is not of real value to the student. i. They contain instruction in letter- ing. Persons That Should Enroll a. Machinists and Machinists' Apprentices. h. Employes in electrical and machine shops. c. Patternmakers. d. Toolmakers. e. Foundrymen. /. Blacksmiths. g. Employes in bridge works. h. Inventors and Experimenters. i. Young Men wanting to acquire a practical knowledge of mathematics, me- chanical drawing, and machine design. j. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. k. Graduates of high schools and manual training schools. /. Teachers wishing to prepare for giving instruction in practical mechani- cal drawing. m. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen whose work requires a knowl- edge of mechanical drawing and machine design. Note — The new Mechanical Drawing? Courses offer our Representatives an excellent opportunity to display nice judgment in assisting the pro- spective student in selecting the Course best suited to his needs. All persons wishing to make 45 drafting a profession should enroll for the Draftsmen's Course. Persons that do not wish to make a profession of drafting, but never- theless wish a knowledge of the subject and are deficient in mathematics, should enroll for the Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) Course. Students wanting only mechanical drawing should enroll for the Mechanical Draw- ing (Without Mathematics) Course. Among the classes listed there are many that desire to become mechanical engineers, superintendents, consulting engineers, etc.; these should enroll for our Mechanical Engineering Course or our Mechanical Course, preferably the former. The student may take up drawing in the Course , as early as he pleases, without waiting till he has finished the mathematics. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Mechanical drawing opens the way to advancement in almost every engineering and industrial line of work; it is the universal language of the mechanical world; it is the stepping- stone to mechanical engineering. For- merly, a knowledge of mechanical draw- ing and machine design could be acquired only through years of ob- servant practice; but our instruction shortens the period of plodding. Our Course enables the ambitious student to gain quickly a knowledge of me- chanical drawing and to forge ahead into the field of machine design. To the young man without a trade our Course offers a clean and profitable profession. To the mechanic, it offers promotion. b. A specially attractive feature of our Course is the instruction in sketch- ing. This Paper will be welcomed by persons desiring a knowledge of how to make accurate pencil sketches of machines, machine parts, and details for future reference or for working up 46 into finished drawings. Our Paper on sketching is the only practical work on this important subject. Facility in making sketches is invaluable to mechanical engineers, machine design- ers, and all classes of men engaged in the mechanical industries. c. Draftsmen will find our Course replete with the latest and best ideas relating to working drawings. Written by men of wide experience as draftsmen and machine designers, our instruction is thoroughly practical and up-to-date. Our Course will give the student engaged in the practice of drafting an enlarged working knowledge that will insure his promotion to the higher and better-paid positions. d. Our Course is the only Course that follows exactly the methods em- ployed in the best modem drafting rooms. Our instruction is in full accord with the best practice and will prepare students for positions as draftsmen along precisely the lines they will be called on to follow in actual work. e. To the young man that intends to become an erecting or supervising engineer a knowledge of mechanical drawing is indispensable. He must fully understand how to read working drawings correctly. Our Course will teach the mechanic or tradesman to interpret mechanical drawings quickly and accurately. /. There is no country in which the inventor finds more encouragement and a broader field than in the United States. Millions of dollars are reaped by suc- cessful inventors every year. Many 47 valuable ideas have been lost because the men conceiving them lacked ability to express them in the only way in which they could be intelligently expressed — by means of drawings. A man with an inventive mind and the knowledge to be obtained from our Draftsmen's Course will be able not only to work out secretly his own ideas, but also to economize by making his own drawings for the Patent Office. g. A knowledge of mechanical draw- ing is required in nearly all United States civil service examinations for technical positions. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Furnished A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent to the student as soon as he has paid $10. A student not prepared to pay cash in advance or $10 down, can study the mathematics of his Course until his payments amount to $10, when the Outfit will be furnished. The student pays express charges. 48 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are the most valuable work ever prepared on mechanical drawing. They treat the subject fully and in detail. They are the only volumes in existence suitable for home study. The student, even though he may never recite to us, can study the Bound Volumes in spare time at home and almost without effort gain knowledge that will bring him a substantial increase in salary. b. They contain the latest and best ideas on mechanical drawing. There is no other single work so useful as these Bound Volumes. For reference pur- poses their value is almost unlimited. Nowhere else can the student find so clear, practical, authoritative answers to the many questions that arise in his daily practice. The student possessing these Bound Volumes has a complete up-to-date work unexcelled for clear- ness and conciseness, and containing exactly the information necessary to his success. c. They are fully indexed. Ever}^ important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which -it is likely to be sought. 49 Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122 " 2 Elements of Algebra 115 3 Logarithms 20 4 Geometry and Trigonom- etry 75 Examination Questions ... 32 Keys 115 Tables 37 J 5 Geometrical Drawing 77 6 Mechanical Drawing 161 7 Sketching 47 8 Practical Projection 100 9 Development of Surfaces. 65 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Pages 947 Illustrations, 406 Drawing Plates, 43 Instruction Papers, 17 Bound Volumes, 2 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They will enable any student of average intelligence to qualify as a practical draftsman. b. They give the student all the mathematical knowledge he requires in practicing mechanical drafting. c. They were prepared with special reference to the needs of those engaged in the shop and the drafting room. d. They are thoroughly practical. Written by men engaged in the daily practice of drafting, they represent the best methods of modem drafting rooms. e. They are the most clear, concise, and complete ever written on mechan- ical drawing. /. They teach how to make and read mechanical drawings. 50 g. They explain blueprinting. h. They contain no unnecessary operations. In every case the shortest and most practical methods have been adopted. i. They contain full instruction in sketching — teaching the student to make accurate pencil sketches of tools, machinery, etc. j. They are illustrated fully and in the greatest detail. Persons That Should Enroll a. Machinists and Machinists' Ap- prentices. b. Employes in electrical and ma- chine shops. c. Patternmakers. d. Toolmakers. e. Foundrymen. /. Blacksmiths, g. Employes in bridge works. h. Inventors and Experimenters. i. Young Men desirous of acquiring a practical knowledge of mathematics and mechanical drawing. y. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. k. Graduates of high schools and manual training schools. /. Teachers wishing to prepare for teaching mechanical drawing. Note — The Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) Course is intended for persons desiring- a practical knowledge of mathematics and mechanical drawing only; it teaches how to make and read working drawings, and to perform the calculations necessary to lay out these' draw- ings. If the prospective student desires a knowl- edge of machine design, and does not care to study the subject as fully as treated in the Mechanical Engineering Course or the Mechanical Course, he should enroll for the 51 Draftsmen's Course. Students wanting me- chanical drawing only, should enroll for the Me- chanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) Course. The student may take up drawing in the Course as early as he pleases, without waiting till he has finished the mathematics. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Mechanical drawing is becoming more and more the universal language for the transmission of ideas in the industrial establishments of the world. To the laboring workman, a knowledge of this language is a sure ladder of pro- motion. To the young man that has not yet selected a trade, it opens an entrance to the world of industrial activity — dividing, perhaps, the drud- gery of a shop apprentice's manual labor. b. No one intending to make a living within the boundaries of the industrial field can afford to be without a knowl- edge of mechanical drawing. The study of this subject will immediately begin to increase the student's earning power and lead him to a more congenial occu- pation. c. Promotion to the more respon- sible positions in an industrial estab- lishment is generally had through the drafting room. An apprentice or a workman giving proof of his ability to make a neat drawing is the first selected from the shop to fill a vacancy in the drafting department. Through his previous knowledge of the work, he will cut short the long period usually spent in making blueprints and tracings, having duties requiring much more skill assigned to him. By careful observation of the construction and working of every machine detail, and by using his spare time for the studying of mechanical sub- jects, he will soon become a machine designer at a good salary and with' pros- pects of further advancement. d. Nearly all United States civil ser- vice examinations for technical posi- tions require a knowledge of mechanical drawing. e. Our instruction is in full accord with the modern drafting room. The student is taught to draw his Plates in exactly the same manner as he would be called on to make a drawing in actual practice. On entering a drafting room he is thus fully prepared to take up his work without having to wait to learn new methods; this is a decided advan- tage and will help the student make rapid progress. Drawing Outfit Furnished A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent to the student as soon as he has paid $10. A student not prepared to pay cash in advance or $10 down, can study the mathematics of his Course until his payments amount to $10, when the Outfit will be furnished. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for G days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 53 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are the most valuable work ever prepared on mechanical drawing. They treat the subject fully and in detail. They are the only volumes in existence suitable for home study. The student, even though he may never recite to us, can study the Bound Volumes in spare time at home, and almost without effort gain knowledge that will bring him a substantial increase in salary. b. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They contain the latest and best ideas on mechanical drawing. Nowhere else can the student find such practical, helpful answers to the many different questions that come up in his daily practice. They contain exactly the information necessary to his success. 54 Mechanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Geometrical Drawing 77 2 Mechanical Drawing 161 3 Sketching 47 4 Practical Projection 100 5 Development of Surfaces 65 Pages 450 Illustrations, 289 Drawing Plates, 43 Instruction Papers, 5 Bound Volumes, 1 Geometrical Drawing describes draw- ing instruments and materials, and teaches' how to use them and give them proper care ; gives full instruction in lettering and geometrical construc- tions; and explains the representation of objects. Five Drawing Plates are included: one devoted to geometrical problems ; two devoted to projections ; one to conic sections; and one to intersections and developments. Mechanical Drawing begins with thorough instruction in fundamental matters — such as center lines, sections and section lining, breaks, hidden parts, screw threads, repetition of parts, abbreviations, scales, etc. — preparing the student to make solid progress with the nineteen Drawing Plates that follow. These Drawing Plates are devoted to such practical subjects as the flange shaft coupling, the shaft hanger, the dynamo commutator, spur gears and bevel gears, the steam engine, etc. Full instruction is given in the reading of working drawings. Blue- printing is thoroughly explained. 55 Note — Mechanical Drawing is so called because it is done with drawing instruments instead of with the free hand. The term could be applied to every kind of drawing done with the aid of instruments; but custom restricts its meaning to projection drawing only, and furthermore does not usually apply it to architectural drawing. Mechanical Drawing is not restricted to the rep- resentation of machines and machine details; it has very little or nothing in common with machine designing, which is covered in our Mechanical Engineering Course, our Mechanical Course, and our Draftsmen's Course. Sketching begins with the representa- tion of the most elementary objects — such as bolts, bushings, etc. — and gradually proceeds until it finally takes up the sketching of complex machines; it fully explains the use of the different instruments required for ascertaining the dimensions of the objects sketched. The ability to make good sketches is an accomplishment that many drafts- men lack. Our student will not only learn how to make sketches, but also how to work up the drawings from sketches. A thorough knov\^ledge of machine sketching is invaluable to mechanical engineers, machine designers, and all classes of men engaged in the mechanical industries. Practical Projection treats of the representation of objects by means of drawings, showing the dimensions of objects as they really are, rather than as they appear to the eye. There are seven Drawing Plates. A careful study of this Paper will give the student a more thorough and far more practical knowledge of the theory of projection than is usually possessed by draftsmen and machine designers. Development of Surfaces teaches how to represent the outline of a figure 56 which, when cut out of paper, sheet tin, etc., may be folded into a desired shape. There are five Drawing Plates. Persons That Should Enroll a. Machinists and Machinists' Ap- prentices. b. Employes in electrical machine shops. c. Patternmakers. d. Toolmakers. e. Foundrymen. /. Blacksmiths. g. Employes in bridge works. h. Inventors and Experimenters. i. Young Men desirous of acquiring a practical knowledge of mechanical drawing. j. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. k. Graduates of high schools and manual training schools. /. Teachers that wish to prepare for teaching mechanical drawing. Note — Among the classes listed there are some that need more instruction than is con- tained in our Mechanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) Course. Persons wanting a practical knowledge of mathematics besides mechanical drawing, should enroll for the Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) Course; persons wanting to become draftsmen in the fullest sense of the term — that not only want to be able to make working drawings, but also wish to study mathematics and mechanics as used in machine design — should enroll for the Draftsmen's Course; persons desiring to study machine design more fully than is treated in our Draftsmen's Course should enroll for the Mechanical Engineering Course or the Mechanical Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Mechanical Drawing opens the way to more pleasant employment and 57 increased pay; it is attractive to every man working at a small salary; it offers to young men just leaving school a clean and profitable profession just at the time of life when a choice of occu- pation is most difficult to make ; and to young women it opens a new sphere of usefulness with better income and shorter hotu-s than are had in the shops and the stores. Inventors with bright ideas, but with scanty means and a neglected education, are found in every village. To them a knowl- edge of mechanical drawing is not only useful; it is absolutely neces- sary. Our Mechanical Drawing Courses are needed by the majority, and will be useful to all. h. One of the greatest difficulties that presents itself to the young man on entering a modem drafting room is his lack of familiarity with practical drafting methods. He must learn methods in actual use before he can hope to succeed. Our Course, written by men of long experience as drafts- men and machine designers, is in per- fect harmony with the latest and best practice. The student is taught to draw his Plates in precisely the same manner as he would be called on to make a drawing were he engaged in the actual practice of drafting. Our instruction thus qualifies a sttident to take up at once the work in a drafting room without having to wait to famil- iarize himself with new methods; this is a decided advantage, and will help the student to make rapid progress. That our Drawing Courses are thor- oughly practical and meet with the 58 highest approval is shown by the fact that the General Electric Company — one of the largest maniifacturing con- cerns in the United States, employing over 600 draftsmen — is using our Instruction Papers in carrying on drawing instruction among its young men. This fact alone is sufficient proof that our Course is in full accord with the very best practice ; it is the only Course that will qualify the student as a practical draftsman. Drawing Outfit Furnished A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent to the student as soon as he has paid $10. A student not prepared to pay cash in advance or $10 down, can study the preliminary work on Geometrical Draw- ing in his Course until his payments amoimt to $10, when the Outfit will be furnished. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 8 months. The average student re- quires a little more time. Why the Bound Volume of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations The Bound Volume contains the Instruction Papers and the Drawing Plates of the Course. Each subject is 69 indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. It contains the latest and best ideas on mechanical drawing. Nowhere else can the student find instruction so clearly written and illustrated. The student, even though he may never recite to us, can study the Bound Volume in spare time at home, and almost without effort gain knowledge that will bring him a substantial increase in salary. 60 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume Complete Electrical Engineer- ing Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 122 Elements of Algebra 115 Logarithms 20 Geometrv and Trigonom- etry 75 Examination Questions ... 32 Keys 116 Tables 37. Geometrical Drawing 77 Mechanical Drawing 161 Sketching 47 Practical Projection 100 Development of Surfaces. 65 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47' Machine Elements 61 Mechanics of Fluids 53 Strength of Materials 37 Heat and vSteam 27 The Steam Engine 46 The Indicator 37 Engine Testing 50 Governors 45 Valve Gears 37 Steam Turbines 23 Examination Questions. . . 30 Keys 39 Electricity and Magnetism 35 Electrodynamics 55 Electrical Resistance and Capacity 59 The Magnetic Circuit 72 Electromagnetic Indue- tion 58 Chemistry and Electro- chemistry 55 Primary Batteries 78 Electrical Measurements. . 216 Examination Questions. . . 33 Keys 33 Dvnamos and Dvnamo Design 240 Direct-Current Motors 100 Alternating Currents 104 Alternators 55 Alternating-Current Appa- ratus 78 Examination Questions.. . 25 Keys 42 61 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE Design of Alternating-Cur- rent Apparatus • 169 Electric Transmission 78 Line Construction 69 Switchboards and Switch- board Appliances 89 Power Transformation and Measurement 87 Examination Questions. . . 17 Keys 20 Storage Batteries 86 40 41 Incandescent Lighting. . . Arc Lighting . 115 . 119 42 Interior "Wiring Examination Questions . . Keys . 179 . 21 . 21 43 44 45 46 Electric Power Stations. . Telegraph Systems Telephone Systems Applied Electricity. Examination Questions. . Keys . 274 . 120 . 114 65 . 19 . 26 47 48 Electric-Railway System.= Line and Track 66 118 49 50 51 52 Line Calculations Motors and Controllers. . Electric-Car Equipment. Multiple-Unit Systems. . . Examination Questions. . 51 . 79 . 78 . 58 . 17 . 13 Pages 5,005 Illustrations, 2,523 Instruction Papers, 76 Drawing Plates, 43 Bound Volumes, 9 ;6th Bound Volume 7th Bound Volume 8th Bound Volume 9th Bound Volume Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject that is necessary in an electrical engineering Course. b. They embrace instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of electrical engineering is begun. 62 c. They contain examples that relate directly to the practical work of elec- trical engineering. d. They give the student valuable information and directions that help him in his daily work, as soon as he begins to study the technical part of his Course. e. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas. He learns rules and how to apply them in practical work. /. They are of necessity clearer than ordinary textbooks, because the I. C. S. student must study out of the presence of a teacher, g. They are profusely illustrated. Wherever an illustration will make the text more clear, it is put in. Persons That Should Enroll a. Electrical Engineers. h. Employes of electrical factories desirous to become electrical engineers. c. Employes of machine shops desir- ing to become electrical engineers. d. Young Men attending school and desiring to pursue the study of electrical engineering outside of school hours. e. Men wishing to become managers or superintendents of large electric lighting and railway systems — men that want an intimate knowledge of the design of the apparatus as well as full information pertaining to its operation. /. Inventors and Experimenters. g. Draftsmen and Designers desir- ing a thorough knowledge of electrical designing. h. College Graduates whose train- ing has been in professions other than 63 electrical engineering, and whose work now requires a knowledge of that subject. i. Patent-Office Draftsmen. Remarks The duties of an electrical engineer are to calculate both the mechanical and the electrical proportions of electric machinery, and plan the construction of electrical plants. Besides being expert calculators, electrical engineers have to be practical electricians; but practical electricians do not have to be electrical engineers. This is a fact that is altogether too seldom understood by prospective students. The Com- plete Electrical Engineering Course is the only Course suitable for persons that want a thorough knowl- edge of electric machine design, power station design, and the management of extensive lighting and railway systems, and such persons are the only persons that should enroll for this Coiurse. If the prospective student does not desire to enter upon the Complete Electrical Engineering Course, but wishes to obtain a thorough knowledge of the elements of electricity and magnetism, steam and steam engines, and direct-current machine design, he should enroll for the Electrical En- gineering (Part 1) Course. This Course contains the subjects in the first five Bound Volumes of the chart. If the prospective student has had preliminary training equivalent to that given in the Electrical Engineering (Part 1) Course and desires to take up at once the most advanced work, 64 he should enroll for the Electrical Engineering (Part 2) Course; this Course, however, should never be recommended except to persons fully prepared to begin with the most dif- ficult work. Note — There is a mistaken notion that "engi- neering" always means "engine running." Nothing could be farther from the truth. The work of a man in a dynamo room — including even the chief engineer — requires no knowledge of electrical engineering (designing) in its broad- est sense. Besides being an expert engine runner, a chief engineer needs to be an expert installer, operator, and repairer of electric machinery. He may be ever so competent for his position with- out a knowledge of electrical designing. The Course for him is the Electric Lighting and Railways Course or the Steam-Electric Course — unless he wants to become an electrical engineer. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The use of electric dynamos, motors, lamps, and other appliances is increasing with astonishing rapidity. In fact the wide-spreading adoption of electric apparatus is the most remark- able feature of this w^onderfully indus- trial age. Any man looking forward to an engineering career will probably find his best opportunity in electrical engineering. b. There is a constant demand for new types of electric machinery, and there will therefore always be an urgent call for expert designers. c. New uses of electricity are dis- covered from day to day. Therefore, new machinery must be not only de- signed, but invented. d. To the engineer engaged in de- signing power stations, the combination 3 65 of instruction in steam and electric appli- ances given in our Course is of par- ticular value. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 4 years. The average student requires a little more time. Experimental Apparatus Required The student of our Complete Elec- trical Engineering Course should have our Complete Electrical Outfit, or its equivalent, as soon as he is ready to study "Principles of Electricity and Magnetism." The I. C. S. Complete Electrical Outfit consists of the follow- ing: Galvanometer, for measuring small electric currents; Slide-Wire Bridge, for measuring electrical resistance ; Bar Magnet; Horseshoe Magnet; Two Re- sistance Coils; Leclanche Cell; Com- pass; Box of Iron Filings; Insulated Wire. The Outfit is valued at $20; we furnish it to our student for $8.50. The student pays express charges. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Complete Elec- trical Engineering Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applica- tions in electrical engineering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a w^ork prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation ; for conciseness ; for intelli- gent adherence to the important features of their subjects ; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of electrical engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the stu- dent can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to 67 avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary princi- ples and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best electrical engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and syste- matic whole. 68 Electric Lighting and Railways Course Fifteen subjects are taught in the Electric Lighting and Railways Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain twenty, as follows : 10 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 102 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formiilas. ... 41 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 Machine Elements 61 Mechanics of Fluids 53 Strength of Materials 37 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 97 Dynamos and Motors 90 " Operation of Dynamos and Motors _ _. . 74 Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery 72 Geometrical Drawing 77 Mechanical Drawing 50 Steam Heating 51 Steam Turbines 23 Examination Questions. . . 19 Keys 23 Alternating Currents 94 ' Electric Transmission. . . . 184 Electric Lighting 325 Examination Questions. Keys Electric Railways Interior Wiring Examination Questions. Keys 30 43 401 192 28 47 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume Pages 2,395 Illustrations, 1.350 Drawing Plates, 16 Instruction Papers, 31 Bound Volumes, 4 Note — Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in subjects 5, 6, 8 14, and 15. operation of Dynamos and Motors is devoted to the installing, operat- ing, and repairing of dynamo-electric machinery. It treats of all the causes, remedies, and preventives of the various troubles that occur in dynamos and motors. Dynamo-Electric Machinery explains the special use of all types of dyna- mos and motors. All the various arma- tures and magnetic fields are herein illustrated and described, and the advantages of each type are set forth. Electric Lighting is a thorough treatise on every branch of the subject. The methods of making the incandescent lamp, the measuring of its candlepower, and light distribution are described. The principle of the new Nernst lamp is explained, and arc lamps — both open and enclosed — are treated of. Electric Railways is beyond question the best treatise ever prepared on the subject of electric railways. This Paper treats of every important appliance and system of distribution known to the art. The most prominent systems of car wiring and methods of control are shown in diagram. Roadbed construc- tion and rail bonding are illustrated with numerous examples of every-day practice. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject of importance to a man that would be. a practical electrician. b. They do not treat of electrical designing. The student is therefore 70 not required to study subjects that only a designer must know. c. They teach how to install and operate all classes of power-house machinery and accessories. d. They thoroughly explain the construction of outdoor lines. e. They show how to wire buildings for lamps, motors, and other appliances. /. They give instruction in all the necessary elementary subjects. g. They explain how to apply rules and formulas in every-day work. h. They show clearly the solution of the practical electrician's problems. i. They are more concise and clear than ordinary textbooks. y. They are more freely illustrated than ordinary textbooks. Wherever illustrations will be helpful to the stu- dent, they are put in. k. They are so plain and practical, they will give the student valuable help as soon as he begins to study. Persons That Should Enroll a. Employes of electrical factories — such as Battery-Cell Makers, Magnet Winders, Armature Winders, Lamp Makers, Instrument Makers, Testers, Machinists, Apprentices, etc. — who need to become not electrical designers, but expert practical electricians. 6. Employes of machine shops — such as Superintendents, Foremen, Ma- chinists, and Apprentices — desiring to take up tne study of practical electricity without pursuing the study of electrical engineering or designing. Owing to the extensive use of electric motors, electric cranes, and other electric appliances, machine-shop men with an electrical training are always in demand. c. Electrical Linemen, Firemen, Dy- namo Tenders, Repairmen, Engineers, and Superintendents. Their work does not require them to be electrical engi- neers ; but they should be skilled practi- cal electricians. (The attention of dyna- mo tenders, firemen, engineers, super- intendents, and all electrical power- house men should be called to the Steam-Electric Course. This is the Electric Lighting and Railways Course and the Complete Steam En- gineering Course combined especially to give power-house men a training in both electricity and steam.) d. Telephone and Telegraph Em- ployes, who frequently are desirous of getting into the electric lighting and railway field. e. Men engaged in wiring buildings for electric lights, motors, bells, and gas lighters — who do not need to learn electrical engineering, but who should become expert in practical work. /. Municipal Electricians — ^men that take care of city electrical properties, such as fire-alarms, police calls, etc. Only after gaining a thorough knowl- edge of electric lighting and railway circuits can these men keep their own apparatus well protected against such circuits. Besides, the broad practical training that the Course gives will con- stantly be of help in all branches of their w^ork. Remarks It is the work of the electrical engi- neer to design dynamos, motors, and 72 general electric machinery and appli- ances, and plan the arrangement of power houses, power-house machinery, and all circuits and apparatus — both internal and external — that form a part of an electrical plant. Special pains should be taken to enroll the student for the Complete Electrical Engi- neering Course, or the Electrical Engineering (Part 1) Course, or the Electrical Engineering (Part 2) Course — in preference to any other electrical Course — if he really wants to learn electrical engineering rather than the work of the practical elec- trician. The work of the practical electrician is to install, operate, and repair electric machinery, appliances, and circuits. Particular care should be taken to enroll the student for the Electric Lighting and Railways Course — and not the Electrical Engineering Course — if he wants to become a practical elec- trician only. Why Persons Should Enroll for the Electric Lighting and Rail- ways Course a. The power-house electrician of today does not hold his position long if he practices the costly cut-and-try methods that used to be tolerated. He is expected to know the exact results of connections — not after the switch is thrown, but before. b. The rapid increase in electric- lighting systems and electric-railway systems has created an unsatisfied demand for trained men to operate the plants. In the electrical field, 73 trained men advance faster than in any other; for there is a scarcity of men competent to hold important positions. c. There are almost unlimited op- portunities for the right sort of men in the electrical industries, and our Courses are developing the men that the owners of electric plants are glad to pay well. d. Our Electric Lighting and Railways Course is in every sense a practical electrician's Course. It treats of all the best methods in practice, and the student is constantly learning things that are immediately helpful to him. e. The Electric Lighting and Railways Course embraces every sub- ject pertaining to Electric Lighting, Electric Railways, Dynamo Running, and Interior Wiring. Thus the student gets a thorough training in each of the branches of electric lighting and elec- tric-railway operating. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives to study. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about IJ years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Electric Light- ing and Railways Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, if he is to study 74 Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why this Course is Valuable to Men Employed in Electric Lighting Plants, or at Work on Elec- tric Railway Systems Owners of electric machinery realize that their property is safe in skilled hands only. The man that, while at work, educates himself to fill a better position, will be the first man to be promoted. The best superintendent or manager "of an electrical property is the man that, while he was the best man in the fireroom, trained himself to be the best man in the dynamo room, and so on upward. Why the Electric Lighting and Railways Course Will Be of Value to Persons Not Doing Electrical Work, But Wanting to Engage in It As they study the Course they will be better and better qualified to secure employment. They will be getting a valuable ■ knowledge of electrical tech- nicalities, which knowledge will enable them to choose intelligently some special field to work in; and after they have obtained employment, they will be able to practice much better methods, advance much more rapidly than the un- trained workman, and command much better pay. It is a poor policy to postpone study till a position is secured. 75 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having success- fully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applications in electric lighting and railway operation with more thorough- ness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common- sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their sub- jects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so qtiickly so much money-earning knowledge . They are the best ever prepared for home study. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subjects of electric lighting and railways, and the details of these sub- jects are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can fxnd in a moment the solution of a problem it might other- wise take hours to master. 76 c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best electric lighting and railway practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. Electric Lighting Course I Electric Railways Course Dynamo Running Course The subjects contained in the Bound Volumes of the Reference Library of the Electric Lighting and Railways Course, from which the Electric Lighting Course, the Electric Rail- ways Course, and the Dynamo Run- ning Course are made up, are: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 102 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. ... 41 3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 4 Machine Elements 61 5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 6 Strength of Materials 37 7 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 8 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 97 9 Dynamos and Motors 90 10 Operation of Dynamos and Motors . 74 11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery 72 12 Geometrical Drawing 77 13 Mechanical Drawing 50 14 Steam Heating 51 15 Steam Turbines.... 23 Examination Questions.. . 19 Keys 23 16 Alternating Currents 94 17 Electric Transmission 184 18 Electric Lighting. 325 Examination Questions . . 30 Kevs 43 J 19 Electric Railways 401 20 Interior Wiring 192 Examination Questions. . . 28 Keys 47 Pages .2,395 Illustrations, 1,350 Drawing Plates, 16 Bound Volumes, 4 2d Bound Volume 78 Subjects Taught in the Courses In the Electric Lighting Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, 18, and 20. Subjects 12, 13, and 20 may be omitted. The four Bound Volumes containing the entire Elec- tric Lighting and Railways Course are furnished. In the Electric Railways Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, and 19. Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. The four Bound Volumes con- taining the entire Electric Lighting and Railways Course are furnished. In the Dynamo Running Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, and 11. Sub- jects 3 and 4 may be omitted. Two Bound Volumes containing the sub- jects of the Course are furnished. Number of Instruction Papers in the Courses In the Electric Lighting Course: 25 Instruction Papers; 16 Drawing Plates. In the Electric Railways Course: 24 Instruction Papers; 16 Drawing Plates. In the Dynamo Running Course* 12 Instruction Papers. Time Required to Finish the Courses That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Electric Lighting Course or the Electric Railways Course in abotit 1 year, and the Dynamo Running Course in 79 / about 9 months. The average stu- dent requires a httle more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Electric Light- ing Course or our Electric Rail- ways Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. If, how- ever," he does not wish to study draw- ing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our students for $7.95. The student pays express charges. The student of the Dynamo Running Course does not need an outfit. Classes of Persons Among Which Pro- spective Students Should be Sought The same classes among which pro- spective students of the Electric Lighting and Railways Course are nought; but the student should be enrolled for the full Electric Light- ing AND Railways Course in prefer- ence to any of its subordinate Courses, whenever possible. Reasons That Should Induce Persons to Enroll for These Subor- dinate Courses .The same reasons that should induce them to enroll for the full Electric Lighting and Railways Course. Remarks Electric lighting and electric-railway operating, though different, are very often combined; and dynamo running 80 is always involved in both. The aver- age student will therefore need instruc- tion in all three subjects. In fact, almost every person that needs any of the four subordinate Courses, needs all of them. For this reason any person wanting a knowl- edge of electric railways, electric light- ing, dynamo running, or interior wiring, should be enrolled for the parent Course — the Electric Lighting and Railways Course — if possible. Our Representative will do the student a kindness by acquainting him with this fact. Occasionally a man is met that wishes to learn only some particular portion of a subject that he really ought to know all about. Certain subjects in the Electric Lighting and Railways Course are therefore omitted, when the demands of such a man are granted, and we give him whichever of the sub- ordinate Courses he wants. If he enrolls for the Electric Lighting Course or the Electric Railways Course, we furnish him with all four Bound Volumes containing the entire Electric Lighting and Railways Course; for every student of the Elec- tric Lighting Course or the Electric Railways Course should have the com- plete Electric Lighting and Rail- ways Course for reference, even though he will not study it all. If, however, he enrolls for the Dynamo Running Course, only two Bound Volumes are needed for reference : or if he enrolls for the Interior Wiring Course, only three Bound Volumes are needed for reference. 81 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. They therefore give full and clear treat- ment of the principles, facts, and proc- esses of electrical practice. They excel all ordinary textbooks in concise- ness of statement and clearness of explanation. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia, because they treat of each subject fully and in detail. They are indexed so completely that any par- ticular reference can be easily found. c. They contain information so practical that some students, after learning enough of the elementary mathematics to be able to apply the rules, have without further recitation been able to secure good positions and obtain large salaries in their trades and professions. 82 Interior Wiring Course Seven subjects are taught in the Interior AViring Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain seventeen, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS P Arithmetic Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... Principles of Mechanics. . Machine Elements Mechanics of Fluids Strength of Materials Elements of Electricity and Magnetism Heat and Steam Examination Questions . . . Keys Dynamos and Motors Operation of Dynamos and Motors Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery Geometrical Drawing Mechanical Drawing Steam Heating Steam Turbines Examination Questions. . . Keys 1021 41 47 61 53 37 27 41 97 901 74 72 77 50 51 23 19 23 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 16 Electric Railways 17 Interior Wiring Examination Questions. Kevs ion L92 I 3 28 ( 47 J 401 192 I 3d Bound Volume Pages 1,719 Illustrations, 940 Drawing Plates, 16 Bound Volumes, 3 The Interior Wiring Course teaches how to wire btiildings for electric lamps, motors, and general electric appliances in conformity with the Fire Under- writers' requirements; and how to install electric bells, annunciators, and gas lighters. 83 Subjects Taught in the Course Nos. 1, 2, 7, 9, 12, 13, and 17. There are 13 instruction Papers and 16 Draw- ing Plates. Subjects 12 and 13 may- be omitted. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject that is necessary in an interior wiring course. b. They embrace instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before beginning the study of interior wiring. c. They contain examples relating directly to the practical work of interior wiring. d. They give the student valuable information and directions that will help him in his daily work as soon as he begins to study. e. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas. /. They are of necessity clearer than ordinary electrical textbooks, because the I. C. S. student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They are illustrated more freely than ordinary electrical textbooks. Wherever an illustration will make the text more clear, it is put in. h. They contain numerous worked- out examples showing how to apply the rules and foraiulas. Persons That Should Enroll. a. Persons doing interior wiring, such as Wiring Contractors, Wire men. Apprentices, Helpers, etc. 84 b. Persons wanting to become Fire Underwriters' Inspectors, Wiring Con- tractors, or Wiremen. Any man of average intelligence with an inclination for mechanical work can become an expert wireman by studying our Instruction Papers and practicing in regular work the methods that we teach. Of course, practical experience must be had in the service of some employer engaged in the wiring busi- ness ; we make no claim that our stu- dent can avoid that. We do claim, however, to give him the best possible directions for serving his employer well, and for quickly acquiring a mas- tery of the interior wireman 's trade. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Interior wiring is a trade in which skilled workmen are in great demand, for the use of electric lights and motors I is rapidly increasing. Many new electric plants are constantly being added to the : large number already in operation, and every year there are thousands of build- ings to be wired for lamps, motors, etc. b. Interior wiring is one of the most important electrical trades, and no one should be permitted to have charge of wiring installations unless he can pass a rigid examination in relation to the safety and the permanence of his work. There is no doubt that the State legis- lative bodies will soon require wiremen to undergo such examinations. c. In order to be skilled, it is abso- lutely necessary for a wireman to have the theoretical training contained in our Course. Without it he cannot be quali- fied to make his work safe, substantial, and in accordance with the Fire Under- writers' rules. d. Our Instruction Papers give ex- plicit directions for placing wires so that no fire is likely to be caused by them. e. Well-trained wiremen are well paid. Interior wiring is a trade that may be taken up by young men looking for something profitable to do. A person not in the interior-wiring busi- ness, but wishing to become an expert wireman, should study our Instruction Papers and get employment as a wire- man's apprentice. He will soon learn the principles of electricity that a skilled wireman must know, and the practical work — which is not hard for any man of a mechanical turn of mind — will be doubly easy for him. This is one of the best openings of the day for young men seeking a profitable employ- ment. /. Many serious fires have occurred and people have been shocked to death because of the faulty wiring of buildings — -which has caused the insurance com- panies, with the authority of the State Governments, to take a firm stand in regard to what sort of interior wiring may be done. Faulty wiring is often installed by men that have had years . of experience and mean to do right ; but good intentions will not make up for lack of training. Such wiremen cause their emplo3^ers heavy losses; for the work must be done over until passed by the Fire Underwriters' Inspectors. g. Through the employment of elec- trical energy for operating lamps, motors, heaters, cooking utensils, and other appliances, the business of interior wiring has become one of the most im- portant branches of the electrical in- dustry. Engineers have devoted much thought and labor to the development of wiring systems that assure freedom from iire and personal shock, and the authorities have been quick to recognize the improvements and insist upon the general installation of these systems. Remarks The business of interior wiring is dis- tinct from electrical power-house mat- ters; but it is not so remote therefrom as might be thought. While interior wiring is a business that can be success- fully followed by persons without a knowledge of electric lighting and rail- ways, the better class of work is usually done by wiremen having that knowl- edge. Naturally these are the men that are never out of employment, and that get the best salaries. Wiremen can not only do better work if able to consider the technical features of an entire light- ing or railway system, but they are bet- ter prepared to take positions as general electricians. Our Electric Lighting AND Railways Course may therefore be preferred by those interested in the subject of interior wiring. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stti- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 9 months. The average stu- dent requires a little more time. 87 Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Interior Wiring Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the student does not wish to study drawing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suit- able for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. They therefore give full and clear treat- ment of the principles, facts, and proc- esses of electrical practice. They excel all ordinary textbooks in concise- ness of statement and clearness of explanation. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia, because they treat of each subject fully and in detail. They are indexed so completely that any particular reference can be easily found. c. They contain information so prac- tical that some students, after learning enough of the elementary mathematics to be able to apply the rules, have with- out further recitation been able to secure good positions and obtain large salaries in their trades and professions. 88 Electric Car Running Course 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 77 2 Electricity and Magnetism 94 3 Direct-Current Dynamos . 54 4 Electric Motors 48 5 Source and Distribution of Power 45 6 Current-Collectors 40 Examination Questions . . 23 Keys 39 7 Trunk Connections 77 8 Resistance Coils and Cables 38 9 Railway Motors 51 LO Simple Control Circuits . . 30 LI Series-Parallel Control ... 35 L2 Metallic-Return Svstems . 42 L3 Car-Wiring Diagrams .... 37 L4 Electric Car Heating and Lighting 56 L5 Hand-Brakes 47 Examination Questions . . 20 L6 Straight Air Brakes 711 L7 Automatic Air Brakes 65 L8 Electric Brakes and Sig- nals 41 19 Mechanical Instructions . 46 JO Operating Instructions . . 41 Jl Trial Equipment 66 12 Armature Repair Work . . 127 23 Maintenance of Equip- ment , 52 J4 Electrical Measurements and Tests 69 Examination Questions . . 23, Pages 1 ,454 Illustrations, 837 Instruction Papers, 31 Bound Volumes, 3 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace all the details regarding car equipment. h. They explain the principles and the purposes of motors, brakes, con- trollers, circuit-breakers, fuses, and 3d Bound Volume other machines and appHances used on electric cars. c. They give concise and clear direc- tions for operating the machinery and appliances with the highest possible efficiency under all conditions arising in electric-railway practice. d. They contain valuable instruc- tion for the car-barn employe regarding the inspecting, testing, and repairing of motors, controllers, circuit-breakers, and other apparatus used on electric cars, and give general directions for the maintenance of equipment and for the arrangement of the car-bam shops. e. They embrace full information in regard to the repairing of railway- motor armatures. /. They contain all the illustrations and diagrams necessary in order for the student quickly to comprehend electric-car running. g. They are of necessity more concise and. clear than ordinary textbooks; for our students must study out of the presence of a teacher. h. They give the student much valuable information and directions that will help him in his daily work, as soon as he begins to study. i. They are written in a simple style, insuring ease of comprehension. Persons That Should Enroll a. Motormen. h. Conductors. c. Persons wanting to become motor- men or conductors. d. Car- Barn Men. Note — All persons employed about an electric- car barn can make themselves worth much more 90 to their employers by acquiring a knowledge of how to keep the cars in repair. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The cost of operating an electric- railway system depends almost as much on the technical training of the men that run the cars as on the design of the machinery of the plant. In running a car at a certain speed over a certain length of track, many men consume 50 per cent, more power than other men use. A car-runner's value is propor- tional to his technical knowledge. b. There is only one practicable way for electric-car operators to raise their wages: they must acquire technical training, and that is easiest obtained through correspondence instruction. The electric railway owner's profits are largely dependent on the technical ability of his men, and he is usually glad to add to their wages a fair portion of what their superior training enables them to save for him. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1^ years. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations The Bound Volumes embrace all the ^Instruction Papers, Examination Ques- 91 tions, and Keys of the Course. The Vol- umes treat of all the best methods of elec- tric-car operating, and the principles and facts are explained so clearly that the student can easily understand them. These volumes are indexed much more fully than other textbooks; every item that the reader would be likely to look up is indexed one or more times, accord- ing to the initial letter under which the item may be sought. Thus the student possesses a complete, concise, and up- to-date work on scientific electric-car running — which is sure to benefit him, even if he does no more than read it thoroughly without reciting to us. 92 Telephone Engineering Course 1 Arithmetic 120 ^ 30 2 Mensuration 3 Elements of Algebra .... 76 4 Algebraic Equations and 5 Elements of Trigonom- etry Principles of Mechanics . . 38 47 1st Bound Volume 6 Machine Elements 61 Examination Questions . . 31 Keys 83 Tables 28 J 7 Electricity and Magnetism 35] 8 Electrodynamics 55 9 Electrical Resistance and Capacity 59 10 The Magnetic Circuit 72 11 Electromagnetic Induc- 2d Bound 12 tion Chemistry and Electro- 58 Volume chemistry 55 13 Primary Batteries 78 14 Electrical Measurements . 216 Examination Questions . . 33 Keys 33 15 Principles of Telephony. . 45 16 Properties of Telephone Circuits 41 17 Telephone Receivers .... 38 18 Telephone Transmitters . 37 19 Telephone Apparatus .... 43 20 Magneto-Generators and Bells 52 21 Circuits of Telephone In- struments 40 22 Telephone Instruments . . 49 ^ 3d Bound 23 Installation of Telephones 37 Volume 24 Line Disturbances and Transpositions 44 25 Long-Distance Telephony 49 26 Magneto-Switchboards . . 84 27 Large Magneto-Switch- boards 43 28 T e 1 e p h o n e-S witchboard Apparatus 40 Examination Questions . . 26 Keys 37, 93 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 29 Principles of Central-En- ergy Systems 35 30 Central- Energy Systems. . 53 31 Central-Energy Main and Branch Exchanges 49 32 Common-Battery Signal- ing Systems 31 33 Bell Central-Energy Sys- tem 68 34 Bell Trunk Circuits 33 35 Bell Toll and Testing Cir- cuits 43 36 Kellogg Central -Energy System 53 37 Party-Line Systems 88 38 Exchange Wiring and Ex- tension Telephones .... 50 39 Simultaneous Telephony and Telegraphy 75 40 Storage Batteries 73 Examination Questions . . 23 Keys 35 41 Automatic Telephone Sys- tems 110 42 House Telephones 66 43 Testing of Telephone Cir- cuits 116 44 Telephone-Line Construc- tion 198 45 Telephone Cables 59 46 Power Equipment 127 Examination Questions . . 23 Keys 27 J Pages Illustrations, 1,134 Instruction Papers, 62 Bound Volumes, 5 .3,148 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject prop- erly included in a telephone engineering course. h. They embrace instr,uction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of tele- phone engineering is begun. 94 c. They contain examples relating directly to the practical work of tele- phone engineering. d. They give the student valuable information and directions that immedi- ately help him in his daily work. e. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas. Instead, they teach rules and how to apply them in practical work. /. They are of necessity more concise and clear than ordinary textbooks, because our student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They are illustrated more freely than ordinary electrical textbooks. Wherever an illustration will make a statement more clear, it is put in. k. They contain numerous worked- out examples, showing how to apply all the rules. i. They treat each subject so thor- oughly that any person understanding them has no difficulty in understanding the little changes that are often made in systems. Yet the Instruction Papers are not encumbered with a description of every device that has ever been tried. Note — So many experiments are going on in the telephone industry, it is inadvisable to attempt to include in a Course all the variations of present-day systems. Such a procedure would make the Course exceedingly long — so long that by the time a student had finished it, much of the apparatus he had learned about would have fallen into disuse. Our Telephone Engineering Course explains the facts, principles, and proc- esses underlying the operation of all telephone systems, and explains them so thoroughly that the student finishing the Course will have all the knowledge required to analyze any system and understand its operation. 95 Persons That Should Enroll a. Telephone Linemen. b. Telephone Wiremen. c. Foremen of Telephone Construc- tion Work. d. Telephone Monitors (usually girls that have served as operators). e. Chief Operators. /. Inspectors. g. Cable Splicers. h. Wire Chiefs. i. Switchmen in automatic ex- changes. y. Troublemen. k. Managers. /. Superintendents. m. Employes of telephone manu- facturing companies. n. Municipal Electricians; Signal Corps Men; and Naval Electricians. o. Telegraph Operators and Con- struction Men along railroads now using the telephone as well as the telegraph, p. School Graduates desiring to engage in any branch of the telephone business. q. Young Men, either employed or unemployed, wanting to secure em- ployment with a telephone manufac- turing company or a telephone exchange company. As they study the Course, they will be better qualified to secure employment. They will be getting a valuable knowledge of telephone tech- nicalities, which knowledge will enable them not only to obtain a position, but to use much better methods and ad- vance much more rapidly than un- trained workmen 96 ;-. Electricians and Electrical En- gineers wishing a better knowledge of telephones and telephone systems. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The rapid increase in telephone systems has created a heavy demand for trained men to manage them, keep them in good working order, and make extensions. b. Telephone work requires technical skill of the highest order, and the man possessing that skill can command a high salary. c. The owners of telephone systems realize that the volume and the profits of their business are dependent on the technical knowledge of their employes, and trained men are rapidly advanced to important and well-paying positions. d. The telephone industry is expe- riencing a wonderful growth. Instru- ments are being installed in thousands of homes and offices whose owners have not till lately appreciated the necessity of the service. Moreover, the com- panies no longer confine their operations to the city. First-class service at fair rates is being offered throughout the farming districts, and the rural circuits are becoming an important part of 'every company's system. Naturally, the greater the increase in subscribers, the more valuable an instrument is to each; and, in view of the great utility of the service and the fact that that utility is just beginning to be recognized by hundreds of thousands heretofore indif- ferent to the advantages of the tele- phone, the immediate prospects for the industry are amazing. 4 97 e. There has always been a scarcity of telephone experts — persons knowing how to design, construct, install, and repair instruments and exchange appa- ratus — and the present increase in sub- scribers is resulting in a still greater demand for skilled men. Note— Occasionally a prospective student prefers to wait till he has secured a position with a telephone company before enrolling for our Telephone Engineering Course. This is a mistake. By mastering our Course or even a portion of it, before applying for employment, students often begin above the hard-work-at-low- pay positions that the novice is obliged to accept at first. Why the Telephone Engineering Course Will Be of Value to Persons Not Yet Engaged in Telephone Work iVs they study the Course, they will be better qualified to secure employ- ment. They will be getting a valuable knowledge of telephone technicalities, which knowledge will enable them to obtain employment, practice much better methods, and advance much more rapidly than untrained workmen. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Experimental Apparatus Required The student of our Telephone Engi- neering Course should have our Com- plete Electrical Outfit, or its equivalent, 98 as soon as he is ready to study "Prin- ciples of Electricity and Magnetism." The I. C. S. Complete Electrical Outfit consists of the following : Galvanometer, for measuring small electric currents; Slide- Wire Bridge, for measuring elec- trical resistance; Bar Magnet; Horse- shoe Magnet; Two Resistance Coils; Leclanche Cell; Compass; Box of Iron Filings; Insulated Wire. The Outfit is valued at $20; we furnish it for $8.50. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. All the Instruction Papers, Exam- ination Questions, and Keys of the Course are embraced in the Bound Volumes. These Papers virtually con- sist of a step-by-step series of practical directions to be followed by the student, not under the guidance of a present teacher, but according to his own inter- pretation. The Papers having success- fully met the exacting requirements of thousands of correspondence students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of the principles and the applications in telephone practice with more thorough- ness and conciseness than is possible in j a work prepared on any other plan. I b. They contain worked-out solu- 1! tions of all the important problems ! that are known to be solvable in tele- i phone practice. |: c The Bound Volumes are fully indexed. L or c 99 Telegraph Engineering Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE Arithmetic 122 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. ... 41 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions 71 Elementary Mechanics. ... 67 Examination Questions. . . 42 Keys 133 Tables 18 Principles of Electricity and Magnetism 142 Electrical Measurements. . 98 Batteries 109 Examination Questions. . . 28 Keys 47 Elements of Telegraph Operating 60 Telegraphy (Parts 1, 2, and 3).. 467 Examination Questions. . . 20 Keys 34 Telegraphy (Parts 4, 5, and_6).: _. 489 Examination Questions. . . 13 Keys 32 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Vokime 4th Bound Volume Pages 2,033 Illustrations, 707 Instruction Papers, 19 Bound Volumes, 4 Electrical Measurements treats of the instruments and the methods employed in measuring the electrical forces and properties of telegraph circuits. Elements of Telegraph Operating explains the Morse alphabet and gives the abbreviations generally used in telegraph operating; it describes keys, sounders, and gravity cells. It also gives information regarding the use of the typewriter in receiving. 100 A Few of the Important Subjects Treated in the Paper Entitled "Telegraphy" a. The principles of telegraphy; tele- graph systems; instruments; terminal switchboards ; intermediate switch- boards; and loop switchboards. b. The properties of line circuits and cable circuits. c. Dynamos and storage batteries and their use in large telegraph systems. d. Telegraph repeaters. e. Duplex, quadruplex, multiplex, automatic, printing, writing, high speed, and submarine systems. /. Simultaneous telegraph and tele- phone systems. g. Wireless telegraphy. h. District-messenger systems. i. Overhead, underground, and cable construction work ; tests for the location of grounds, crosses, and open circuits; electrostatic capacity and resistance of line and cable conductors. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject prop- erly included in a telegraph engineering course. b. They include instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be imderstood before the study of tele- graph engineering is begun. c. They contain examples relating directly to the practical work of tele- graph engineering. d. They give the student valuable information and directions that immedi- ately help him in his daily work 101 e. They do not require the student to spend his time studying the derivation of formulas; they teach rules and show how to apply them in practical work. /. They are of necessity concise and clear, because our student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They are illustrated freely. Wher- ever an illustration will make a state- ment more clear, it is put in. h. They contain worked-out exam- ples showing how to apply all the rules. i. They treat each subject so thor- oughly that any person understanding them has no difficulty in tmderstanding the little changes that are often made in systems. Yet the Instruction Papers are not encumbered with a description of every device that has ever been tried. Persons That Should Enroll a. Telegraph Operators. h. Telegraph Linemen. c. Telegraph Wiremen. d. Foremen of Telegraph Construc- tion Work. e. Employes of manufacturers of telegraph apparatus. /. Naval Electricians. g. Signal Corps Men. h. Municipal Electricians. i. Electricians and Electrical Engi- neers that desire a better knowledge of telegraph systems. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There is a great demand for skilful electricians in the field of telegraphy; and operators that have studied to become engineering experts are quickly 102 promoted to the most important posi- tions. The demand for skilled men does not come from the big telegraph companies alone, but from private- wire owners as well. b. There are almost unlimited oppor- tunities for the right sort of men in the higher branches of the telegraph busi- ness, and our Course enables operators to rise quickly to them, c. Our Telegraph Engineering Course is in every sense a practical Covirse. It treats of all the best sys- tems, appliances, and methods; and the student is constantly learning things that are immediately helpful to him. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than li^ years. The average stu- dent requires a little more time. Experimental Apparatus Required The student of our Telegraph Engineering Course should have our Complete Electrical Outfit, or its equiva- lent, as soon as he is ready to study "Principles of Electricity and Magne- tism." The I. C. S. Complete Electrical Outfit consists of the following: Gal- vanometer, for measuring small elec- tric currents; Slide-Wire Bridge, for measuring electrical resistance; Bar Magnet ; Horseshoe Magnet ; Two Resist- ance Coils ; Leclanche Cell ; Compass ; Box of Iron Filings; Insulated Wire. 103 The Outfit is valued at $20; we furnish it to our student for $8.50. The student pays express charges. Remarks We do not make telegraph operators ; we help them: It is not the object of this Course to teach sending and receiving. We do not furnish telegraph instru- ments. Why the Bound Volumes of the Ref- erence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. All the Instruction Papers, Exam- ination Questions, and Keys of the Course are embraced in the Botmd Volumes. These Papers virtually con- sist of a step-by-step series of practi- cal directions to be followed by the student, not under the guidance of a present teacher, but according to his own understanding. The Papers hav- ing successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of corre- spondence students, it is evident that the Boimd Volumes treat of the prin- ciples and the applications in telegraph engineering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. b. The Boimd Volumes contain worked-out solutions of all the impor- tant problems that are known to be solvable in telegraph engineering. c. The Bound Volumes are fully indexed. Every important item is 104 indexed according to all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. d. The possessor of the I. C. S. Telegraph Engineering Bound Volumes has a complete, concise, and up-to-date treatise on scientific telegraph design, construction installation, and man- asfement. 105 Complete Steam Engineering Course Thirty-six subjects are taught in the Complete Steam Engineering Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirty-seven, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 102] 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas 41 3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 4 Machine Elements 61 5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 ^ 1st Bound 6 Strength of Materials 37 Volume 7 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 8 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 97. 9 Dynamos and Motors 90 10 Operation of Dynamos and Motors 74 11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- 12 ery Geometrical Drawing 72 77 . 2d Bound Volume 13 Mechanical Drawing 50 14 Steam Heating 51 15 Steam Turbines 23 19 Examination Questions . . . Keys 23 16 Types of Steam Boilers. . . 361 17 Boiler Details 23 48 18 Boiler Fittings 19 Combustion, Firing, and Draft... 25 20 Boiler Design 58 21 Economic Combustion of Coal .■ 25 22 Automatic Furnaces and , 3d Bound Mechanical Stokers 19 Volume 23 Boiler Installation 42 24 Boiler Management 44 25 Boiler Trials 44 26 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 27 Elevators 231 Examination Questions . . . 38 Keys ;. ... 51, 106 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 28 The Steam Engine 461 29 The Indicator 37 30 Engine Testing 50 31 Governors 45 32 Valve Gears 77 33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 34 Compound Engines 40 f Volume 35 Engine Management 88 36 Engine Installation 45 37 Pumps 185 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 61 Pages 2.531 Illustrations, 1,057 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes. 4 Note — No recitation is asked for in subject 11. Remarks A student of steam engineering should study electrical subjects 7, 9, and 10 because there are comparatively few steam plants in which the engineer is not required to run electric machinery of some kind. In fact the steam engi- neer of today is deficient in training unless he is thoroughly familiar with both the theory and the working of dyn- amos and electric motors. The elec- trical papers in our Complete Steam Engineering Course — entitled "Ele- ments of Electricity and Magnetism," "Dynamos and Motors," and "Opera- tion of Dynamos and Motors" — embrace all the general electrical in- struction that the up-to-date steam engineer must have. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject that is necessary in a steam engineering course. 107 b. They include instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of steam engineering is begun. c. They contain examples relating directly to the practical work of steam engineering. d. They give the student valuable information and directions that will help him in his daily work, as soon as he begins to study. e. They do not require the student to spend time studying the derivation of formulas; they give rules and teach how to apply them in practical work. /. They are of necessity made clearer than ordinary textbooks, because our student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They contain many more illustra- tions than do ordinary textbooks. h. They contain worked-out exam- ples showing how to apply all the rules. i. They are prepared so as to help the student qualify for license examina- tion; but they are in no sense a set of cut-and-dried questions and answers restricted to examination requirements. Persons That Should Enroll a. Stationary Engineers. b. Stationary Firemen. c. Employes of machine shops where steam engines and boilers are built. d. Men emiployed about electrical power houses. e. Young Men wanting to become steam engineers. /. Inventors and Experimenters. g. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen whose work requires them to 108 form intelligent opinions about power- plant operation. h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, etc. wishing to rise to more responsible positions. i. Draftsmen and Designers desiring a knowledge of steam and steam appa- ratus. j. Patent-Office Draftsmen. k. Men that sell steam engines, boilers, pumps, packing, and general steam appliances and fittings; and men that wish to qualify for becoming such salesmen. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The steam-plant employe's oppor- tunity for advancement lies in his ability to make his employer's plant give high service at low expense. Mil- lions of dollars are expended yearly in the production of steam, and owners of steam plants — realizing that a con- siderable portion of the cost is owing to wasteful methods — are quick to increase the responsibility and the pay of the employe showing ability to keep expenses as low as they should be. h. The profits in steam-plant opera- tion are largely dependent on the fire- man's ability to get the greatest degree of heat from a given quantity of coal, and to provide for a free transfer of the heat to the water in the boiler. The value of the boiler-room employe whose methods are economical does not long go unrecognized. Our Course gives instruction in the principles of combustion and teaches how to practice the highest economy in fuel consump- tion. 109 c. Steam engineers, too, must thor- oughly understand economical boiler firing; otherwise they are unable to direct their subordinates intelligently. Engineers, as well as firemen, must understand how to operate and care for boilers ; how to remove scale and prevent incrustation; how properly to use pumps, injectors, feedwater heaters, and kindred appliances; and how to set and care for safety valves. Our Course teaches these things. d. As a safeguard to the public, stationary engineers are in many states required to obtain licenses before they are permitted to take charge of plants. In New York, and other large cities, an engineer is required to have a special license for each plant he operates; and he cannot take charge of a plant of a higher grade without being examined for a new license. The National Asso- ciation of Stationary Engineers and the American Order of Steam Engineers are endeavoring to secure the passage of license laws in states that do not now require the examining and licensing of engineers. The license system will soon be so general that the poorly trained man will be unable to get a position as a steam engineer. Our Course helps men qualify for license examinations. The Value of the Course to a Person Not Yet Engaged in Steam Engineering As he studies the Course, he will be getting knowledge that will enable him to advance to the engine room much more quickly than a fireman that has not studied the theory of steam engi- neering. 110 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Complete Steam Engineering Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The stu- dent pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having success- fully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of prin- ciples and applications of steam engi- neering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their sub- jects; and for practicability, they are 111 unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money- earning knowledge. h. They are invaluable for refer- ence purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. The volumes are devoted to the subject of steam engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with great care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so thor- oughly are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the information relating to any particular point or problem in which he is interested. 112 Advanced Engine Running Course Twenty-seven subjects are taught in the Advanced Engine Running Course. The Bound Vokimes of the Reference Library contain thirty-seven, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS Arithmetic Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... Principles of Mechanics. . . Machine Elements Mechanics of Fluids Strength of Materials. . . . Elements of Electricity and Magnetism Heat and Steam Examination Questions. . . Keys Dynamos and Motors Operation of Dynamos and Motors Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery Geometrical Drawing Mechanical Drawing Steam Heating Steam Turbines Examination Questions. . . Keys Types of Steam Boilers Boiler Details Boiler Fittings Combustion, Firing, and Draft Boiler Design Economic Combustion of Coal Automatic Furnaces and Mechanical Stokers Boiler Installation Boiler Management Boiler Trials Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems Elevators. Examination Questions. . . Keys PAGES 102 41 47 61 53 37 66 27 41 97 901 74 72 77 50 51 23 19 23 361 23 48 25 58 25 19 42 44 44 56 231 38 51 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume I. 3d Bound Volume 113 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE; 28 The Steam Engine 46 29 The Indicator 37 30 Engine Testing 50 31 Governors 45 32 Valve Gears 77 33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 35 Engine Management 88 36 Engine Installation 45 37 Pumps 165 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 61 Pages 2,531 Illustrations. 1,057 Instruction Papers, 32 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes, 4 Note — Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. •No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. The four Bound Volumes containing the entire Complete Steam Engineering Course are furnished to each person enrolling for the Advanced Engine Running Course. Heat and Steam states the modem theory of heat, explains the measuring of temperature, describes the effects of the apphcation of heat to Hquids, and treats of the general properties of steam. Boiler Details treats of the methods of connecting boiler plates and the kinds of riveted joints. Stresses on boiler shells are explained, and rules for calculating safe working pressures are given. Boiler Fittings is the title of a full treatise on safety valves, steam gauges, gauge-cocks, water gauges, water col- umns, and boiler fittings in general. The construction of low-water alarms and their method of operation is explained. Domes, steam drums, man- holes, and handholes are fully de- scribed. This paper also includes much 114 i valuable instruction relative to feed- piping, whistles, furnace fittings, and damper regulators. Boiler Feeding and Feedwater Prob- lems treats of apparatus and processes that pertain to the title. The princi- pal types of injectors are finely illus- trated and explained, and thorough instruction is given in their manage- ment. The effects of the various impurities in feedwater, tests for im- purities, and means of neutralizing impurities are thoroughly explained. The Indicator is devoted to the details of indicators and the reducing motions used in their operation. Full directions are given for taking dia- grams. This Paper describes fully and plainly the meaning of the lines of an indicator diagram, and explains how the position and shape of the lines reveal various faults of valve setting. Persons That Should Enroll a. Stationary Engineers. b. Stationary Firemen. c. Employes of machine shops where steam engines and boilers are built. d. Men employed about electrical power houses. e. Young Men wanting to become steam engineers. /. Inventors and Experimenters. g. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen whose work requires them to form intelligent opinions about power- plant operation. h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, etc. wishing to rise to more responsible positions. 115 i. Draftsmen and Designers desiring a knowledge of steam and steam apparatus. j. Patent-Office Draftsmen. k. Men that sell steam engines, boilers, pumps, packing, and general steam appliances and fittings; and men that wish to qualify for becoming such salesmen. Note — The Advanced Engine Running Course is a part of the Complete Steam Engi- neering Course. If the prospective student wants a more thorough knowledge of steam engineering, he should enroll for the Complete Steam Engineering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The men in charge of a steam plant must understand how to operate and care for boilers; how to remove scale and prevent incrustation; how to properly use pumps, injectors, feed- water heaters, and kindred appliances; and how to set and care for safety valves. Our Course teaches these things. h. As a safeguard to the public, stationary engineers are, in many states, required to obtain licenses before they are permitted to take charge of plants. In New York and other large cities, an engineer is required to have a special license for each plant that he operates; and he cannot take charge of a plant of a higher grade without being examined for a new license. The National Association of Stationary Engineers and the American Order of Steam Engineers are endeavoring to secure the passage of license laws in states that do not now require the examining and licensing of engineers. 116 The license system will soon be so gen- eral that the poorly trained man will be unable to get a position as a steam engineer. Our Course helps men qualify for license examinations. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogther on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about Ih years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Advanced Engine Running Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the student does not wish to study drawing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having success- fully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles 117 and applications of steam engineering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. The volumes are devoted to the subject of steam engineering, and the details of that subject are explained with great care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so thoroughly are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the information relating to any particular point or problem he is interested in. c. They are written in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary princi- ples and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best steam-engineering practice in the country are here col- lected and assembled into an orderly and systematic whole. 118 Engine Running Course Twenty-one subjects are taught in the Engine Running Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain thirty-seven, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 1021 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... 41 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 Machine Elements 61 Mechanics of Fluids 53 1st Bound Strength of Materials 37 Volume Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 Heat and Steam 27 41 Examination Questions. . . Keys 97. Dynamos and Motors 90] Operation of Dynamos and Motors 74 Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery 72 77 Geometrical Drawing 2d Bound Volume Mechanical Drawing 50 Steam Heating 51 Steam Turbines 23 Examination Questions. . . 19 Keys 23. Types of Steam Boilers.. . . 36 Boiler Details 23 48 Boiler Fittings Combustion, Firing, and Draft 25 Boiler Design 58 Economic Combustion of Coal 25 Automatic Furnaces and , 3d Bound Mechanical Stokers 19 Volume Boiler Installation 42 Boiler Management 44 Boiler Trials 44 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 Elevators 231 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 51. 119 LIST OF SUBJECTS PA( 28 The Steam Engine 46' 29 The Indicator 37 30 Engine Testing 50 31 Governors 45 32 Valve Gears 77 33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 35 Engine Management 88 36 Engine Installation 45 37 Pumps 165 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 61^ Pages 2,531 Illustrations, 1,057 Instruction Papers, 32 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes, 4 Note — Subjects 7, 9, 10, and 27 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. Ihe four Bound Volumes containing the entire Complete Steam Engineering Course are furnished to each person enrolling for the Engine Running Course. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They include all necessary sub- jects pertaining to successful engine running. b. They give instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of engine running is begun. c. They contain examples relating directly to engine running. d. They give valuable information and directions that will help the student in his daily work as soon as he begins to study. e. They do not treat of the deriva- tion of formulas. Instead, they give concise rules and show how to apply them in practical work. 120 /. They are of necessity made clearer than ordinary textbooks, for our student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They contain many more iUus- trations than do ordinary textbooks. Wherever illustrations will make a statement more clear, we use them. h. They contain worked-out exam- ples, showing how to apply the rules. i. They will help the student qualify for license examination. Persons That Should Enroll a. Stationary Engineers. b. Stationary Firemen. c. Employes of machine shops where steam engines and boilers are built. d. Men employed about electrical power houses. e. Young Men wanting to become steam engineers. /. Inventors and Experim.enters. g. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen whose work requires them to form intelligent opinions about poM'^er- plant operation. h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, etc. wishing to rise to responsible positions. i. Owners of steam plants too small to have an engineer. /. Draftsmen and Designers desiring a knowledge of steam and steam apparatus. k. Patent-Office Draftsmen. /. Men that sell steam engines, boil- ers, pumps, packing, and general steam appliances and fittings; and men that wish to qualify for becoming such sales- men. 121 Note — The Engine Running Course is a part of the Complete Steam Engineering Course. If the prospective student wants a more thorough knowledge of steam engineering, he should enroll for the Complete Steam Engi- neering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. An engineer's advancement de- pends on his merit. The main reason for a man's holding a poorly paid posi- tion is that he is not worthy of any- thing better. He may think that because he has run an engine for years his length of service should command increased pay; but it does not. He works for the same sum month in and month out with never a thought of getting more by making himself worth more. Such a man cannot win ad- vancement. Indeed, he has no right to expect it unless he merits it. In steam engineering, as in every other field, the man that learns and uses what he learns is the man that goes to the top. h. Thousands of men throughout the country are today desirous of qualifying for positions as steam engineers. The onl}^ thing preventing their advance- ment is a lack of technical knowledge of engine running, with which naturally is associated the care and operation of steam boilers. This technical knowl- edge, sufficient to enable an intelligent person to operate successfully a small steam plant, is given in the Engine Running Course. c. The engineer or fireman that sup- plements his practical experience with the knowledge contained in our Course is always in a position to take imme- diate advantage of any opportunity for 122 advancement, while he that is content to work along in a rut will never be ready to seize the opportunity, and in all probability will never fill any better position than he already holds. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Writ- ten Recitations a They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having success- fully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Boimd Volumes treat of principles and applications of steam engineering with more thoroughness and concise- ness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense applica- tion. For easy gradation ; for concise- ness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for practicability, they are un- equaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money- earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for refer- ence purposes. They are better than 123 an encyclopedia. The volumes are devoted to the subject of steam engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with great care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item, is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so thor- oughly are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the information relating to any particular point or problem he is interested in. c. They are w^ritten in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The informa- tion they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary princi- ples and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best steam-engineering prac- tice in the country are here collected and assembled into an orderly and systematic whole. 124 Engine and Dynamo Running Course Twenty-two subjects are taught in the Engine and Dynamo Running Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirtv-seven, as follows" LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 102 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. ... 41 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 Machine Elements 61 Mechanics of Fhiids 53 Strenj?th of Materials 37 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 97 Dynamos and Motors 90 Operation of Dynamos and Motors Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery Geometrical Drawing Mechanical Drawin? Steam Heating Steam Turbines Examination Questions." . . Keys 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Types of Steam Boilers. . . . Boiler Details Boiler Fittings Combustion, Firing, and Draft Boiler Design Economic Combustion of Coal _.. Automatic Furnaces and I 3d Bound Mechanical Stokers 19 | Volume Boiler Installation 42 Boiler Management 44 Boiler Trials 44 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 Elevators 231 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 51 J 125 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 28 The Steam Engine 46" 29 The Indicator 37 30 Engine Testing 50 31 Governors 45 32 Valve Gears 77 33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 35 Engine Management 88 36 Engine Installation 45 37 Pumps 165 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 61, Pages 2,531 Illustrations, 1,057 Instruction Papers, 32 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes, 4 Note — Subject 27 may be omitted. No reci- tations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. The four Bound Volumes containing the entire Complete Steam Engineering Course are furnished to each person enrolling for the Engine and Dynamo Running Course. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They include all necessary sub- jects pertaining to successful engine and dynamo running. b. They give instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of engine and dynamo runnirfg is begun. c. They contain examples relating directly to engine and d5niamo running. d. They give valuable information and directions that will help the student in his daily work as soon as he begins to study. e. They do not treat of the deriva- tion of formulas. Instead, they give concise rules and show how to apply them in practical work. 126 /. They are of necessity made clearer than ordinar}'' textbooks, because the I. C. S. student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They contain more and better illustrations than do ordinary text- books. Wherever illustrations will make a statement clearer, we put them in. h. They contain worked-out exam- ples showing how to apply the rules. -i. They will help the student qualify for license examinations. Persons That Should Enroll a. Men engaged in operating small electric-lighting and power plants, such as Managers, Superintendents, Engi- neers, Foremen, Repairmen, Dynamo Tenders, Firemen, Helpers, Oilers, Water Tenders, Wipers, etc. b. Engineers and Assistant Engi- neers not now associated with electrical work, but desirous of securing employ- ment as engineers in electrical power houses. c. Firemen that want to qualify for employment and rapid advancement in electrical power houses or lighting stations. d. Men that want to take up the operative side of electrical power-house and electric lighting-plant work, and want to become proficient in the theory of it in order to obtain employment and merit advancement. e. Draftsmen and Designers desiring a knowledge of the operation of elec- trical machinery and small steam plants. /. Men that sell steam-plant and electric machinery and appliances, or that wish to become such salesmen. 127 Note — The Engine and Dynamo Running Course is intended for persons that desire a knowledge of engine and dynamo running that will enable them to take full charge of small electric power houses or lighting plants, and to install and operate such apparatus as may be placed in their charge. The Steam-Electric Course is, however, to be recommended to all persons wanting a thorough Course in every branch of electric power-house operation. The student of the Engine and Dynamo Running Course may take up first either the Engine R.unning section or the Dynamo Running section. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There are almost unlimited oppor- tunities for the right sort of men in electrical power houses, and the I. C. S. Courses are developing the men that the owners of electric plants are glad to pay well. h. The Engine and Dynamo Run- ning Course is in every sense a prac- tical engineers and electricians' Course. It treats of the best modem practice, and the student is constantly learning things that are immediately helpful to him. c. The Engine and Dynamo Run- ning Course embraces all the impor- tant subjects pertaining to engine and dynamo running. Thus the student gets a thorough training in each of the branches of electric power-house and lighting-station operation, d. The men in charge of an electric plant must understand how to operate and care for engines, dynamos, motors, boilers, and all other usual equipment. Our Course furnishes this information in the best possible manner. e. Any power-house and electric- light plant employe that studies our Course thoroughly and is faithful in 128 his work will be able to increase his earning power. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about IJ years. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. Their information relating to the oper- ation of steam plants and electric machinery can be made use of by students not possessing a knowledge of higher mathematics. Every fact, prin- ciple, and process is concisely stated and clearly explained. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia, because they treat each subject fully and in detail. They are completely indexed, and any reference can be easily fotmd. c. They contain information so prac- tical that many students, after learning enough of the elementary mathematics to be able to apply the rules, have with- out further recitation been able to secure prominent positions and obtain large salaries in their trades and professions. 5 129 Steam-Electric Course 10 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 102 1 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... 41 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 Machine Elements 61 Mechanics of Fluids 53 Strength of Materials 37 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 Heat and Steam. ........ 27 Examination Questions ... 41 Keys 97^ Dynamos and Motors 90 Operation of Dynamos and Motors 74 Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery 72 Geometrical Drawing 77 Mechanical Drawing 50 Steam Heating 51 Steam Turbines. . . ._ 23 Examination Questions .. . 19 Keys 23. Alternating Currents 94' Electric Transmission. ... 184 Electric Lighting 325 Examination Questions. . . 30 Keys 43. Electric Railways 401 Interior Wiring ...... 192 Examination Questions. . . 28 Keys 47 Types of Steam Boilers. . . 36 Boiler Details 23 Boiler Fittings 48 Combustion, Firing, and Draft 25 Boiler Design 58 Economic Combustion of Coal 25 Automatic Furnaces and Mechanical Stokers 19 Boiler Installation 42 Boiler Management 44 Boiler Trials 44 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 Elevators 231 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 51 130 ^ 5th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 33 The Steam Engine 46 ' 34 The Indicator 37 35 Engine Testing 50 36 Governors 45 37 Valve Gears 77 38 Condensers 48 I 6th Bound 39 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 40 Engine Management 88 41 Engine Installation 45 42 Pumps 165 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 61. Pages 3,875 Illustrations. 1.893 Instruction Papers, 65 Drawing Plates, 16 Bound Volumes, 6 What the Steam-Electric Course Is The Steam-Electric Course is the Electric Lighting and Railways Course combined with the Complete Steam Engineering Course. The Advantages of Combining These Courses Such a combination enables us to offer instruction in combustion, steam making, boilers and boiler accessories, steam engines and engine appliances, dynamos, electric lamps, electric motors, etc., all embraced in a single Course. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They include all subjects of importance to a man whose work reqtiires him to be both a thoroughly up-to-date steam engineer and a skilled practical electrician. h. They give instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be 131 understood before the study of steam engineering and electricity is begun. c. They contain examples that relate directly to steam engineering and the operating of electric machinery and appliances. d. They give information and direc- tions that will help the student as soon as he begins to study. e. They do not treat of the deriva- tion of formulas. Instead, they give concise rules and show how to apply them in practical work. /. They are of necessity made clearer than ordinary textbooks, because the I. C. S. student must study out of the presence of a teacher. g. They contain more illustrations than do ordinary textbooks. Wher- ever illustrations will make a statement more clear, we put them in. h. They contain worked-out exam- ples showing how to apply the rules. Persons That Should Enroll a. Men engaged in operating electric- lighting plants and electric-railway systems, such as Managers, Superin- tendents, Chief Engineers, Foremen, Repairmen, Dynamo Tenders, Firemen, Helpers, etc. h. Engineers not now associated with electrical work, but desirous of securing employment as engineers in electrical power houses. c. Firemen that want to qualify for employment and rapid advancement in electrical power houses. d. Men that want to take up elec- trical power-house work, and want to become proficient in the theory of it in 132 order to obtain employment and merit advancement. c. Inventors and Experimenters. /. Draftsmen and Designers desiring a knowledge of electrical power-house machinery and methods. g. isiMen that sell power-house ma- chinery and appliances, or that wish to become such salesmen. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Great strides have been made in electrical power-house methods within the last few years. In the up-to-date plant the expense account is no longer a matter of chance. Statistics are in hand for determining about what the cost should be for producing a certain amount of energy under given condi- tions. The men in charge are held responsible for getting the greatest amount of energy from the fuel; for running the machinery with a minimum quantity of oil and supplies; and for keeping the entire plant in good order with the least possible loss from break- downs and expenditure for repairs. b. Steam engines and appliances and electric machinery, no matter how well constructed, are extremely sensitive to inattention and abuse. Owners of power houses have learned from sad experience that inefficient men are, in the long run, more expensive than poor machinery. A skilled man will, in fact, often get better results from a poor plant than an unskilled man can get from a good plant. Besides, the best machinery is soon ruined in imtrained hands. Knowing all this, is it to be wondered at that power-house owners are quick to employ men competent to bear responsibility? Is it strange that good power-house men command high salaries ? c. Our Steam-Electric Course covers every detail of the best practices in the fireroom, the engine room, the repair room, and so on to the manager's office. Besides treating of electric- lighting stations, the Course includes thorough instruction in the installation, operation, and repair of electric-railway systems, and in the wiring of buildings for electric lamps, motors, etc., in accord with the Fire Underwriters' rules. d. Power-house men wanting to advance to high positions must have a knowledge of mechanical stokers, draft apparatus, feedwater heaters and piu-i- fiers, pumps, boilers, engines, con- densers, dynamos, electric motors, and switchboards. e. The electric switchboard is no longer the simple contrivance that it was a few years ago. Each generating set at a power house now has its own panel in the board, with voltmeters, ammeters, groimd detectors, rheostats, etc. ; and there are circiiit-breakers and devices for connecting dynamos together, besides series alternating arc-lighting appliances and kindred apparatus. /. The best inventive genius and mechanical skill in the world does not make machinery that will withstand the neglect and abuse of the untrained operator; in his hands the finest and most economical equipment is but little better than its coarser and less efficient predecessor. Has a power-house em- ploye a right to demand promotion and 134 a higher salary so long as he refuses to accept the technical training required by the position he covets? Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of stud3dng, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than 3 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Steam-Electric Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applica- tions in steam engineering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an 135 epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation ; for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are imequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subject of steam engineering, and the details of this subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classi- fied and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood— even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best steam-engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 136 Advanced Electric Lighting Course Advanced Electric Railways Course These Courses are made up from the Steam-Electric Course, which con- tains the following subjects: 10 LIST OF SUBJECTS Arithmetic Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. . . . Principles of Mechanics. . . Machine Elements Mechanics of Fluids Streng-th of Materials Elements of Electricity and Magnetism Heat and Steam Examination Questions. . . Keys Dynamos and Motors Operation of Dynamos and Motors Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery Geometrical Drawing Mechanical Drawing Steam Heating Steam Turbines Examination Questions. . . Keys Alternating Currents Electric Transmission .... Electric Lighting Examination Questions. . . Keys Electric Railways Interior Wiring". Examination Questions. . . Keys PAGES 102 41 47 61 53 37 27 41 97 90 74 72 77 50 51 23 19 23 94 184 325 30 43 401 192 28 47 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Botind Volume 13< LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 21 Types of Steam Boilers. . . 36 22 Boiler Details 23 23 Boiler Fittings 48 24 Combustion, Firing, and Draft 25 25 Boiler Design 58 26 Economic Combustion of Coal 25 27 Automatic Furnaces and l 5th Bound Mechanical Stokers 19 f Volume 28 Boiler Installation 42 29 Boiler Management 44 30 Boiler Trials 44 31 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 32 Elevators 231 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 51 33 The Steam Engine 46 34 The Indicator 37 35 Engine Testing 50 36 Governors 45 37 Valve Gears 77 38 Condensers 48 I 6th Bound 39 Compound Engines 40 l Volume 40 Engine Management 88 41 Engine Installation 45 42 Pumps 165 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 61 _ Pages 3,875 Illustrations, 1,893 Drawing Plates, 16 Bound Volumes, 6 Note — The six Bound Volumes containing the entire Steam-Electric Course are furnished to each, person enrolling for the Advanced Electric Lighting Course or the Advanced Electric Railways Course. What the Advanced Electric Lighting Course Is The Advanced Electric Lighting Course is the Advanced Engine Run- ning Course and the Electric Light- ing Course merged for those wanting to study both in combination. 138 What the Advanced Electric Railways Course Is The Advanced Electric Railways Course is the Advanced Engine Run- ning Course and the Electric Rail- ways Course combined. Subjects Taught in the Courses In the Advanced Electric Light- ing Course, thirty-one subjects: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 39, 40, and 42. Subjects 12, 13, and 20 may be omitted. (There are forty-five Instruction Papers.) In the Advanced Electric Rail- ways Course, thirty subjects: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 39, 40, and 42. Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. (There are forty-four Instruction Papers.) Time Required to Finish the Courses That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Advanced Electric Lighting Course or the Advanced Electric Railways Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Advanced Elec- tric Lighting Course or our Advanced Electric Railways Course should 139 have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the student does not wish to study drawing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Remarks The classes of persons that should enroll for the Advanced Electric Lighting Course or the Advanced Electric Railways Course are the same as those that should enroll for the Steam-Electric Course. It is well to bear in mind that the Steam-Elec- tric Course is the Complete Steam Engineering Course combined with the Electric Lighting and Railways Course; that the Advanced Electric Lighting Course and the Advanced Electric Railways Course are subor- dinate to the Steam-Electric Course. being made up from it and including no instruction not contained in it; and that these subordinate Courses should be studied by the same classes of persons for the same reasons that the parent Course, the Steam-Electric Course, should be studied. (See pages 132 and 1 33 in this book. ) We divide the parent Course into subordinate Courses because occasionally a student is desirous to gain a knowledge of steam-engine run- ning and electric lighting, though he may have no interest in electric rail- ways; or, to learn steam-engine running and electric-railway operation, though he may have no desire to study electric 140 lighting. It is, however, unquestion- ably better for any student to study the entire Steam-Electric Course; for modem practice has made kindred the arts of steam-engine running, elec- tric lighting, and electric-railway opera- tion. And though a person may prefer to enroll for one of the subordinate Courses, we furnish him with the Bound Volumes of the full Steam- Electric Course, in order that he may have them for consultation even if he does not choose to include all their contents in his regular course of study and recitation. 141 1st Bound Volume Marine Engineers' Course Fifteen subjects are taught in the Marine Engineers' Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain nineteen, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 102 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. ... 41 3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 4 Machine Elements 61 5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 6 Strength of Materials 37 7 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 8 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions. . 41 Keys 97 9 Dynamos and Motors 90" 10 Operation of Dynamos and . Motors 74 11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- ery 72 12 Geometrical Drawing 77 13 Mechanical Drawing 50 14 Steam Heating 51 15 Steam Turbines.... 23 Examination Questions .. . 19 Keys 23. 16 Steam and Steam Boilers. 227 17 Steam Engines 191 18 The Machinery of Western River Steamboats 66 19 Recent Developments in Marine Engineering. ... 57 Examination Questions. . . 31 Keys 39. 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume Pages 1,662 Illustrations, 752 Instruction Papers, 25 Drawing Plates, 16 Bound Volumes, 3 Note — No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. 142 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They provide the theoretical knowledge the student must have to become a marine engineer. h. They treat of the principles of electricity and magnetism and explain the operation of dynamos and motors. c. They show how to take indicator diagrams and how to calculate the horsepower of the engine from them. d. They treat of valve gears. The setting of valves is clearly explained. e. They describe and explain the operation of compound and other multiple - expansion engines. Beam engines are given due consideration. /. They take up refrigerating and ice-making machinery in general. g. They give directions for the care and operation of steam boilers. h. They describe the machinery of western river steamboats, taking up both the fixed cut-off and the variable cut-off engines and the laying out of cams for them. Persons That Should Enroll a. Chief Engineers. b. Assistant Engineers. c. Oilers. d. Water Tenders. e. Firemen. /. Coal Passers. g. Employes of machine shops where marine engines and boilers are built. h. Stationary Engineers and Loco- motive Engineers wanting to become marine engineers. i. United States Navy Machinists. 143 /. Young Men wanting to become marine engineers. Note — The rules and regtdations of the United States Board of Supervising Inspectors of Steam Vessels require an applicant to have 3 years of actual sea service before applying for a license; or 3 years of apprenticeship in building steam engines, and 1 year of sea service; or 3 years of locomotive engineering or stationary engineering and 1 year of sea service. The examinations are in writing and are graded according to the grade of the license applied for. An applicant must first pass the examination for the lowest grade and serve the required time in that position before he can try for the next higher grade. Our Course will not enable any one to procure a license if he has not had the required legal sea service prior to his application. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There are three distinct condi- tions the student must fulfil before he can serve as a marine engineer. They are: first, practical experience; second, technical training; and third, a marine engineer's license. The student must himself acquire the first; we give him the second; and then, as a result of these, he can obtain the third. Our Course is the opportunity for the man employed in a minor position on a steamship By spending his time "off watch" studying our Marine Engi- neers' Course he can in a short time pass the examination for a marine engineer's license. With our help the man of the forecastle can obtain license, change his quarters, mess with the engineers, and be an officer of the ship. We can help the student become chief engineer. b. Economy in fuel consumption is imperative on shipboard, where only a small supply of coal can be carried. 144 The fireman must make every pound of coal count, and he cannot do this unless he thoroughly understands the principles of combustion and economic liring. Our Course takes up combustion and fuels and tells how to prevent losses through improper firing. In short, we teach the student how to practice the highest economy in fuel consumption. c. Life is too short for the ambitious assistant engineer, oiler, water tender, fireman, or coal passer to learn by slow experience all the things he will have to know before he can rise. The wide- awake man grasps the opportunity our instruction offers, and he is soon ready for the examination and among the eligibles for promotion. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average stu- dent requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Marine Engi- neers' Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the student does not wish to study drawing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course, which were prepared to meet the requirements of the home-study stu- dent. Our ceaseless endeavor to pro- vide ideal instruction for home-study has made our Bound Volumes the most practical textbooks in existence. They are exactly suited to the needs of the student that must study with no instructor by his side and must there- fore have instruction so forcefully written that he can take it into his mind unaided. b. They are invaluable for refer- ence purposes, not only to the man preparing for license examinations but to the practicing engineer. The Bound Volumes contain the subjects properly included in a marine engineer's course and give the student the practical information he needs in his daily work in the engine room. Some students think they cannot get any benefit from their Courses unless they answer the Examination Questions and send their work to our Instructors to be examined and corrected. This is a mistaken notion; for while it is true that the stu- dent that keeps in close touch with our Instructors and receives the benefit of their attention and advice will get the greatest possible good from his Course, it is equally true that systematic study 146 of our Bound Volumes — even if he never sends a recitation to the Schools — will repay a student many times what his Course cost him. Some of our students by carefully reading our Bound Volumes have been able to pass examinations and secure licenses. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 147 1 stationary Firemen's Course Ten subjects are taught in the Stationary Firemen's Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain twenty-seven, as fol- lows : LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 102 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... 41 3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 4 Machine -Elements 61 5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 1 1st Bound 6 Strength of Materials 37 Volume 7 Elements of Electricity and Magnetism 66 8 Heat and Steam 27 Examination Questions . . . 41 Keys 97. 9 Dynamos and Motors 90' 10 Operation of Djmamos and Motors 74 11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- 12 ery Geometrical Drawing 72 77 . 2d Bound 13 Mechanical Drawing 50 V (JlLlillC 14 Steam Heating 51 15 Steam Turbines 23 Examination Questions. . . 19 Kevs 23 36" 16 Types of Steam Boilers. . . . 17 Boiler Details 23 18 Boiler Fittings 48 19 Combustion, Firing, and Draft 25 20 Boiler Design 58 21 Economic Combustion of Coal 25 22 Automatic Furnaces and ^ 3d Bound Mechanical Stokers 19 Volume 23 Boiler Installation 42 24 Boiler Management 44 25 Boiler Trials 44 26 Boiler Feeding and Feed- water Problems 56 27 Elevators 231 Examination Questions. . . 38 Keys 51. Pages 1,791 148 Illustrations, 835 Instruction Papers, 33 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes 3 Note — No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They represent the best fireroom practice. h. They give in a clear and under- Istandable way the information the student must have to become a com- petent fireman. c. They explain the causes that produce scale in boilers and what remedies to apply. d. They show how to fire a boiler so as to get the best results. e. They treat of heat, the vapor- ization of water, and the combustion of fuels. /. They describe various common types of boilers, such as the plain cylindrical, flue, vertical, return-tubular, and water-tube boilers. g. They show the various details of boilers and explain the construction and operation of boiler fittings most universally employed. Persons That Should Enroll a. Stationary Firemen. b. Persons wanting to become fire- men or water tenders in all kinds of 1 steam plants. c. Persons working in minor posi- '' tions in steam plants and wishing to advance to the higher and better- paying positions of fireman or water ' tender. 149 d. Young Men desirous of becoming stationary firemen. Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of steam engineering shoiild enroll for the Complete Steam Engineering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Millions of dollars are expended annually in the production and use of steam, and in these days of strong com- petition the progressive manufacturer is ever on the alert to cut down his expense of power production. He is glad to advance the employe that effects reductions in expenses or increases the efficiency of his plant. That employers appreciate the import- ance of boiler-room economy is shown by the fact that in hundreds of plants the engineer is required to make a daily report of the number of pounds of fuel used and the horsepower developed. The even register of the recording steam gauge is a silent witness to the care and watchfulness of the fireman, just as heavy increases or reductions in the pressure line, or indications of frequent "pops" of the safety valve, are certain signs of waste- ful methods and unsatisfactory service. The fireman's opportunity for advance- ment lies in high-class boiler practice at a minimum expense. To fire a boiler efficiently and economically, the fireman must understand the principles of com- bustion. Employers everywhere are looking for the man that can save them money and they are glad to reward him with promotion and better pay. Our Course teaches the student how to fire boilers in the most economical manner. 150 b. The fireman's first duty is to make steam fast enough to meet . all demands. His second, is to see that the desired pressure is steadily main- tained at the least expense. In order to secure the largest volume of steam with a given quantity of coal, the fireman must have a knowledge of the construction and care of boilers; how to prevent scale and foaming; how to use pumps, injectors, and feedwater heaters; and how to set and care for safety valves. We teach him this. c. The best positions in boiler plants are open to only those that have com- bined practical experience with techni- cal training. The man that has supple- mented his boiler-room work with our instruction never need be without a good position. The knowledge he obtains from our Course insures him against failure in obtaining employ- ment or winning promotion. d. Efficiency and economy of opera- tion are the chief considerations in every boiler plant, and they can be maintained only by competent men. Our instruction is of benefit not only to the beginner, but also to the man already engaged in firing; it gives a good working knowledge of the construction, operation, and intelligent care of boilers and their appurtenances, and enables the student to do his work according to the latest and best methods. e. Within the last 10 years boiler pressures have been doubled. Ten years ago a pressure of 80 pounds was common, and instances of 100 pounds unusual. Today a pressure of 160 pounds is common and 200 pounds not 151 infrequent. As a precaution to insure safety and the employing of competent men only, some states have passed laws requiring boilers to be inspected and the licensing of those in charge. Similar laws will be enacted in all states; and the incompetent fireman will have to get a license or get out of the business. Every fireman possessing any ambition wants to progress, earn more, and make his position secure. To do this he must know the best fireroom practice. Our Course gives it. Our instruction will enable him to care for and operate boilers with the greatest efficiency, economy, and safety. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 6 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course. The Bound Volumes give the student instruction obtained from the most practical and reliable sources and presented by a simplified method of teaching that has been tried and proved a success. Our constant endeavor to 152 iprovide ideal instruction for the stu- dent that must study out of the presence of a teacher has made our Bound Volumes the best textbooks in existence for home study. b. They contain arranged in a logical order all the subjects properly included in a stationary fireman's course. The Bound Volumes place before the student the best fireroom practice in the country and give him a store of knowledge that it would take years for him to pick up by experience alone. The Bound Volumes embrace much valuable information on kindred subjects sure to interest every fireman. Many successful firemen attribute their success to the studious reading of our Bound Volumes. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all initial . letters under which it is likely to be sought. 153 Civil Engineering Course Forty- two subjects are taught in the Civil Engineering Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain forty-seven, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Elements of Algebra .... 115 3 Logarithms 20 4 Geometry and Trigonom- I 1st Bound etry 75 ( Volume Examination Questions . . 32 Keys 114 Tables 37J 5 Elementary Chemistry . . i 6 Chemistry and Chemical Operations J 7 Blowpiping ^n 2d Bound 8 Mmeralogy 89^ Volume 9 Assaymg 1^ 10 Geology i: Examination Questions . . '. Keys : 11 Elementary Mechanics . . < 12 Hydromechanics 13 Pneumatics 14 Heat ' 15 Elementary Graphical I 3d Bound Statics 85 f Volume 16 Strength of Materials ' Examination Questions . . < Keys 1' Tables and Formulas 17 Steam and Steam Engines i: 18 Applied Mechanics 1' 19 Steam Boilers 1< Examination Questions . . Keys Tables and Formulas 20 Machine Design 2; 21 Dynamos and Motors ... 2' Examination Questions . . Keys I 154 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Hydraulics 76" Surveying 92 Land Surveying 47 Mapping 71 Railroad Location 56 Geometrical Drawing 77 Mechanical Drawing .... 49 Descriptive Astronomy. . . 126 Examination Questions . . 35 Keys 73 Tables and Formulas 21 Railroad Construction. . . . 159 . Trackwork 133 Jlailroad Structures 132 L'^-'comotives 197 gxl^mination Questions . . 33 Key§ 44 Anai\Nsis of Stresses 121 Propor.^io^i^g the Material 87 Details""'?^ Construction. . . 109 Details, 'Bills, and Esti- mates .. .-\- ■••■■• : 84 Examination Questions . . 66 Keys \ • 231. Drainage 92 Sewerage 89 Streets and Highwavs-. • • • 105 Paving ; • 83 Electric Railways. "11-3- Examination Questions . . 65 Keys 87 Tables and Formulas 7. Waterwheels 91 Hydraulic Machinery .... 105 Water Supply and Distri- bution 146 Irrigation 114 Electric Lighting 113 Examination Questions . . 36 Keys 58 6th Bound Volume 7th Bound Volume 8th Bound Volume 9th Bound Volume 10th Bound Volume .6,336 Pages Illustrations. 2,756 Instruction Papers, 66 Drawing Plates, 14 Mapping Plates, 6 Bound Volumes, 10 Note — No recitations are asked for in subjects 9, 12, 18, and 20. Twenty dollars must be paid on the Civil Engineering Course before the Bound Volumes will be delivered. 155 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a They will assist any student of average intelHgence to become a sur- veyor or an assistant to a civil engineer b. They are practical, thorough, and concise. . . -^^i^ c They are written m a siniple style, insuring ease of comprehension d They contain nothing that is not of real value to the _ student, jws^ mathematics not essential to a ^^^^^ understanding of the subject are gj.^._ nated. e. They give instruction ir ^^^ ^^^_ mentary subjects that must ^^^ under- stood before the study of cr>^^-| engineer- ing is begun. /. They are fuUy p^,^^ clearly illus- trated. . --'' g, ■ 'They contaiij f^jj directions for the use and C3^^. 9c surveying instruments. h. They include detailed instruction in mechanical and topographical drawing. i. They are prepared with special reference to the needs of men actually engaged in surveying and civil engineer- ing. y. They contain numerous problems relating directly to the practical work of civil engineering. Persons That Should Enroll a. Civil Engineers and Assistants. b. Consulting Engineers and Experts. c. Surveyors and Assistants. d. Transitmen and Levelmen. e. Topographers. /. Draftsmen in Engineers and Sur- veyors' offices. 156 g. Railroad Engineers. h . Roadmasters , Resident Engineers , Division Engineers, and Railroad Super- intendents. i. Persons engaged in railroad or bridge construction. j. Bridge Engineers. k. Bridge Draftsmen and Designers. /. Bridge Inspectors. m. Hydraulic Engineers. n. Persons engaged in the designing or constructing of waterworks, sewerage systems, or hydraulic power plants. o . Municipal Engineers. p. City Engineers. q. Persons engaged in the construc- tion, maintenance, or superintendence of streets and roads. r. Persons employed in engineering corps. s. Young Men desiring to take up the study of civil engineering, beginning with the most elementary subjects. Note — Our Civil Engineering Course con- tains five special Courses, any one of which may be taken separately, namely the Surveying AND Mapping Course; the Bridge Engineering Course; the Railroad Engineering Course; the Municipal Engineering Course; and the Hydraulic Engineering Course. Each of these special Courses is a thorough treatment of the subject with which it deals. A person enroll- ing for the Civil Engineering Course may take up the study of the main stibdivisions or branches of the Course in whatever order he wishes. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There is an ever increasing demand for competent men in civil engineering. No new enterprise that involves the use of lands, buildings, etc., can proceed without the aid of the surveyor or the engineer. Formerly it 157 was thought that no one but a college graduate could hope to attain the posi- tion of civil engineer. But now our instruction enables a man to get the necessary theoretical knowledge while he is gaining practical experience. To the young man without a college educa- tion, or even a trade, our Course offers the opportunity to enter an important and profitable profession. To the man engaged as rodman, chainman, transit- man, etc., it offers promotion. b. An especially attractive feature of our Course is the instruction in bridge design. Draftsmen in bridge engineer- ing offices can by means of our instruc- tion obtain a theoretical knowledge of bridge designing that will enable them to advance rapidly and to become, with practical experience, bridge engineers. Elaborate drawings are given illustra- ting fully the different parts of a bridge, and every detail of the work is carefully explained. c. Our Course is the only Course including instruction suited to the needs of the man just starting in civil engineering. It is also valuable to the man holding a good position and desir- ing advancement, but lacking the pre- liminary education necessary to enable him to understand textbooks on civil engineering. Our instruction includes the methods used in the best civil engi- neering practice, and the examples given are similar to those problems commonly met with in actual practice. d. To the young man intending to take charge of railroad work, the knowl- edge of railroad engineering contained in our Course is indispensable; for 158 without this he is unable to direct his work intelligently e. To a man holding' a position in the engineering department of a city government our Course offers valuable instruction in the details of municipal engineering, such as paving, design and construction of sewers and waterworks, etc. /. Our Instruction Papers have been prepared by men of wide experience in engineering and educational work. Each branch of our Civil Engineering Course has been written under the direction of men that have made a specialty of that particular line of civil engineering. The Course is therefore reliable, in accord with the best engi- neering methods, and gives the student much knowledge nowhere else so easily obtainable. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, sttidying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 3 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Civil Engineer- ing Course should have our Complete Drawdng Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is "worth $13.55; we furnish it to cur student for S7.95. The student pays express charges. 159 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. The information con- tained in these volumes, relating to the theory and the practice of civil engi- neering, can be made use of by students not possessing a knowledge of higher mathematics. Every fact, principle, and process is concisely stated and clearly explained. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia, because they treat of each subject fully and in detail. They are indexed completely, and any par- ticular reference can be easily found. c. They contain information so prac- tical that many students, after learning enough of the elementary mathematics to be able to apply the rules, have with- out further study been able to secure prominent positions and obtain large salaries in their trades and professions. 160 2d Bound Volume Railroad Engineering Course Seventeen subjects are taught in the Railroad Engineering Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Li- brary contain twenty-two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Elements of Algebra 115 3 Logarithms 20 4 Geometry and Trigonom- I 1st Bound etry 75 ( Volume Examination Questions . . 32 Kevs 114 Tables 37 5 Elementary Mechanics . . 64 6 Hydromechanics 42 7 Pneumatics 46 8 Heat 74 9 Elementary Graphical Statics 85 10 Strength of Materials .... 70 Examination Questions . . 63 Keys 130 Tables and Formulas 5 Hydraulics 76 Surveying 92 Land Surveying 47 Mapping 71 Railroad Location 56 Geometrical Drawing .... 77 Mechanical Drawing .... 49 Descriptive Astronomy. . . 126 Examination Questions . . 35 Keys 73 Tables and Formulas 21 Railroad Constrtiction. ... 159" Trackwork 133 Railroad Structures 132 Locomotives 197 Examination Questions . . 33 Keys 44 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume Pages 2,513 Illustrations, 1,288 Instruction Papers, 35 Drawing Plates, 14 Mapping Plates., 6 Bound Volumes, 4 Note— No recitations are asked for in subjects 14, 15, 22, 29, and 33. 161 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain practical problems relating to railroad engineering. b. They give instruction in survey- ing and mapping. c. They are fully illustrated. d. They include instruction in all the elementary subjects of which a knowledge is necessary before the study of railroad engineering is begun. e. They give instruction in railroad location. /. They treat of railroad construction. g. They contain instruction in track- work. h. They embrace instruction in rail- road structures, such as wooden trestles, water stations, turntables, and section buildings. i. They are so thoroughly practical, frequent reference to them will give the student knowledge worth many times their cost. j. They explain the laying out of box culverts, tile culverts, and arched culverts. k. They teach the student how to calculate the quantity and the cost of excavation work. /. They give full instruction in the planning and staking out of curves by the methods in actual practice. m. They have been prepared to meet the requirements of busy people — those that must get an education, if they get it at all, by means of home study and out of the presence of a teacher. It is essential that the instruction for this purpose be so written and illustrated as 162 to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read. It is because our Instruction Papers are so written and illustrated that they are universally accepted as the best for home study. Persons That Should Enroll a. Railroad Engineers and Assist- ants. h. Railroad Surveyors and Assist- ants. c. Transitmen and Levelmen. d. Topographers and Topographical Draftsmen. e. Railroad Superintendents, Divi- sion Engineers, Resident Engineers, Roadmasters, Supervisors, and Inspec- tors. /. Persons engaged in railroad con- struction and maintenance. g. Rodmen, Chainmen, and all per- sons employed in railroad engineering corps. ;' h. Young Men desiring to follow [railroad engineering as a profession. i. Foremen, Section Men, and all persons whose work requires a knowl- edge of the construction and mainte- jnance of railroads. Note — The Railroad Engineering Course 'is intended for persons wishing to specialize in this branch of engineering — persons desiring to jprepare themselves for positions in the con- struction department or in the maintenance-of- way department of a railroad. If the prospec- tive student wants a knowledge of civil engi- peering. he should enroll for the Civil Engi- neering Course. After finishing the Mathematics and the Geo- metrical Drawing, the student of our Railroad Engineering Course may take up the work in Surveying and Mapping. 163 Why Persons Should Enroll a. Railroad engineering offers to young men some of the best opportuni- ties for advancement. New railroads are constantly being planned and built; and old ones are being extended, rebuilt, and kept in repair. This work gives employment to thousands of per- sons and produces a steady demand for skilled men. Section men, track inspec- tors, surveyors, and assistant engineers can with our help qualify quickly for better positions and higher salaries. b. Men competent to deal with problems met with in railroad engineer- ing are scarce. Railroad companies everywhere are searching for capable men, and persons that will qualify themselves for railroad engineering can command responsible positions and good salaries. Our Course — a concise and easily understood treatise prepared by practical men — is intended to train men to survey, locate, and superintend the construction of railroads. c. The man in charge of railroad location cannot successfully carry on his work without a thorough knowledge of railroad engineering. The earning power of the railroad "will depend to a large extent on his judgment. He must understand the economic conditions governing the intended road, calculate the cost of the different routes, and consider the determining factors in deciding which is the best road; for the shortest line between the terminal points is in all probability not the cheapest road to build nor the most economical to operate. 164 d. To the student engaged in the construction or the maintenance of a railroad our Course will give an enlarged insight that will enable him to suggest methods whereby the cost of construc- tion and of maintenance can be reduced ; this means quick recognition, rapid promotion, and increase in salary. e. The young man intending to inake a profession of railroad engineer- ing can get a start by securing employ- ment in a railroad surveying corps or in a railroad engineer's drafting room — probably the two main channels of pro- motion to the more responsible posi- tions. The man giving proof of his ability to make accurate surveys or to draw neat and correct maps is the first man to be selected for advancement. Through our Course the student will shorten considerably the time usually spent as rodman. chainman, etc., or in making tracings or blueprints. Duties requiring more skill will be assigned to him; and as experience supplements the knowledge he obtains from our Course he is sure to advance. /. The rapid growth in population, the opening up and settling of new sec- tions of the country, the continued development of sparsely populated dis- tricts, and the consequent increase in traffic require the building of new lines of railroad and the extension of old lines. All this brings employment to thousands of railroad engineers; and competent men are sure of work at good pay. g. Our Course is a practical Course on railroad engineering; it will prove of great value not only to persons that 165 contemplate becoming railroad engi- neers, but also to those already engaged in that profession. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Railroad Engi- neering Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are an epit- ome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an 166 encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of railroad engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information is so set forth as to be easily under- stood — even by the man of little educa- tion. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work on which they treat. The tried and proved facts, for- mulas, and processes used in the best railroad engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 167 Surveying and Mapping Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PA Arithmetic Elements of Algebra .... Logarithms Geometrical Drawing Examination Questions. . . Keys Tables Geometry Plane Trigonometry Chain Surveying Compass Surveying Transit Surveying Examination Questions. . . Keys Tables Leveling Circular Curves Stadia and Plane-Table Surveying Topographic Surveying. . . Hydrographic Surveying . United States Land Sur- veys Mapping Practical Astronomy Examination Questions. . . Keys 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 1341 116 20 77 27 102 29 102 123 30 64 108 28 46 63 901 50 43 34 77 I 3d Bound Volume 95 101 125 34 38 1,756 Pages Illustrations, 679 Instruction Papers, 28 Drawing Plates, 5 Mapping Plates, 5 Bound Volumes, 3 Note— Mine Surveying is not included in the Surveying and Mapping Course. _ Mine Sur- veying is embraced in the following Courses The Full Mining Course; the Complete Coal Mining Course; and the Metal Mining Course. The student that finishes the Surveying and Mapping Course, however, can readily adapt himself to mine surve^dng; the principles of surveying are the same underground and above ground. 168 What the Instruction Papers on Survey- ing Treat Of The Instruction Papers on surveying describe various surveying instruments, explain their uses, and give directions in chain surveying, compass surveying, transit surveying, stadia surveying, plane-table surveying, and leveling. What the Instruction Papers on Map- ping Treat Of The Instruction Papers on mapping begin with simple instruction in the platting of angles and proceed until they finally take up the making of an elaborate village map showing all the topographical features. Five Mapping Plates are included, the titles of which are as follows : Platting iVngles — I ; Platting Angles — II; Map of Railroad Location; Profiles and a Contour Map; Stadia Survey and Hachures; Map of a Portion of a Town; and a Map of a ViUage. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain examples relating to the practical work of surveying. h. They explain triangulation. c. They give instruction in hydro- graphic surveying, stadia surveying, plane-table surveying, topographical surveying, and mapping. d. They explain the method em- ployed by the United States Govern- ment in surveying public lands. e. They explain the different meth- ods of computing areas and show how to use the planimeter. 169 /. They give instruction in the cal- culation of latitude and longitude ranges (latitude and departure). g. They contain instruction in the laying out of railroad curves. h. They contain the best methods for determining the true meridian and tell how to find the latitude and longi- tude of a place. A clear description of the solar attachment is included. i. They have been prepared to meet the requirements of busy people — those that must get an education, if they get it at all, by means of home study and out of the presence of a teacher. It is essential that the instruction for this purpose be so written and illustrated as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read. It is because our Instruction Papers are so written and illustrated that they, are universally accepted as the best for home study. Persons That Should Enroll a. Surveyors and Assistants. b. Transitmen and Levelmen. c. Topographers and Topographical Draftsmen. d. Engineers' Assistants. e. Rodmen; Chainmen; persons em- ployed in an engineering corps. /. Draftsmen in surveyors' offices. g. Young Men desiring to engage in surveying work. h. Graduates of high schools and academies. NoTK — The Surveying and Mapping Course is intended for persons desiring a working knowl- edge of surveying and mapping — persons wish- ing to become practical surveyors and engineers' assistants. If the prospective student intends 170 . to specialize in some branch of engineering, such as bridge engineering, railroad engineering, etc., he should enroll for the Course devoted to the particular line of work he wants to take up. Persons desiring a full knowledge of civil engi- neering should enroll for the Civil Engineering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Surveying offers many oppor- tunities for advancement ; it is the step- ping-stone to civil engineering. Many successful engineers began their careers in the surveying corps or in the drafting room of some surveyor or engineer — the two main entrances to the field of engineering. A young man desiring to rise to a responsible position in the engineering profession, but undecided as to what particular branch of engi- neering he wishes to follow and unable to attend a college, cannot do better than enroll for our Surveying and Mapping Course and then obtain em- ployment either in a surveying corps or in the drafting room of some surveyor or engineer. By this arrangement the student will be brought at once in touch with both the theoretical and the practical sides of the work, getting into the various branches of engineering practice an insight that will enable him to decide wisely which branch he desires for his life profession. b. As long as boundary lines must be established, roads located, town sites laid out, and general surveying done, competent surveyors are sure of prof- itable work. In almost every town there is an opportunity for an ambitious person to open a surveyor's office; he may build up a profitable business for 171 himself, beginning without capital other than his surveying outfit and the knowledge acquired from our Course. c. Young men employed as drafts- men in engineers and surveyors' ofEces have excellent opportunities for becom- ing practical surveyors. Their work gives them a valuable knowledge of the principles of surveying and of the manner of keeping notes and platting therefrom. By supplementing his prac- tical experience with the knowledge con- tained in our Course the student can learn quickly to make accurate sur- veys. This means rapid promotion and more pay. d. The chief difference between the surveyor and his subordinates is a difference of education. Young men working in surveying corps can quickly become surveyors themselves through our instruction; for with their practical experience the only thing preventing advancement is the lack of theoretical knowledge. e. A young man's spare time is his best capital, and the use he makes of it will to a large extent determine his suc- cess. Any young man of average intel- ligence that will use his spare time studying as we direct and is faithful in his work can, through his practical experience and our instruction, become a surveyor well qualified to do general surveying in both the field and the office. /. Our Surveying and Mapping Course is in every sense a practical Course; it explains the theory and practice of surveying and mapping and will give the student a good working knowledge. 172 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studjang, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Surveying and Mapping Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense applica- tion. For easy gradation; for concise- ness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for practicability, they are un- equaled. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the particular subject of surveying and mapping, and the details of that subject 173 are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work on which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best surveying and mapping practice in the country are here col- lected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 174 Bridge Engineering Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Algebra 105 3 Logarithms 20 4 Geometry and Trigonom- etry 75 Elementary Mechanics Hydromechanics Pneumatics Elementary Graphical Statics Examination Questions. . . Strength of Materials .... Analysis of Stresses Proportioning the Material Details of Construction. . . Details, Bills, and Esti- mates Examination Questions . . . Geometrical Drawing Mechanical Drawing .... Tables and Formulas Keys 64 42 46 85 79 601 121 87 109 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 84 75 77- 49 84, 471 4th Bd. Vol. 3d Bound Volume Pages 1,854 Illustrations, 634 Instruction Papers, 27 Drawing Plates, 14 Bound Volumes 4 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain instruction in the analysis of stresses — showing by the graphical method how to determine accurately the stresses in the different members of a bridge. b. They give instruction in bridge design. c. They teach the student how to calculate the strength of iron or steel columns, beams, girders, etc. d. They teach the student how to make shop lists, orders for materials, shipping bills, erection diagrams, and estimates of the weight of bridges. 175 e. They give instruction in the designing of floorbeams. /. They explain the details of con- struction of both the tension members and the compression members of a bridge, giving due consideration to live loads, dead loads, and wind pressure. g. They will enable the student to calculate the stresses, bearing values, and working strength of rivets, pins, etc. h. They show the constructive details of a bridge. i. They give instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of bridge engineering is begun. y. They have been prepared to meet the requirements of busy people — those that must get an education, if they get it at all, by means of home study and out of the presence of a teacher. It is essential that the instruction for this purpose be so written and illustrated as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read. It is because our Instruction Papers are so written and illustrated that they are universally accepted as the best for home study. Persons That Should Enroll a. Bridge Engineers and Assistants. h. Draftsmen and Designers in bridge-engineering offices and bridge works. c. Bridge Inspectors. d. Bridge Supervisors. e. Employes in bridge works. /. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen of bridge works. g. Young Men desiring to qualify for positions as draftsmen, designers, or 176 computers in the engineering depart- ment or the construction department of a bridge manufacturing company. h. Young Men wanting to become bridge engineers. i. Graduates of high schools and manual training schools. j. Railroad Engineers. k. Structural Iron Workers. Note — The Bridge Engineering Course is intended for persons desiring a good working knowledge of the principles of bridge design and bridge construction. If the prospective student wishes a knowledge of civil engineering, he should enroll for the Civil Engineering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There is no lack of opportunity in bridge engineering; and the pay of com- petent bridge engineers is all that could be desired. Every bridge company — and there are hundreds in the country — ^maintains its own drafting and design- ing departments, giving employment to a number of draftsmen and designers. Railroad companies, too, employ a large number of engineers whose duty is the inspecting of bridges along the line of the road. Besides, there are thousands of highway bridges being designed and built in this country every year. All these things create a demand for competent men — ^men able not only to design bridges but also to superin- tend their construction and erection. Our Course covers the general design of bridges, and is clear and concise in its treatment of the design of practical shop details. The student that com- pletes this Course will, with practical experience, be able to design and super- intend the construction of bridges. 177 b. Probably no branch of engineer- ing requires so thorough a knowledge of the principles of mechanics and the strength of materials as bridge engi- neering. Bridges cannot be designed on guesswork. An error in calculation may result in disaster. Through our instruction the student can learn to calculate the exact strength and weight of a finished bridge even before a foun- dation stone is laid or a girder cast. c. A young man wishing to enter the bridge engineering profession can do so through the medium of the drafting room. By enrolling for our Bridge Engineering Course and taking the drawing section first the student can quickly qualify for a position as drafts- man. Then, by supplementing his drafting-room experience with further study of our Course, he can acquire the technical knowledge essential to any one desirous of becoming a bridge engi- neer. d. Bridge draftsmen are well paid. The ability to make neat and accurate bridge drawings is the result of faithful work and the right kind of training. Many of our students have qualified for good-paying positions as bridge drafts- men. Our Course offers to young men whose present work is uncongenial and unremunerative the opportunity to qualify for more agreeable and better- paying positions. e. A bridge worker's value increases in just the proportion that he qualifies himself for advancement. The man that is ambitious — that seriously wants to better his condition — will find our Course the way to promotion. Through 178 his practical experience and our instruc- tion he may become a bridge engineer. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Bridge Engi- neering Course should have our Com- plete drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The stu- dent pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are in fact an epitome of common- sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their sub- jects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money- earning knowledge. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an 179 encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of bridge engineer- ing, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work on which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best bridge works in the country are here collected and bound^into an orderly and systematic whole. 180 Municipal Engineering Course LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 Arithmetic Algebra Logarithms Geometry and Trigonom etry ■ • • • Elementary Mechanics . . Hydromechanics Pneumatics Strength of Materials. . . . Examination Questions. . Surveying. . ._ Land Surveying Mapping Drainage Sewerage Streets and Highways . . . Paving _ Examination Questions. . Geometrical Drawing. . . . Mechanical Drawing . . . Keys Tables and Formulas .... ■AGES . 121 105 20 75 64 42 46 70 71 . 92 1 , 47 71 92 . 89 . 105 83 . 74 20 \ . 12/ . 3101 . 110/ 1st Bound Volume 2dlBound Volume 3d?Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume Pages 1J19 Illustrations, 593 Instruction Papers, 28 Drawing Plates, 12 Mapping Plates, 6 Bound Volumes, 4 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give instruction in the design and the construction of sewer- age systems. Both circular and egg- shaped sewers are treated. h. They describe various surveying instruments, explain their uses, and give directions in compass surveying, transit surveying, and leveling. c. They contain instruction in map- ping. 181 d. They explain the laying out of cities and towns and show the location and arrangement of streets and avenues. e. They treat of the construction and the maintenance of streets and high- ways. /. They treat of paving materials, and give directions for the construc- tion of stone, asphaltum, coal-tar, and brick pavements. g. They treat of the flow of sewage — giving due consideration to the condi- tions effecting the slope of sewers. h. They require the student to cal- culate the dimensions of sewers. i. They give the student instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of municipal engineering is begun. Persons That Should Enroll a. Municipal Engineers and Assist- ants. h. City Engineers. c. Sanitary Engineers and Contrac- tors. d. City Surveyors and Assistants. e. County Surveyors and Assistants. /. Road Commissioners. g. Inspectors of public works. h. Draftsmen in municipal engineer- ing offices. i. Transitmen; Levelmen; Chain- men ; Rodmen ; all persons employed in a municipal engineering corps. j. Men engaged in laying out and superintending the construction of streets and highways. k. Men engaged in laying out addi- tions to cities or towns. 182 /. Men employed in the engineering departments or the pubHc-works depart- ments of cities. m. Persons engaged in inspecting the materials for pavements. }i. Young Men desiring a knowledge of municipal engineering. o. Graduates of high schools and academies. p. Persons desiring a knowledge of how to lay out property on the out- skirts of a city or a town. Note — The Municipal Engineering Course is intended for persons wishing to become pro- ficient in municipal engineering matters such as drainage, sewerage, pavements, the arrange- ment of blocks, and the location, construction, and maintenance of streets and highways. If the prospective student wants a knowledge of civil engineering, he should enroll for the Civil Engineering Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The demand for qualified munici- pal engineers is great, and it is con- stantly increasing. Many city engineers, as well as their assistants, are men of insufficient special knowledge and theo- retical training for the important work in which they are engaged. These men are constantly dealing with municipal engineering problems which they do not fully understand. Our Course offers to men already engaged in municipal engineering the opportunity to supple- ment their practical knowledge with the theory and principles underlying their work; it will give them a new and better insight. b. To the man engaged in the con- struction and maintenance of pave- ments our Course will prove invaluable. 183 It will enable him to select judiciously the pavement to meet the requirements of certain traffic; to establish the correct grade and cross-section of the pavement; and to lay the foundation and the surface material. c. Drainage, or storm-water sewer- age, is one of the most complex and least-understood subjects with which the municipal engineer has to deal. Our Course describes the subject of drainage in an easy manner. It treats of the rate of rainfall and the proportion of storm water that will reach the sewer during the period of greatest flow, and gives numerous hydraulic formulas used in the best municipal engineering practice in various cities. The student is taught how to represent graphically the equations for the rate of rainfall and the flow of storm water. Instruc- tion is given in the flow of water in conduits; and the design of egg-shaped sewers is treated. d. The greatly increased valuation of cit}^ property due to concentration of population has created a demand for more accurate and systematic surveys. Property lines, the extension of streets, and the laying out of new additions — all require skill and good judgment and improved methods of making surveys. Our Course will enable the student to make accurate surveys and to lay out new additions to towns or cities. e. In thickly populated communi- ties, good sewerage is absolutely essen- tial to good health. Ability to design and construct efficient systems is ac- quired through our Course. 184 /. The amount of money spent for roads and streets is astonishing. Many- states appropriate large sums for this purpose yearly, and enterprising cities and towns are spending money freely to improve their streets and avenues. Much of this money is wastefully spent by men that have not had the right kind of training. Our Course describes the laying out of streets and avenues; shows the best forms and sizes of city blocks and lots; treats of the complex problem of street intersections; and gives instruction in street grading, marking, and perpetuating street and property lines, and setting, witnessing, and recording monuments. This knowl- edge a municipal engineer must have in order to fill satisfactorily his important position. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Municipal Engineering Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth S13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The stu- dent pays express charges. 185 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to .the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense applica- tion. For easy gradation; for concise- ness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the particular subject of municipal engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution to a problem that might other- wise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style., particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work on which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best municipal engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 187 Hydraulic Engineering Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 122 Algebra 105 Logarithms 20 Geometry and Trigonom- etry _ 75 Elementary Mechanics . . 64 Hydratdics 75 Pneumatics 46 Strength of Materials 70 Surveying 92 Examination Questions ... 83 Surveying and Mapping . . 81 Steam and Steam Engines 130 Steam Boilers 149 Waterwheels 91 Hydraulic Machinery _. 105 Water Supply and Distri- bution 146 Irrigation 114 Examination Questions. . . 61 _ Geometrical Drawing 20 1 Mechanical Drawing .... 9 J Keys 3241 Tables and Formulas 145/ 2,127 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume Pages Illustrations, 891 Instruction Papers, 32 Drawing Plates, 10 Mapping Plates, 5 Bound Volumes, 4 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They teach how to design and install water-power plants, hydraulic machinery, and water-supply and irri- gation systems. b. They describe surveying instru- ments and explain their uses — giving all the directions in compass surveying, transit surveying, and leveling required by the hydraulic engineer. 188 c. They teach the principles of hy- draulics — treating of the flow of water in pipes, conduits, channels, brooks, and rivers. d. They contain descriptions of im- pulse turbines, reaction turbines, and overshot, breast, and undershot water- wheels. e. They show the best construction of sluices, flumes, penstocks, and gates. /. They show how to calculate the efficiency and the horsepower of water- wheels and turbines. g. They clearly explain the princi- ples of hydrostatics. ]i. They teach how to calculate the sizes of pipes and conduits to convey given quantities of water. Persons That Should Enroll a. Hydraulic Engineers and Assist- ants. b. Surveyors and Assistants. c. Persons engaged in designing and constructing waterworks and hydraulic power plants. d. Draftsmen and Designers in hy- draulic engineers' offices. e. City Engineers. /. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen of water-supply companies. g. Transitmen; Levelmen; all per- sons employed in a hydraulic engineer- ing corps. h. Men working in establishments where waterwheels and hydraulic ma- chinery are manufactured. i. Contractors and Builders of dams, reservoirs, and water-supply systems. y. Clerks in water companies' offices. 189 k. Mechanics that install water- wheels, turbines, and hydraulic machin- ery. /. Your^g Men desiring to practice hydraulic engineering as a profession. m. Men engaged in the laying out, the construction, and the maintenance of pipe lines and reservoirs. n. Men whose work requires a knowledge of the construction and the maintenance of water-purification plants. o. Men employed in the water- supply departments of large cities. p. Salesmen of hydraulic machinery. Note — The Hydraulic Engineering Course is a branch of the Civil Engineering Course and is intended for persons desiring a knowledge of waterwheels, waterworks, water-supply and irrigation systems, hydratdic machinery, and the development of water-power. If the prospective student wishes a broad knowledge of civil engi- neering, he should enroll for the Civil Engineer- ing Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The using of a portion of the enormous supply of energy at Niagara Falls and its transmission to adjacent cities and surrounding country has been for some years a matter of widespread public interest. Water-powers, because of their cheapness and practically inex- haustible supply, are being bought up by capitalists appreciating that much of the work of the future will be done by electricity — men realizing that elec- trical energy can be produced at the greatest profit by utilizing water-power now going to waste. There are hun- dreds of hydraulic-power plants in- stalled every year. It is evident that there is a large field for engineers making a specialty of water-power development. 190 b. The young man in search of a pro- fession can get a start in hydrauHc engi- neering by working as chainman or rodnian in a hydrauHc engineering corps, or by securing work as a draftsman in an establishment where hydrauHc ma- chinery is manufactured. Then, by supplementing his practical experience with the information contained in our Course, he can rapidly advance. There is in the whole range of civil engineering no field more promising than that of hydraulic engineering. c. The protection it affords against fire, the convenience it provides for the disposal of sewage, and the security it gives from disease — all make a good water supply a necessity in every com- munity. Wherever this necessity is felt and met, an opportunity is offered to the hydraulic engineer to establish a reputation and make money. d. There is a wide and growing field for engineering experts in irrigation. In the arid regions of the West there is an abundance of good land, and all it needs to become valuable is water. In Cali- fornia, Colorado, and other sections of the West, land formerly unproductive and valueless has through irrigation been made to yield profitable crops. The reclaiming of these vast sections involves large expenditures of money and gives employment to hundreds of engineers. Besides, the United States Government is reclaiming thousands of acres of arid land, constructing large dams and extensive irrigation systems, and opening up desirable opportunities for trained men 191 c. The larger cities are paying more attention each year to their water-sup- ply systems, expending large sums in the construction of dams and reservoirs to insure an unpolluted supply of drink- ing water. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average student requires a'little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Hydraulic Engi- neering Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. They are therefore an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. From 192 no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowl- edge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of hydraulic engi- neering, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items' classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best hydraulic engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 193 Complete Architectural Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122 2 Formulas 12 3 Geometry and Mensura- tion 60 4 Masonry _. 320 Examination Questions. . . 39 Keys 96 5 Carpentry 146 6 Joinery 105 7 Stair Building 56 8 Geometrical Drawing 77 9 Architectural Drawing ... 98 10 Estimating and Calctila- ting Quantities 97 11 Specifications 58 Examination Questions ... 23 Keys 24 12 Architectural Engineer- ing 298 13 Ornamental Ironwork. ... 118 Examination Questions ... 22 Keys 50 14 Ornamental Drawing 29^ 15 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 16 History of Architecture . . 187 17 Architectural Design 257 Examination Questions. . . 15 Keys. 10 18 Heating and Ventilation of Buildings 196 19 Painting and Decorating . 138 20 Building Superintendence 143 Examination Questions. . . 19 Kevs 16 21 Roofing 116 22 Sheet-Metal Work 61 23 Electric-Light Wiring and Bellwork 77 24 Plumbing and Gas-Fitting 166 25 Contracts and Perrnits . . . 104 Examination Questions .. . 29 Keys 26 J 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume Pages 3,487 Illustrations. 1,933 Instruction Papers, 33 Drawing Plates, 46 Bound Volumes 6 194 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the mathematical knowledge the student must have to practice architecture. b. They contain full instruction in dramng — showing how to make plans, sections, elevations, and details. c. They treat fully of masonry. Fireproofing and plastering are clearly explained. d. They teach how to estimate and calculate quantities, giving a worked- out example showing exactly how to estimate the cost of a modem wooden house. e. They give instruction in the graphic analysis of stresses — showing how to determine accurately by means of diagrams the stresses in frame struc- tures, such as roof trusses, etc. /. They teach the student how to calculate the strength of timber, steel columns, beams, girders, and trussed girders. g. They will enable the student to calculate the stresses, bearing loads, and working strength of rivets, pins, etc. h. They give thorough instruction regarding the various building mate- rials, such as cement, mortar, con- crete, brick, and stone. i. They contain tables giving the weights of different materials for walls, floors, and roofs. ;. They treat thoroughly of orna- mental ironwork. k. They give the student full instruc- tion in the proportionment of classic orders — such as the Tuscan, the Doric, 195 the Ionic, etc. — enabling him to give the proper proportions to any particular one he may be called on to design. /. They give the student a thorough knowledge of the history of architecture. m. They teach architectural de- signing. n. They thoroughly explain the heating and ventilating of buildings. Reliable instruction in plumbing and gas-fitting is given. o. They give instruction in painting and decorating. Graining, stenciling, gilding, marbling, and paper hanging are treated of. p. They show how to superintend the erection of buildings. q. They treat of roofing. r. They explain the construction of sheet-metal work, such as metal roofs, cornices, gutters, skylights, ventilators, etc. 5. They treat of the legal relations of the owner, architect, and builder, and give instruction as to the manner of pro- curing building permits, making con- tracts, etc. Persons That Should Enroll a. Architects. h. Building Superintendents and Foremen. c. Contractors and Builders. d. Building Inspectors. e. Architectural Draftsmen. /. College Graduates having studied architecture. g. Structural Engineers. h. Students and Graduates of high schools wishing to study architecture. 196 i. Clerks in architects and ers' ( offices. /• Carpenters. k. Joiners. I. Lumber Dealers. m. Mill Men. n. Stair Builders. o. Real-Estate Dealers. P- Insurance Adjusters. q- Masons. r. Plasterers. s. Bricklayers. t. Youne Men wanting to architecture. u. Estimate Clerks. build- study Why Persons Should Enroll a. Never before has there been so great a building boom. Never has the architect been busier; and never were the opportunities better for the young man to enter the pleasant and well-paid profession of architecture. There is probably no calling today that has a brighter future or one that yields the earnest worker more self-satisfaction or keener pleasure. The work has a pecu- liar fascination that increases as the student proceeds, constantly inspiring him to excel every previous effort. Our instruction is just what the young man, tired of irksome work at low pay and determined to better his condition, is looking for; it provides him with the information he must have to reach the highest and best-paid positions. Our Course will increase the architectural draftsman's usefulness and multiply his chances for promotion. To the prac- ticing architect it will bring increased opportunities and income. 197 b. Hundreds of young men are today in good-paying positions as a result of our architectural instruction. It does not take an architect long to discover the employe that is trying to win pro- motion. And when the architect does learn, the promotion soon follows. Our Course forms the solid foundation upon which the student can build a successful career. c. The architect designs the building to meet the requirements it is intended for. His plans must represent a pleas- ing and useful structure. A building may be artistic and still be a failure from a utilitarian standpoint, or it may meet the demands of utility and yet present a bad appearance. To design a building in which artistic effect and utility are harmoniously combined, the architect must know the principles of architectural design and the details of building construction. Our Course gives them. d. By supplementing his knowledge of drawing with our instruction, the architectural draftsman can soon be- come a full-fledged architect, able to design a modem building and to super- intend its erection. Some of the stu- dents of our Complete Architectural Course are in business for themselves and are earning from $5,000 to $10,000 a year. e. Knowledge is the most valuable asset a young man can have: it is the safest investment; for no one can rob him of knowledge, and he can coin it into dollars. Architectural knowledge is in demand, and with our help and his spare time the student can increase his 198 earning power and multiply his use- fulness. /. By enrolling for our Complete Architectural Course and taking the drawing section first, the student can soon qualify for a paying position in an architect's office. Once started, by putting into practice what he learns from our Course, the student can materi- ally shorten the time spent in making blueprints, tracings, etc., and have more responsible work assigned to him. Through further study and his daily work at the office, the student will acquire proficiency and forge ahead rapidly. g. The first step toward increased pay for the carpenter, mason, and other building tradesman is the ability to read working drawings. To such men the knowledge contained in our Course is the key that releases them from a life spent in subordinate, poorly paid, and uncertain positions into a field of work that is more pleasant, better paid, and in which there are practically unlimited opportunities for advancement. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Complete Archi- tectural Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 199 equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course, which were prepared to give the student that must study out of the presence of a teacher a good knowledge of archi- tecture. Instruction for such a stu- dent must be so forcefully written as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read. Because our Bound Vol- umes meet this exacting requirement, they are universally accepted as the best for home study. So clearly are they written, the student can take the knowledge into his mind unaided. b. They contain the best that is known about architecture and building construction, and are invaluable as reference books. Indeed, no reference library on architecture is complete with- out them. Some students have won promotion by studying the Bound Vol- umes in spare time at home and without submitting recitations to us. The vol- umes are so fully indexed, the student can find in an instant any subject of which they treat. Much of the infor- mation they contain cannot be found elsewhere w4th anything like so much 200 ease. The United States Government uses our Architectural Bound Volumes as a reference work in the office of the supervising architect at Washington. This fact alone proves their inestimable value for reference purposes. c. They are a storehouse of archi- tectural knowledge, and no one inter- ested in this subject can afford to be without them. Bearing directly on the subject of architecture, they explain the thousand and one details that arise in architectural design and building construction. 201 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Building Contractors' Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122 1 2 Formulas 12 3 Geometry and Mensura- tion 60 4 Masonry 320 Examination Questions. . . 39 Keys 96 5 Carpentry 146 6 Joinery 105 7 Stair Building 56 8 Geometrical Drawing 77 9 Architectural Drawing ... 98 10 Estimating and Calcula- ting Quantities 97 11 Specifications 58 Examination Questions ... 23 Keys 24 J Pages 1,333 Illustrations, 702 Instruction Papers, 14 Drawing Plates, 17 Bound Volumes, 2 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the mathematical- knowledge the student requires in prac- ticing building contracting. h. They treat fully of both stone and brick masonry. Fireproofing and plastering are clearly described. c. They show how to design and construct stairways. d. They teach how to draw plans, sections, and elevations, and to make tracings. Blueprinting is explained. e. They furnish reliable instruction in estimating and calculating quanti- ties — showing in detail by a worked-out example how to estimate the cost of a house. This information is of vital importance to the contractor; for he 202 must set his price before he starts to build and unless he can estimate accu- rately the cost of work he may lose money. /. They enable the student to write correct specifications. g. They include instruction in car- pentry and joinery. Persons That Should Enroll a. Contractors. b. Builders. c. Carpenters. d. Joiners. e. Stair Builders. /. Stone Cutters. g. Masons. h. Plasterers. i. Bricklayers. j. Clerks employed in contractors' and builders' offices. [^jik. Architectural Draftsmen. /. Building Inspectors. ■'' m. Persons wanting to become fore- men or independent contractors. n. Foremen. o. Teamsters. ' Note — The Building Contractors' Course is intended for those wanting a good knowledge of building operations, but that do not want to study architecture. This Course will help the student become a contractor and builder; it will qualify him to contract for and to build modem wooden structures. The person wanting a full knowledge of architecture should enroll for the_ Complete Architectural Course. _ Those desiring to take up architectural drawing and designing — but designing not so fully as treated in our Complete Architectural Course — should enroll for the Architectural Drawing and Designing Course. Persons wanting to study only architectural drawing should enroll for the Architectural Drawing Course. 203 Why Persons Should Enroll a. Thousands of buildings are being erected every year. Never before were building operations conducted on so great a scale; never has the contractor and builder had better opportunities than at present. But to succeed he must understand both the practical and the theoretical sides of his business. He must know how to make plans, figure the cost of materials, write speci- fications, and superintend building operations. Building contracting is a business open to every ambitious build- ing tradesman ; and our Course opens the door of independence and success to every carpenter, mason, plasterer, and other artisan no longer content to work for wages and under the direction of a foreman or a contractor. Our instruc- tion will help the student become a builder's superintendent or a contractor and builder. A number of students of our Building Contractors' Course have succeeded in acquiring large and profitable businesses for themselves. h. The contractor and builder is usually a man that has acquired by experience a practical knowledge of carpentry, masonry, or some other branch of the building trades. He starts in business for himself by con- tracting for that part of the work with which he is most familiar. If he is a man of good judgment and business ability, he may meet with fair success; but he soon learns that to become a successful contractor he must have tech- nical knowledge that he cannot get by experience. He finds himself hampered 204 by his inability to estimate accurately the cost of material, labor, etc., and in drawing up correct specifications. Our Course is specially suited to the man just entering the building contracting field; it will enable him to make accu- rate estimates, draw up contracts, and fulfil them with satisfaction to the owner and with profit to himself. Through our instruction the student gets a thorough knowledge of general building opera- tions ; it will help him become a success- ful contractor. c. To do his work successfully a building contractor must know how to read architects' working drawings. Indeed, without this knowledge it is unsafe for him to engage in building; for unless he clearly understands the drawings, he cannot carry out the work correctly — and an error in construction may cost him his reputation as a builder. Our Building Contractors' Course is his surest protection; it will enable him to read working drawings, make plans, sections, and elevations of buildings, and to carry out his work according to specifications. d. The building of wooden stairways is probably the highest branch of joinery. More care is required in their planning, more ingenuity in setting them out, and more skilful M^orkman- ship in their construction than in any other part of a building. The stair builder is usually a carpenter or a joiner that has been promoted because of his skill, and he is well paid. In no way can the carpenter or the joiner more quickly advance to the stair builder's position than through our help. By 205 studying our Course, the student can soon learn to design and construct stair- ways; and the employer is quick to notice this ability and to advance the man that has it. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Building Con- tractors' Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They embrace the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- ing Plates, and Keys of the Course, and give a clear and concise treatment of building contracting. b. They are for reference purposes the most valuable work ever prepared on building contracting. Containing as they do in logical order all the sub- jects properly included in a building 206 contractors' course, the Bound Volumes give information that will greatly enlarge the student's knowledge and multiply his usefulness. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They were prepared to meet the needs of the student that must study with no instructor by his side. Instruc- tion for this purpose must be so force- fully written that the student can take it into his mind unaided. So well does our instruction meet this requirement, many of our students, by studying in spare time at home, have acquired a good knowledge of building contracting — knowledge that has placed them in good positions. It is because our Bound Volumes are so clearly writiien and illustrated as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read that they are universally accepted as the best for home study. 207 structural Engineering Course 121 38 LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 Arithmetic Geometry , and Mensura- tion Elements of Algebra .... Algebraic Equations and Elements of Trigonom- etry Geometrical Drawing 77 Structural Drafting 107 Examination Questions ... 32 Keys 102 Tables of Natural Sines, Cosines, etc 18 Loads in Structures 32" Properties of Sections .... 46 Materials of Structural Engineering 106 Beams and Girders 226 Columns and Struts 128 Details of Construction. . . 52 Graphical Analysis of Stresses 161 Examination Questions ... 41 Kevs 47 Statics of Masonry 213 1st Bound Volume Heavy Foundations. Retaining Walls Fireproofing Roof-Truss Design Wind Bracing Specifications Examination Questions . , Keys 70 34 110 176 67 62 30 40 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume Pages 2,272 Illustrations, 1,117 Instruction Papers, 36 Drawing Plates, 20 Bound Volumes, 3 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They are the most thorough, prac- tical, and comprehensive ever prepared on structural engineering. b. They contain numerous examples relating to the practical work of struc- tural engineering. 208 c. They give full instruction in the graphical analysis of stresses — showing how to determine accurately by means of diagrams the stresses in any frame structure, such as a roof truss or a wind brace. d. They contain thorough instruc- tion in roof-truss design — showing noted architects' and engineers' working draw- ings of both wood and steel trusses. e. They teach the student how to calculate the strength of timber, iron or steel columns, beams, girders, and trussed girders. /. They thoroughly treat of rein- forced concrete construction — giving rules for calculating the strength of beams, columns, and floors. g. They embrace thorough instruc- tion in the stability of arches, buttresses, retaining walls, and heavy foundations. h. They will enable the student to calculate the stresses, bearing loads, and working strength of rivets, pins, joints, etc. i. They give full instruction in wind bracing. y. They teach the student how to determine the "moment of inertia," "radius of gyration," and "section modulus" of the various sections used in modern building construction. k. They are replete with illustrations. A large number of these illustrations are actual working drawings, and are in- valuable to the student having to design timber, masonry, and structural details. /. They explain fireproofing. w. They treat of eccentric loads on columns and explain the provisions necessary to sustain such loads. 209 n. They give thorough instruction regarding the various building materials, such as cement, mortar, concrete, brick, and stone. o. They contain tables giving the weights of different materials for floors and roofs. p. They are so practical, frequent reference to them will give the student knowledge worth many times their cost — even if he has no time for systematic study and recitation. q. They contain tables giving the strength of structural columns and of the moments of inertia of structural steel shapes. r. They teach the student expanded- metal, or monolithic, construction. 5. They thoroughly treat of dead loads and live loads of buildings. Full information is given regarding snow loads and wind pressure. t. They give instruction in the design of timber, cast-iron, and steel column connections. Persons That Should Enroll a. Structural Engineers. h. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen of construction companies and structural engineering concerns. c. Structural Iron and Steel Con- tractors and Builders. d. Draftsmen in steel mills and in the offices of architects, structural engi- neers, and contractors. e. Steel Workers and Steel Erectors. /. Civil Engineers. g. Mechanical Engineers. h. Municipal Engineers. i. Architects. 210 ;. Building Inspectors. k. Students and Graduates of our Architectural Courses. /. College Graduates having studied civil engineering, mechanical engineer- ing, or architecture. m. Mill Contractors and Builders. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Great progress has been made in modem building construction and the use of structural steel in the last ten years. The construction of a high office building — the "sky-scraper" — requires the highest engineering skill. From the very foundation every beam and girder must be carefully designed and every column and strut properly proportioned. The greatest care is required in erection. Every precaution for safety must be taken; and flaws in construction must be discovered and corrected. Our Course is specially suited for superintendents and foremen of structural engineering concerns; it will give them a thorough knowledge of large building construction ; will enable them to design and superintend the building of heavy timber, iron, steel, concrete, and fireproof structures; it is the only thorough, practical, up-to- date Course in structural engineering. h. Probably no portion of a great structure requires more careful atten- tion than the foundation. In fact, the foundation for a high building to be erected on treacherous soil probably constitutes the most difficult problem with which the structural engineer has to contend. The designing of the foundation cannot be done on guess- work. Failure to distribute the load correctly may cause the structure to settle unevenly or crack, which may cost thousands of dollars. Our Course gives full instruction in the manner in which heavy foundations are designed for all kinds of soil. c. Increasing city population and the consequent scarcity and high price of building lots, together with the demand for fireproof construction, have made imperative the development of iron, steel, and concrete "sky-scraper" construction. Builders, foremen, and other mechanics competent to handle the work are scarce. Architects and contractors are in need of capable men. As a result, high salaries are paid. The building mechanic, the foreman, or the contractor that acquires a practical knowledge of structural engineering will have many opportunities to make money in the next few years. d. Because of the scarcity of men competent to design and superintend steel, heavy timber, and concrete con- struction, most of such work is left to a few engineers and construction com- panies. But there is no good reason why architects and builders should allow these big contracts to pass. They can handle this remunerative work themselves if they acquire a thorough knowledge of structural engineering. In fact, the architect and the builder m.ust learn to do this work for self-pro- tection . With most of the office , munici- pal, hotel, and mill buildings being erected by large structural companies, the field of the architect and the builder 212 is practically narrowed down to house erection. By supplementing his present knowledge of building design and con- struction with the information con- tained in our Course, the architect or the builder can successfully plan and build according to the most scientific principles of structural engineering. t-. Our Course is the only Struc- tural Engineering Course that can be studied by persons not having a knowledge of higher mathematics. Our Course gives exact and reliable informa- tion concerning the designing of modern large buildings, in so far as their frame- work, walls, foundations, etc. are con- cerned; and this is accomplished by using only the most elementary princi- ples of mathematics. /. Structural draftsmen are always in demand, and are probably the best- paid class of draftsmen. Our Paper on structural drafting is in accord with the best drafting- room practice. We teach our student to draw his Plates exactly as he will be called on to make drawings in actual practice. On enter- ing a drafting room he will thus be fully prepared to begin his work with- out having to wait to learn new meth- ods. This is a decided advantage and will help him make rapid progress. g. Written by men of long experi- ence as structural engineers and design- ers — men that have designed and super- intended the erection of some of the largest and finest buildings in the country — our Course is replete with the latest and best ideas in modern building construction. 213 h. To the steel worker and the steel erector our Structural Engineering Course offers an opportunity to advance from the laborious work of the shop or the field to the less arduous and better-paid position of foreman or superintendent, or to a position in direct line of promotion in the engineer- ing department. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Structural Engineering Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for S7.95. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfuly met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applica- tions in structural engineering with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any- other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation ; for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of structural engineering, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might other- wise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best structural engineering practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 215 General Chemistry Course Eight subjects are taught in the General Chemistry Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain twenty-one, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! Arithmetic 134 Elementary Algebra 59 30 166 35 97 10 Mensuration Physics Examination Questions Keys Tables Inorganic Chemistry 543 1 Examination Questions. . . 22 > Keys 22 J Qualitative Analysis 240 Quantitative Analysis 232 Examination Questions. . . 17 Keys 14 Quantitative Analysis 425 Examination Questions Keys Organic Chemistry 490 ^ • • - ■• 16 16 J t251 13 12] Examination Questions. . . Keys Sulphuric Acid 116 Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid 224 Manufacture of Iron 67 Manufacture of Steel 191 Examination Questions .. . 16 Keys . 17 Packing-House Industries 168 Cottonseed Oil and Prod- ucts 138 Manufacture of Leather . . 95 Manufacture of Soap 178 Examination Questions. . . 14 Keys 12 Manufacture of Cement . . 110 Manufacture of Paper. ... 156 Manufacture of Sugar. ... 119 Petroleum and Products . 126 Manufacture of Gas 84 Examination Questions .. . 15 Keys 15 Pages 4,454 216 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume 7th Bound Volume 8th Bound Volume Illustrations, 836 Instruction Papers, 68 Bound Volumes, 8 Note — No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. The eight Bound VoltTmes containing the entire Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course are furnished to each student of the General Chemistry Course. Arithmetic, Elementary Algebra, and Mensuration give the student the mathe- matical knowledge he needs in reading chemical formulas, making analyses, and performing the calculations that the chemist has to do. Physics treats of matter and its properties; and of gravitation, heat light, magnetism, and electricity. Inorganic Chemistry treats of chemi- cal elements and their compounds and of the principles of chemical theory, such as the laws of chemical combina- tion, atomic weights, molecular weights, chemical calculations, etc. Each ele- ment is treated separately in regard to its properties, appearances, and behavior toward other elements or compounds. Qualitative Analysis teaches how to separate and identify the ingredients contained in substances. Quantitative Analysis teaches how to discover how much of the ingredients is contained. Organic Chemistry treats of the numerous chemical compounds that always contain carbon and hydrogen, and in which other elements such as oxygen, nitrogen, etc. are frequently found. Organic chemistry is some- times called the chemistry of the carbon compounds. 217 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject that it is necessary for the student to study in order to gain a general knowledge of chemistry. b. They include instruction in all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of chemistry is begun. c. They require the student to study no more mathematics than he has to use in chemistry. d. They give the student actual practice in analysis. They require him to exercise his skill in making analyses for the Schools. e. They contain all the detailed illustrations necessary to give the stu- dent a thorough knowledge of how to use chemical apparatus. /. They are of necessity concise and clear; for the student studies them out of the presence of a teacher. Persons That Should Enroll a. Chemical Engineers. h. Chemists and Chemists' Assistants. c. Employes in iron and steel works. d. Persons employed in chemical works. e. Persons engaged in the manufac- ture of photographic supplies. /. Employes in electric storage-bat- tery factories. g. Salesmen of chemicals and chem- ical apparatus. h. Drug Clerks. i. Mining Engineers. j. Assayers. 218 k. Young Men attending school that desire to pursue the study of chemistry outside of regular school hours. /. Experimenters and Inventors. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Chemistry is the mother of all sciences. To her we look for the knowl- edge that enables us to select pure foods; to retard the progress of disease; to quicken the processes of life. Stu- dents ambitious of achieving success in some branch will find limitless oppor- tunities in pharmaceutical chemistry. To such our General Chemistry Course is offered. The Course is not in any sense a Course in pharmacy; but it gives the student the general knowl- edge of chemistry he must have in order to understand the composition of medicinal substances. h. Analytic chemistry is becoming more important every year. Manufac- turers, realizing that the value of their finished products is dependent on the purity of their raw materials, are eager to secure skilled analysts and are glad to pay good salaries. c. Mining engineers and metallur- gists must know the composition of their ores in order to decide what fluxes are required in obtaining the metals. None but the analytic chemist can give this knowledge, and he is well paid for his services. d. There is a broad field for students that will prepare themselves for the work of the toxicologist, which pertains to poisons, their effects, antidotes, and recognition. Our General Chemistry 219 Course teaches how to analyze adul- terated foods and discover the poisons contained therein. e. The student may build up a large and profitable business for himself, beginning without capital other than his analytic outfits and the knowl- edge acquired from our General Chemistry Course. Physicians need the services of analysts; householders require analysis of their drinking watei;; operators of boiler plants want their feedwater tested in order that its im- purities may be neutralized; fertilizers are to be examined ; and dairy products are to be analyzed. In fact, there is in almost every community a good deal of important chemical work that has to be either left undone or sent to some far-away laboratory, simply because there is no one at hand to perform it. Remarks The General Chemistry Course is intended for those that desire a general knowledge of chemistry and chemical analysis. When a student wants to study the application of chemical prin- ciples to manufacturing processes, he should enroll for the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course, or one of its subordinate Courses whose title indicates that it treats of the subject he is especially interested in. For example : if a student wants to study the manu- facture of soap, he should enroll for the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course, or the Chemistry and Manu- facture OF Soap Course. In no event will the instruction in soap manufacture be given apart from the full Chemistry 220 AND Manufacture of Soap Course ; for the stvident cannot comprehend the tech- nique of soap manufacture without a thorough knowledge of the preceding in- struction. This example applies to all the Courses subordinate to the Chem- istry AND Chemical Technology Course. To a person already enrolled for our General Chemistry Course we will furnish instruction in applied chemistry — such as Manufacture of Soap, Manu- facture of Iron, etc. — for an additional charge of $5 for each subject. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Laboratory Apparatus Required The student requires two analytic outfits; one for qualitative analysis, which may be bought through the Schools for $21 cash; and one for quantitative analysis, which may be bought through the Schools for $23.50 cash. Express charges must be paid by the student. The student is not required to buy his outfits through the Schools, although he will undoubtedly save money by doing so. The con- tents of these outfits are too many to be described here; a complete descrip- tion is given in the circular entitled "Applied Chemistry." 221 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They embrace the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course, and give a full and clear treatment of the principles, facts, and processes of general chemistry and chemical manufacture. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia, because they treat of each subject fully and in detail. They are indexed so completely that any par- ticular reference can be easily found. They excel in conciseness of statement and clearness of explanation. c. They contain information so prac- tical that some students, after learning enough of the elementary mathematics to be able to apply the rules, have with- out further recitation been able to secure prominent positions and obtain large salaries in their trades and professions. 222 Chemistry and Chemical Tech- nology Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 134^ Elementary Algebra 59 Mensuration 30 Physics 166 Examination Questions. . . 35 Keys 97 Tables 10 10 Inorganic Chemistry .... 543 ' Examination Questions ... 22 Keys 22 Qualitative Analysis . . . Quantitative Analysis. . . Examination Questions . . Keys Quantitative Analysis. . . . 425" Examination Questions. . . 13 Kej^s 12, Organic Chemistry 490 " Examination Questions. . . 16 Keys 16. Sulphuric Acid 116" Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid 224 Manufacture of Iron .... 67 Manufacture of Steel 191 Examination Questions. . . 16 Keys 17. Packing-House Industries 168" Cottonseed Oil and Prod- ucts 138 Manufacture of Leather . . 95 Manufacture of Soap 178 Examination Questions .. . 14 Keys 12 J Manufacture of Cement . . 110 Man-ufacture of Paper. ... 156 Mantifacture of Sugar. ... 119 Petroleum and Products. . 126 > Manufacture of Gas 84 Examination Questions. . . 15 Keys 15 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume 7th Bound Volume 8th Bound Volume Pages 4,454 Illustrations, 836 Instruction Papers, 68 Bound Volumes 8 223 Sulphuric Acid gives the student a clear idea as to just what sulphuric acid is, and what place it occupies among the oxides and the acids of sulphur. The formation of sulphuric acid is fully explained, and the principles governing its manufacture are clearly set forth. Raw materials are described and classified. The production of sul- phur dioxide or burner gas is thor- oughly treated, and clear illustrations and descriptions of furnaces and burners are given. Then follows a thorough explanation of the apparatus and the processes involved in all stages of sul- phuric-acid manufacture. Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid treats of the processes of obtaining salt from natural and artificial brines; and the chemical, electrolytic, and analytic methods pursued in the manufacture of soda, hydrochloric acid, bleaching powder, and kindred products. Manufacture of Iron treats of the various materials, appliances, and proc- esses employed in casting pig iron. Furnaces of superior dimensions for different kinds of stock are described, and their various parts — such as tuyeres, notches, bells and hoppers, explo- sion doors, etc. — are illustrated and explained. Clear and concise instruc- tion is given on the charging, blowing in, and blowing out of furnaces. Fur- nace reactions, slags, and calculations of the proportions of the constituents necessary to produce the required slag are included. The elements con- tained in iron and the present methods of classifying and grading it are de- scribed. 224 Manufacture of Steel explains the details of the open-hearth, the Bes- semer, and the crucible processes of production. Furnaces of standard types are illustrated, and their operation is clearly and concisely described. Full instrviction is given in the making of producer gas. Tables are included showing the analyses of fuels and slags, and the other analyses of value in steel manufacture. Attention is paid to alloy steels, such as tungsten steel, manganese steel, nickel steel, chrome steel, etc. The making of steel castings is elaborately explained. Packing-House Industries gives briefly the history and breadth of the meat- packing industry, and explains the methods of conducting modern estab- lishments. The various animal prod- ucts and their dispositions are fully explained. The manufacture of all kinds of lards, tallows, greases, and oils is followed from the beginning of the processes to the delivery of the finished products. Excerpts are given from the amended rules regulating the transactions in lard among the members of the New York Produce Exchange. Detailed instruction is given in meat canning and in the manufacture of beef extract, butterine, and glue. Prod- ucts such as blood albumin and digest- ive ferments (pepsin, peptone, and the like) are given account of. The manu- facture of fertilizers is clearly set forth, and formulas are given for fertilizer mixtures. A considerable part of this instruction is devoted to analytic methods and tests of products, and to the determination of grade of oils, tallows, greases, etc. This treatise is replete with detailed illustrations show- ing the construction of special machin- ery and the arrangement of plants. Cottonseed Oil and Products gives the history and development of cottonseed- oil manufacture, explains the applica- tion of chemistry in the industry, and describes the mills and general principles involved in the production of oil. Excerpts are included from the rules of the New York Produce Exchange, regulating transactions in cottonseed oil. The rules of the Interstate Cotton- seed Crushers' Association are also given. The analytic methods appli- cable to cottonseed products are fully set forth. This instruction is thor- oughly illustrated. Manufacture of Leather gives thor- ough instruction regarding the various tanning agents, tanning materials, etc. The leaching of bark is described, and grinding mills and machinery for drum leaching are illustrated in detail. A fine illustrated description of the structure of animal skin is given. The preparatory treatment and the tanning of sole-leather hides are concisely explained. Instruction is given in the manufacture of upper leather; bleach- ing; dyeing; the measurement of leather; and the analysis of tanning materials. The machinery used in leather manu- facture is illustrated. Manufacture of Soap begins with a complete definition of soap, and a general outline of the manufacture of a settled soap. An exhaustive treatise on animal and vegetable soap stocks is given; and the manufacture of alkalies 226 is described. The instruction in the chemistry of soap manufacture treats of glycerides and their properties, the behavior of fats and oils toward saponif3ang agents, etc. This is fol- lowed with a thorough explanation of the processes of soap manufacture, containing fine illustrations of the machinery and appliances used. The chemical examination of raw materials and products is concisely and clearly set forth. Manufacture of Cement gives a brief history of the early use of lime as a binding agent for stone, brick, and other materials, and follows with an important treatise on the discoveries and steps that have led to the modern methods of cement making. The chemi- cal nature of limestone, the burning of lime, and similar subjects are treated of. Full instruction is given in the manu- facture of the following cements: natural (Roman, or Rosendale) ; puz- zolan; slag; slag Portland; silica Port- land; magnesium; and Portland. The calculation of cement mixtures is thor- oughly explained, and analyses of the materials used in the manufacture of cements are given. In that part of the instruction devoted strictly to cement manufacture, the various mills, kilns, and other machines are illustrated and described in detail. The testing of Portland cement is elaborately set forth. The chemical analysis of Port- land cement and raw materials is thor- oughly taught. Manufacture of Paper clearly and con- cisely explains the details of paper making, and illustrates and describes 227 the machinery used. The materials used in the manufacture of paper are carefully considered, and the making of the various pulps is treated of. Then follows complete instruction in all the methods involved in the making of the finished product. Manufacture of Sugar treats of the composition of sugar cane and the making of cane sugar. Defecation, clarification, concentration, granulation, and curing are thoroughly set forth. The details of the beet-sugar industry are explicitly taught. The planting, cultivating, and harvesting of beets are explained. Sugar-making plants are illustrated, and the manufacture of beet sugar, from the receiving of the beets to the delivery of the refined sugar, is given thorough treatment. Petroleum and Products treats of the nature and the composition of petro- leum; the techno-chemical examination of crude oil; production; and trans- portation. The theories of the origin of natural gas are recited, and the analysis of Findlay gas is given. The refining of illuminating oils, the chem- ical treatment of the distillate for burn- ing oils, and the refining of naphtha are treated of. Explanation is given of the details of paraffin manufacture. An exhaustive treatise on the production and manufacture of lubricating oils is included. The manufacture of vaseline, waxes, etc. is explained. Thorough instruction is given in the performing of all the various tests of petroleum and petroleum products. Railroad specifi- cations and State requirements are given. 228 Manufacture of Gas gives a complete explanation of the manufacture of coal gas. The composition of the purified gas is stated, and the various processes of producing it — from the distillation of the coal to the delivery of the gas to the holder — are fully explained. A thorough description is given of water- gas apparatus and the manufacture of water gas. Acetylene gas is treated of, and safet}^ regulations regarding acety- lene apparatus are given. Photom- eters are illustrated, and their use is clearly explained. Note — This instruction is in no sense a treatise on the design and erection of gas-making plants. It is intended to give the student a thorough working knowledge of apparatus, and a knowl- edge of the chemistry of gas manufacture. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They help the student become an expert specialist; after giving him thor- ough instruction in chemistry in general, they teach him how to apply his knowl- edge in manufacturing. b. They embrace all the elementary subjects necessary to be understood before the study of chemistry is begun. c. They require the student to study no more mathematics than he has to use in chemistry. d. They give the student practice in analysis: they require him to exercise his skill in making analyses for the Schools. e. They contain all the detailed illustrations necessary to give the stu- dent a thorough knowledge of how to use chemical apparatus. 229 /. They are of necessity concise and clear; for the student studies them out of the presence of a teacher. Persons That Should Enroll a. Chemical Engineers. b. Chemists and Chemists' Assist- ants. c. Employes in iron and steel works. d. Packing-House Employes. e. Persons employed in the manufac- ture of cottonseed oil and its products. /. Employes in tanneries and leather factories. g. Persons engaged in the manufac- ture of soap. h. Employes in paper mills. i. Men engaged in sugar manufac- ture. y. Persons employed in all branches of the petroleum industry. k. Employes in gas plants. L Food Inspectors. . m. Health Officers. n. Salesmen of the various products named in the titles of the Courses. o. Persons desirous of securing em- ployment in any of the industries of which the instruction treats. p. Inventors and Experimenters. Why Persons Should Enroll a. In the manufacture of soap, sugar, cement, or any other thing treated of in the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course, the quality of the product is dependent on two things: first, the thoroughness of the workmen's general knowledge of chemistry; second, their ability to I 230 exercise that general knowledge in con- centrating their efforts on the produc- tion of the article. The men that can make the best product and practice the highest economy will be called to the best positions and receive the highest salaries. b. Shiftless workmen and hit-or-miss methods last but a short time in the domain of chemical technology. The manufacturer has learned that his profits come and go largely according to the talent at work in his chemical department. He knows that high sal- li aries paid to men of ability are his j most profitable investment. c. Chemistry is fascinating to per- i sons of all ages. Each fact learned \ stimulates the desire for further knowl- i edge. So interesting is the work, the ; student attains a surprising degree of proficiency in analysis, etc., almost before he realizes what a complex sub- ject he has in hand. Chemistry offers golden opportunities to people ambi- tious of entering upon careers of useful- ness to the world and consequent profit to themselves. No class of persons is today in more urgent demand than those skilled in chemistry and the application of its principles to manu- facturing. d. The instruction given in the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course will benefit every one in any way associated with the respective industries. It will be of value to the apprentice, the operator, the foreman, or the manager. 231 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than 3 years. The average student requires a little more time. Laboratory Apparatus Required The student requires two analytic outfits: one for qualitative analysis, which may be bought through the Schools for $21 cash; and one for quantitative analysis, which may be bought through the Schools for $23.50 cash. Express charges must be paid by the student. The student is not required to buy his outfits through the Schools, although he will undoubtedly save money by doing so. The contents of these outfits are too many to be described here; a complete descrip- tion is given in the circular entitled "Applied Chemistry." 232 Courses Extracted From the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course There are twelve Courses made up from the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course, which contains the following subjects: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 134 2 Elementary Algebra 59 3 Mensuration 30 4 Physics 166 Examination Questions. . . 35 Keys 97 Tables 10 5 Inorganic Chemistry .... 543 Examination Questions ... 22 Keys 22 6 Qualitative Analysis .... 240 7 Quantitative Analysis. . . . 232 Examination Questions. . . 17 Keys 14 Quantitative Analysis. . . . 425 "1 Examination Questions. . . 13 > Keys 12 J 8 Organic Chemistry 490 1 Examination Questions. . . 16 > Keys 16 J 9 Sulphuric Acid 116 10 Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid 224 11 Mam^acture of Iron .... 67 12 Mamifacture of Steel 191 Examination Questions ... 16 Keys 17 13 Packing-House Industries 168 ~ 14 Cottonseed Oil and Prod- ucts 138 15 Manufacttire of Leather . . 95 16 Manufacture of Soap 178 Examination Questions. . . 14 Keys 12 233 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume 7th Bound Volume 8th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 17 Manufacture of Cement . . 110 18 Manufacture of Paper. ... 156 19 Manufacture of Sugar. ... 119 20 Petroleum and Products . 126 21 Manufacture of Gas 84 Examination Questions. . . 15 Keys 15 Pages 4,454 Illustrations, 836 Instruction Papers, 68 Bound Volumes, 8 Note — ^The eight Bound Volumes containing the entire Chemistry and Chemical Tech- nology Course are furnished to each student of any of its subordinate Courses. Titles of the Courses Chemistry and Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 9. Chemistry and Manufacture of Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 10. Chemistry and Manufacture of Iron and Steel Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 11, and 12. Chemistry and Packing-House Industries Course, consisting of sub- jects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (Parts 1 to 9 inclusive), 7 (Parts 1, 7, 8, and 9), and 13. Chemistry and Manufacture of Cottonseed Oil and Products Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 14. Chemistry and Manufacture of Leather Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4), 7, and 15. Chemistry and Manufacture of- Soap Course, consisting of subjects;; 234 Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1 and 2), 7, and 16. Chemistry and Manufacture of Cement Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6* (Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4), 7 (Parts 1 to 7, inclusive), and 17. Chemistry and Manufacture of Paper Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1 and 2), 7 (Parts 1 to 7, inclusive), and 18. Chemistry and Manufacture of Sugar Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 (Parts 7 and 8), and 19. Chemistry, Petroleum, and Manu- facture OF Products Course, con- sisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 20. Chemistry and Manufacture of Gas Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 (Parts 1 and 2), and 21. Remarks The student of each of these subor- dinate Courses cannot take up subject No. 9 nor any of the succeeding subjects before he has passed in whatever of the preceding subjects (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) are included in his Course. This is because the ability required in making sulphuric acid, steel, leather, soap, sugar, etc. is really no more nor less than the ability to apply general chemical principles to special processes. There is but one way for the student to acquire expertness in chemical tech- nology: he must first learn the general principles of chemistry, and then learn to apply these principles in manufac- turing. 235 To a person already enrolled for any of the Courses made up from the Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course we will furnish instruction in other branches of Applied Chemistry not included in his Course for an addi- tional charge of $5 for each subject. Time Required to Finish the Chemical and Chemical Technology Course, or One of the Courses Subor- dinate to It That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Chemistry and Chem- ical Technology Course in less than 2^ years, and some finish one of its subordinate Courses in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Laboratory Apparatus Required The student of our Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course, Chem- istry AND Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid Course, Chemistry and Manu- facture of Alkalies and Hydro- chloric Acid Course, Chemistry and Manufacture of Iron and Steel Course, Chemistry and Manufacture of Cottonseed Oil and Products Course, Chemistry and Manufacture of Leather Course, Chemistry and Manufacture of Cement Course, or Chemistry and Manufacture of Paper Course, requires Part 1 (price $21) of our Complete Chemistry Outfit as soon as he is ready to study Inor- ganic Chemistry; and Part 2 (price 236 $23.50) is required as soon as he is ready to study Qualitative Analysis. The student of our Chemistry and Manufacture of Soap Course requires only Part 1 of the Complete Chemistry Outfit, which should be secured as soon as he is ready to study Inorganic Chemistry. Express charges must be paid by the student. The student need not buy his outfits through the Schools, although he will undoubtedly save money by doing so. The contents of these outfits are too many to be described here; a complete descrip- tion is given in the circular entitled "Applied Chemistry." 237 General Illustrating Course Thirteen subjects are taught in the General Illustrating Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference' Li- brary contain thirty-two, as follows: 13 41 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE Arithmetic 121 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas . . Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions Logarithms Elementary Mechanics . . Examination Questions. . . Keys 71 20 64 44 140 Tables 37 Geometrical Drawing 77 Freehand Drawing 84 Elements of Perspective . . 71 Perspective Drawing 39 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 Architectural Drawing ... 98 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 Rendering in Water Color 54 Drawing From Nature. . . . Drawing From Cast Elements of Figure Draw- ing Drawing From the Figure Examination Questions . . . Historic Ornament Elements of Ornament . . . Practical Design 55 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 238 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color. 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- [ 5th Bound signing 25 f Volume 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination- Questions. . . IS Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1 378 Drawing Plates. 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 rnay be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. While the Course includes only the subjects in bold-face type in the chart and contained in the first three Bound Volumes, we furnish for refer- ence purposes two more Bound Volumes con- taining the remainder of the text of our Arts and Crafts Courses. Thus each student that enrolls for our General Illustrating Course receives the five Bound Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the General Illustrating Course desiring instruction in anj^ subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- tion for SIO a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to make a finished drawing or a rough sketch for any object or idea he wishes to convey by means of an illustration. b. They will train him to make, in pen and ink, finished drawings that will be correct in line and composition, and acceptable to publishers or others inter- ested in reproducing work. c. They will enable him to compre- hend style in illustrating, through the 239 criticisms of numerous illustrations that are reproduced from drawings of most successful pen-and-ink illustrators. d. They will enable him to render his drawings in pencil, brush, wash, pen and ink, or crayon. e. They will train him in the char- acteristic proportions of the human figure and in its value in illustrating and designing. /. They will train him in freehand water-color work directly from nature, and also give him instruction in the elements and application of perspective, particularly as applied to architectural details. Persons That Should Enroll a. All persons desiring a practical Course of study in the principal branches of drawing. h. Persons interested in making drawings for commercial purposes — whether they have received previous training or not. c. Persons desiring specific training in the proportioning of drawings for reproduction. d. Those desiring to make carica- tures and cartoons. e. All persons desiring to express on paper ideas that cannot be described in words. Why Persons Should Enroll a. There are thousands of magazines published in this country and abroad that are illustrated in order to add interest to the text, and all these illus- trations are made from the drawings of 240 comparatively few people. Good illus- trators are always in demand and receive excellent pay for their services. Advertising firms carry large forces of illustrators to prepare sketches and finished drawings for advertising pur- poses. An employe in any branch of business can assist his employer greatly by making sketches for advertisements. b. The work is attractive and can be applied advantageously to nearly every vocation man may choose to follow. c. This Course of instruction will not only develop the student's inventive genius and originality, but will train him to apply it logically so the appli- cation will have a commerical value. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our xVrts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 241 These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and appli- cations in general illustrating with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowl- edge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subject of general illustrating, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items, classified and indexed, the stu- dent can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. 242 71 I 1st Bound ^'- ^ Volume Newspaper Illustrating Course Ten subjects are taught in the News- PAPER Illustrating Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Li- brary contain thirty-two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 1 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. . . 41 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions 4 Logarithms 20 5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 Examination Questions ... 44 Kevs 140 Tables 37 6 Geometrical Drawing 77 7 Freehand Drawing 84 8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 9 Perspective Drawing 39 10 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 1 1 Architectural Drawing ... 98 12 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 1 6 Rendering in Water Color . 54 17 Drawing From Nature ... 83 18 Drawing From Cast 66 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 82 20 Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions. . . 7. 21 Historic Ornament 293 22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 23 Practical Design 55 24 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 243 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- signing 25 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions. . . 18 5th Bound Volume Pages 2,369 Illustrations. 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note— Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. While the Course includes only the subjects in bold-face type in the chart and contained in the first three Bound Volumes, we furnish for refer- ence purposes two more Bound Volumes con- taining all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Newspaper Illustrating Course desiring instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- tion for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to make of people and of every-day objects sketches that can be worked up into finished illustrations for magazines and news- papers. 5. They will teach him to sketch freehand in perspective any piece of furniture or machinery, any building or group of buildings, or any other object. c. They will train him to make mechanically correct perspective draw- ings. d. They will enable him to render in pen-and-ink, wash, pencil, or crayon, drawings suitable for use in the various processes of photo reproduction. c. They will teach him to draw from nature, draperies, and the human figure, and to render the drawings suitable for newspaper use. Persons That Should Enroll All persons desiring to get a Course of training in quick rough sketching suit- able for publication in books, magazines, and newspapers. Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of all the principal branches of illustrating should enroll for the General Illustrating Course. The essential difference between newspaper illustrating and general illustrating lies more particularly in the difference between the quali- ties of the materials used in printing. Drawings have to be made to suit the paper on which they are printed and the ink used. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Newspaper illustrating within the last few years has developed more rapidly perhaps than any other branch of illustrating. The public demands that our newspapers shall illustrate, as well as print, the news. Good illus- trations increase the sales of a news- paper by adding interest and entertain- ment to its pages. A news illustrator is always sure of employment at good wages if when visiting the scene of an event he is able to sketch or photograph the surrounding details and then make a drawing that will give the readers of his paper a good idea of the scene. h. Good advertisement illustrators are always in demand, and receive good pay. As the sale of advertising space is a great source of income to publishers, 245 many of them employ professional illustrators to make designs for adver- tisers. The person that can invent and draw effective illustrations is sure to please customers. This means more business for his employer and more pay for himself; for the employer is quick to see the value of the work and is glad to show his appreciation on pay day. c. There are many lines of business to which illustrating relates. iVny per- son with a liking for drawing can be sure of finding work suited to his tastes after he has qualified himself for it. d. Any person of average intelligence studying our Course thoroughly and faithfully will have little difficulty in securing a good position in some branch of illustrating. e. That the pay of the newspaper illustrator is all that could be desired is shown by the fact that a number of illustrators doing work for the largest New York and Chicago newspapers earn from $75 to $100 a week. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 246 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and appli- cations in illustration and design with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quick- ly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subjects of illustration and design, and the details of these subjects are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible short- comings of the reader. Every impor- tant item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. They are the very best textbooks ever prepared for home study. 247 c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. 248 Architectural Rendering Course Twelve subjects are taught in the Architectural Rendering Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirty- two, as fol- lows : LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 Arithmetic 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. . . . 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions 4 Logarithms 5 Elementary Mechanics . . . Examination Questions . . . Ke vs Tables 6 Geometrical Drawing 7 Freehand Drawing 8 Elements of Perspective . . 9 Perspective Drawing 10 Historic Ornamental Drawing 11 Architectural Drawing. . . . 12 Advanced Architectural Drawing Examination Questions . . 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 16 Rendering in Water Color . 17 Drawing From Nature. . . . 18 Drawing From Cast 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 20 Drawing From the Figure Examination Questions . . . 21 Historic Ornament 22 Elements of Ornament . . . 23 Practical Design 24 Applied Design Examination Questions. . . 249 PAGES 121 41 71 20 64 44 140 37 77 84 71 39 83 98 77 2 82 17 7) 293 67 55 84 25 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- I 5tli Bound signing 25 | Volume 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions ... 18 Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subjects Nos. 1 and 12 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. The student of the Architectural Render- ing Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Architectural Render- ing Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- tion for .$10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to render from the architect's working drawings a perspective, in pen and ink or in water color, showing the building as it will appear when finished and in its surrounding landscape. b. They will train him to make for interiors perspective sketches archi- tecturally correct and attractively ren- dered in black and white or in colors. c. They will give him a clear knowl- edge of the architectural orders and their characteristics, and train him to make studies and detailed drav/ings of 250 the various parts of a building or of its whole exterior or interior appearance. d. They will train him to make colored bird's-eye views and perspec- tive sketches for proposed parks, private grounds, etc. e. They will enable him to render from photographs or other pictures, and in pen and ink or in water color, details for use either as illustrations or as accessories to his architectural perspectives. /. They will teach him to sketch freehand, and with rapidity and exact- ness, details of buildings, scenery, etc. for use in his architectural Avork. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons desiring a working knowl- edge of water-color rendering or pen- and-ink rendering for architectural, illustrative, or decorative purposes. b. Architects and Architectural Draftsmen wishing to know how to render in colors perspective views of proposed buildings. c. Salesmen and Representatives of Interior Decorating or Upholstery Firms, who would thus be qualified to sketch rapidly for a prospective cus- tomer a concise and convincing picture of the final appearance of the interior to be decorated. d. Landscape Gardners wishing to make preliminary sketches for gardens or layouts for parks or private grounds. e. Stained-Glass Window Designers. /. Interior Decorators. g. Sign Painters. h. Persons whose talent has been limited to natural ability to sketch in 251 pencil and that now desire to learn to sketch in water colors and in pen and ink. NoTE-^The Architectural Rendering Course is intended for persons wanting to study the artistic rather than the structural side of archi- tectural drawing. Persons desiring to become architectural draftsmen should enroll for the Architectural Drawing Course or the Architectural Drawing and Designing Course. Those wishing a full knowledge of architecture — the designing and construction of buildings, except steel-framed structures (which are treated of in our Structural Engineering Course) — should enroll for our Complete Architectural Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The architectural draftsman should be able to render, from the architect's working drawings, perspec- tives in pen and ink or in water color showing how the proposed building will look in its surroundings. Such a draftsman makes himself of greater value to his employer and receives cor- respondingly increased pay. As few persons can get from working drawings a clear idea of the final appearance of a building, the architect in submitting his plans is often required to furnish a water-color perspective shovv^ing the finished building and its surrounding landscape. Our Architectural Ren- dering Course will train the student to make such colored perspective views. h. Architectural rendering is a rap- idly advancing and a well-paying pro- fession. Artists that make a specialty of rendering and have a thorough training in such work can earn in their own studios from $10 to $25 a day and never be in want of orders. c. Our Architectural Rendering Course is thorough in every respect 252 and eminently practical. Following our plan of teaching, the student — unless he is already a draftsman — begins with simple drawings and is gradually enabled to produce work the attractiveness and accuracy of which will soon bring him commissions for perspective renderings. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. They treat fully and clearly of how to draw correctly proportioned perspec- tive views and how to color them attractively so as to impress and con- vince a possible client. b. They are an unequaled reference work. The principles and processes of architectural rendering are explained 253 so as to be easily understood even by the man of little education. They were prepared to meet the requirements of people that must get an education, if they get it at all, by means of home study and out of the presence of a teacher. By systematic study of the Bound Volumes the student can learn to render, in pen and ink or in water color, perspectives that will show the buildings finished and amid their surrounding landscapes. The Bound Volumes are so fully indexed, the stu- dent can find in an instant the descrip- tion of the processes of perspective drawing, the details of architectural orders, the methods of rendering, the details for interior or exterior decora- tions, and other valuable information in concrete form that nowhere else can be found with anything like so much ease as in the Bound Volumes. c. They contain text and illustra- tions treating of various fields of design, as well as of illustration and architectural drawing, all of which will greatly increase the student's general knowledge and culture and enlarge his scope of work. 254 1st Bound Volume Architectural Drawing Course Twelve subjects are taught in the Architectural Drawing Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Librar}'- contain thirty- two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Mensuration and Use of • Letters in Formulas. ... 41 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions 71 4 Logarithms 20 5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 Examination Questions ... 44 Kevs 140 Tables 37 6 Geometrical Drawing 77 7 Freehand Drawing 84 8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 9 Perspective Drawing 39 10 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 11 Architectural Drawing. ... 98 12 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 16 Rendering in Water Color 54 17 Drawing From Nature . . . 18 Drawing From Cast 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 20 Drawing From Figure. . . . Examination Questions. . . 21 Historic Ornament 22 Elements of Ornament . . . 23 Practical Design 55 24 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 255 83 66 82 17 7) 293 67 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume ?,F, LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES . 361 31 59 . 24 . 25 47 104 27 18. ?,(\ Distemper Color. . 27 28 29 30 31 3? Bookcover Designing Carpet Designing Oilcloth and Linoleum De signing Wallpaper Designing. . . . The American Vignola . . . . 5th Bound Volume Examination Questions. . Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. The student of the Architectural Drawing Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Architectural Drawing Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruction for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will train him. in the historic orders and their characteristics and the proper methods of detailing various parts of a building — qualifying him to fill the position of junior draftsman in an architect's office, where he will be required to carry out accurately the architect's directions in preparing pre- liminary colored elevations and detail- ing certain structural parts . b. They will instruct him in the ele- ments of architecture. He will thus be qualified to work more intelligently, even if in a minor position, and be of more value to his employer. 256 c. They will teach him to make shaded or colored sketches of an intended building or the details of its construction, and to make them intel- ligible and attractive to a person intend- ing to build and to whom working draw- ings would be meaningless. d. They will enable him to make of buildings, parts of buildings, or other architectural details, freehand sketches that can be used as memoranda for work to be done later; and they will teach him to put these memoranda into definite drawings correctly propor- tioned in perspective outline. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons feeling that they have artistic taste and ability, but not caring to do either decorative or illustrative work. h. Persons wanting to learn archi- tectural drawing and having a greater liking for the artistic than for the structural. c. Draftsmen and Tracers working in a mechanical way in architects' offices and realizing that in order to advance they must have a more intel- ligent understanding of their work. d. Architects and Architectural Draftsmen desiring to prepare pre- liminary sketches and colored eleva- tions and whose present knowledge includes the structural part of archi- tecture only. e. Stained-Glass Window Designers that are frequently called on to intro- duce into their designs architectural details or ornament in harmony with 9 257 the style of building tor which the glass is intended. Why Persons Should Enroll a. No branch of drawing has more practical value than that dealing with architecture. The young man that would become an architectural drafts- man has to choose between a college training — for which he may have neither time nor money — or a long apprenticeship in some archit^ect's office. As few architects have time or inclina- tion to play the part of teacher, the apprentice makes slow progress unless he gets outside help. Our Course furnishes the needed instruction and helps the student make rapid progress. h. Our Architectural Drawing Course is a boon not only to the apprentice, but to the self-supporting person ambitious of entering the archi- tectural field. To the apprentice our Course offers the means of rapid advancement; it fits in with his daily work and supplies just what he needs. To the outsider desiring to become an architectural draftsman, but unable to leave his present work before qualify- ing for the new, our Course opens the way to junior draftsmanship in an architect's office. Once in that position he can with our training perform _ his duties intelligently and forge rapidly ahead. c. After making plans and drawings for a building, the architect is often required to show how it will look in its surroundings. Our Course qualifies the student to make from the architect's 258 working drawings a perspective of the building, in pen and ink or in water color, showing the grass, trees, water, and other features of the landscape. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2^ years. The average student requires a little more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Complete Drawing Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. They give a clear and full treatment of architectural drawing. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They explain the subject of architectural drawing with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the pos- sible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They contain instruction in sub- jects other than architectural drawing. 259 This instruction will greatly enlar^ the student's scope. d. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of architectural drawing. 260 1st Bound Volume Perspective Drawing Course Seven subjects are taught in the Perspective Drawing Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirty-two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. .. . 41 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- tions 71 4 Logarithms 20 5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 Examination Questions. . . 44 Keys 140 Tables 37 6 Geometrical Drawing 77 7 Freehand Drawing 84 8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 9 Perspective Drawing 39 10 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 1 1 Architectural Drawing .... 98 12 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions ... 2 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 1 6 Rendering in Water Color . 54 17 Drawing From Nature. ... 83 18 Drawing From Cast 66 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 82 20 Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions. . . 7 21 Historic Ornament 293 22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 23 Practical Design 55 24 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 261 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- I 5th Bound signing 25 f Volume 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions. . . 18 Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Voltmies, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. The student of the Perspective Drawing Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Perspective Drawing Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the Schools of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- struction for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to take a set of plans from an architect's office and render therefrom an acctirate per- spective drawing, architecturally cor- rect, of the building as it will appear when finished. The ability to do this will place a higher value on the employe than were he to understand only sec- tional plans and working drawings. b. They will train him to draw and properly render details of sky, foliage, water, etc., which may be incorporated in his perspective sketches, thus making of them not only accurate drawings but artistic pictures. 262 c. They will train him to make per- spective views, whether for illustrative or for sectional diagrams, of any objects of which he already has the plans and measurements. d. They will give him the ability to sketch rapidly, freehand, details of buildings or landscapes to be used as memoranda for future Avork. Persons That Should Enroll a. Architects and Draftsmen familiar with only the structural part of archi- tectural drafting, and to whom the ability to make perspective pictures of the proposed building would mean increased business or higher wages. h. Portrait and Landscape Painters desiring to render accurately the per- spective of any backgrounds or dis- tances that they wish to include in their pictures. c. Scene Painters. d. Lithograph Designers. e. Stained-Glass Window Designers. /. Glass Painters. g. Landscape Gardeners. h. Interior Decorators. Note — The Perspective Drawing Course is a comprehensive Course in the elements of perspective drawing; it is intended to teach the student the essentials of correct drawing and especially the art of drawing objects, buildings, etc. in perspective. A perspective drawing is a drawing showing an object just as it appears to the eye. A good photograph is a perfect perspective representation. Our Perspective Drawing Course is of great value not only to the architectural draftsman, but also to the mechanical draftsman, artist, interior decorator, and any one to whom the ability to make per- spective sketches of proposed constructions would mean increased business and profit. 263 Why Persons Should Enroll a. Owing to the fact that their duties have mainly to do with working drawings only, comparatively few drafts- men clearly understand the principles of perspective. And it is impossible for a draftsman to make an accurate perspective unless he has a thorough knowledge of the principles governing the direction of lines and their vanish- ing points. Ability to make correct perspective drawings will increase the worth of a' draftsman to his employer. b. A knowledge of perspective draw- ing is absolutely necessary if the draftsman is to place himself at the head of his profession. c. Working drawings, made for the guidance of the builder, are to the average property holder but a con- fusion of lines and figures. Hence there is the demand for perspective drawings to show the owner how his structure will look amid its surround- ings. Of course a draftsman that can make accurate perspective drawings from ground plans and sectional eleva- tions has an advantage that assures steady employment and commands a higher salary than he could otherwise obtain. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 264 Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our x\rts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. They constitute a valuable treatise on the principles of perspective drawing, and furnish information indispensable to every one requiring a knowledge of this subject. They excel in concise- ness of statement and clearness of expla- nation; and for practicability they are unequaled. b. They possess great value as reference books. They begin with thorough instruction in the elements and the principles of perspective and gradually lead the student into the more complicated work of drawing perspective views of houses, etc. with all their elaborate details. The student by systematic and diligent study of the Bound Volumes can familiarize himself with the practical work of perspective drawing as carried on in architects' offices; he can learn to make, from ground plans and sectional elevations, perspectives that will not only be correct in their measurements, but will also show how the buildings will look when finished. 265 c. They are free frora ambiguous expressions, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The Bound Volumes are easily understood by the man of little education. They are so fully indexed, any subject can be found in an instant. d. They contain text and illustra- tions of various 'fields of design, as well as illustration and architectural draw- ing, all of which will greatly increase the student's general knowledge and enlarge his scope of work. 206 General Design Course Ten subjects are taught in the Gen- eral Design Course. The Bound Vol- umes of the Reference Library contain thirty-two, as follows: 10 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 121 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric F u n c - tions Logarithms Elementary Mechanics. . . Examination Questions. . Keys 41 71 20 64 44 140 Tables 37 Geometrical Drawing 77 Freehand Drawing 84 Elements of Perspective. . 71 Perspective Drawing 39 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 Architectural Drawing ... 98 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions . . 2 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 Rendering with Pen and Brush 50 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 Rendering in Water Color 54 Drawing From Nature ... 83 Drawing From Cast 66 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 82 Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions . . 7 Historic Ornament 293 Elements of Ornament. .. . 67 Practical Design 55 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 267 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- signing 25 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmon3^ 27 Examination Questions. . . 18 5th Bound Volume Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the sulDJects in light- face type. The student of the General Design Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- taining all the Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the General Design Course desiring to pursue some specific branch not taught in this Course will — after he has finished the subjects taught in the General Design Course — be given special instruction in the desired branch by means of personal letters from the Principal of the School of Arts and Crafts. "What the Details of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will train him in the ele- m.ents of both geometrical and mechan- ical drawing and the construction of geometrical combinations. b. They will enable him to make freehand sketches of any objects for the purpose of illustrating an idea or ma- king a memorandumx of some design. c They will teach him to lay out with brush, pen, or pencil, designs suit- able for reproduction by any of the standard methods used by manufac- turers, publishers, and lithographers. 268 d. They will enable him to under- stand, appreciate, and execute, when necessary, ornamental designs in his- toric style according to principles recog- nized as characteristic of historic periods. e. They will teach him how to intro- duce details of mechanical, architec- tural, or artistic character into any style of design for any particular pur- pose that may be desired. Persons That Should Enroll a. Wood Carvers. h. Furniture Makers. c. Cabinet Makers. d. Ornamental Iron Workers. e. Designers of gas fixtures and elec- tric fixtures. /. Lace Designers. g. Designers of dress goods, damask linens, etc. h. Jewelry Designers. i. China Decorators. j. Artists. k. Clerks in the upholstery, hanging, and dress-goods departments of stores. I. Designers of mosaic or other tiled floors. m. Stained-Glass and Leaded-Glass Workers. Note — The underlying principles that govern the designing of a lace pattern are the same as those that govern the designing of a wallpaper or a bookcover — the only difference being in the application of these principles to some partictdar material and purpose. The General Design Course teaches these principles thoroughly; it is a broad, general treatise on the subject of ornamental design, without particular reference to any of the applied arts, such as wallpaper designing, bookcover designing, etc. The Gen- eral Design Course should be studied by all persons wishing a knowledge applicable to any branch of designing; it is best for those undecided 269 as to what special line of designing they prefer. A specialty may be chosen after the student has learned the underlying principles; besides, he will then be in a better position to know what work appeals most to his tastes. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Designing, from a money-making standpoint, is attractive work. There are many lines of business in which the earning power of an employe is greatly increased if he understands designing. Besides, designing is a recreation as well as a distinct accomplishment. Persons having spare time and desir- ing to use it in work that is pleasant, profitable, and of a refined nature, can- not make a better investment than to enroll for our General Design Course. Designing can be done at home and the work may be sold by mailing it to possible purchasers. Many firms that purchase designs deal altogether with independent designers, finding that in this way they get better work and a greater variety of ideas than they would by employing designers to work for them exclusively. b. The range of subjects to which designing relates is so wide that there is no danger that the market will ever be flooded with acceptable work. In fact it is often difficult to find persons able to prepare good designs for special purposes. Simple designs not requir- ing more than a few hours' work bring from $5 to $10, while larger and more elaborate drawings bring proportionate prices. c. There is a great demand for appro- priate designs to be used in connection with programs, menus, monograms, 270 initial letters for books and magazines, college pins, etc. A good design finds a ready market and a high price, and paves the way for future business rela- tions between the designer and the buyer. d. Our instruction will develop the student's invention and encourage his originality and individuality; these are two important qualifications in design- ing and count for much in commercial work. e. Manufacturing concerns whose products are marketed in packages or cans realize the value of a striking label design, and pay well for one that will assist in selling the goods. /. Women engaged in art needle- work will find the instruction contained in our General Design Course of great practical value ; it will enable them to create new and attractive designs for embroidery, lace work, etc. — designs that Avill bring a much higher price than the old stereotyped patterns. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 271 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and appli- cations in ornamental design with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epit- ome of common-sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; and for prac- ticability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subject of ornamental design, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the stu- dent can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. They are the very best textbooks ever prepared for home study. 272 c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theor}^ and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts and processes used in the best ornamental design practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 273 1st Bound Volume Carpet Design Course Eleven subjects are taught in the Carpet Design Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain thirty- two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 1 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas 41 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric F u n c - tions 71 4 Logarithms 20 5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 Examination Questions ... 44 Keys 140 Tables 37 6 Geometrical Drawing 77 7 Freehand Drawing 84 8 Elements of Perspective 71 9 Perspective Drawing 39 10 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 11 Architectural Drawing ... 98 1 2 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 ^ 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 16 Rendering in Water Color 54 17 Drawing From Nattire ... 83 18 Drawing From Cast 66 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 82 20 Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions. . . 7 21 Historic Ornament 293 22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 23 Practical Design 55 24 Applied Design. 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 274 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Botind Designing 25 | Volume 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions. . . 18 Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. The student of the Carpet Design Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- taining the text of all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Carpet Design Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruction for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to make carpet designs artistic and technically correct from the manufacturer's stand- point. Such designs are always salable. b. They will train him in the study of plant form and the conventionaliza- tion of various parts of flowers and leaves for use in carpet designs. c. They will give him a working knowledge of color harmony and color matching and a training in the mix- ing and using of distemper color, the medium in which carpet designs are rendered. 275 d. They will give him a knowledge of the principles of general design, ena- bling him to make designs for programs, menu cards, calendars, monograms, school and college pins, etc. in addi- tion to his carpet designing. e. They will teach him to under- stand and use intelligently ornament or details of an 57 historic style. /. They will enable him to make free- hand sketches for the purpose of illus- trating an idea or making a memoran- dum for future use in designs. g. They will train him in the geo- metrical shapes and combinations used as methods of repeats in carpet designs. h. They will give him a history and a description of the best grades of rugs and carpets and their processes of weaving. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons whose early attempts at drawing and whose present tastes show a trend towards picture or designs con- taining groups of flowers, leaves, trees, etc. h. Persons liking color work, but having no desire to do illustrating of any kind. c. Employes in carpet factories and in upholstery and drapery depart- ments. d. Carpet and Rug Salesmen desir- ing to understand more thoroughly the goods they sell. e. Interior Decorators. /. Painters. g. General Designers having a knowl- edge of ornamental forms and deco- rations and desiring a knowledge of 276 \ie technical requirements for carpet bsigns. Note — The Carpet Design Course is the ENERAL Design Course with the instruction [ carpet designing added. The General iESiGN Course is a broad, general treatise on -namental design, without particular reference ) anv branch of applied design; it lays a good mndation for the practice of any line of artistic tx^ionino- Persons undecided as to what special ne'of desisming they prefer should enroll for the ENERAL Design Course. A specialty may be losen after the student has learned the under- nncr principles; besides, he will then be m a ett'er position to know what work appeals most ) his taste. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The demand for new designs for Loor coverings of every Mnd is con- tantly increasing. Improved machm- ry and the introduction of new fabrics .nd styles of weaving have resulted ^ the production of beautiful designs n even the cheaper grades of carpets md rugs. Carpet designing is one of ,he best fields of work !or the orna- nental designer. b. Every carpet manufacturer con- stantly strives to produce more salable ioor coverings and to give better ^-alue than his competitors in quality 3,nd appearance. But in order to do this he must secure better designs than other manufacturers. A good design consequently finds a ready market and a high price, and paves the way for future business relations between the designer and the buyer. Carpet manu- facturers will at almost any time buy a design embodying taste, skill, and style. c. The finest carpets and rugs come from oriental countries, and the maker 277 of new designs is required to instil into his work the feeHng and color effects that have made the oriental fabrics famous. The designer must therefore be familiar with all the devices and methods used by the modern weaver in causing his loom to reproduce mechan- ically the characteristics of the oriental; hand work. To do this, the designer must know how to study rugs and carpets, as well as understand their design. d. Our Carpet Design Course has been prepared by a practical designer thoroughly familiar with the theoretical side of the subject. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of: studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little; raore time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our; Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays ex- press charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course 278 nd give a full and clear treatment of arpet designing. , , , , b They are invaluable for reference purposes. They explain the details of arpet designing with thoughtful care nd a proper regard for the possible hortcomings of the reader. Every mportant item is indexed accordmg to 11 the initial letters under which it is ikely to be sought. Indeed, so care- ully are all items classified and indexed, he student can find in a moment the iescription of any method of rendering )r process of weaving, or any other ietail that it would ordinarily require lOurs or even days to find elsewhere, if it could be found at all. 1 c They contain excellent full-page colored reproductions of many oriental ruc^s and carpets. The designer is thus furnished with high-class motifs for his own designs. i d They contain text and illustra- tions treating of other fields of design Ls well as illustration and architectural drawino- all of which will increase the student's general knowledge and enlarge his scope of work. 279 Wallpaper Design Course Eleven subjects are taught in the Wallpaper Design Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Li brary contain thirty- two, as follows: 10 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 41 71 20 64 44 140 IIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 121 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric F u n c - tions Logarithms Elementary Mechanics . . . Examination Questions . . . Keys Tables 37 Geometrical Drawing. . . . . 77 Freehand Drawing 84 Elements of Perspective. 71 Perspective Drawing 39 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 Architectural Drawing ... 98 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 Rendering in Water Color 54 Drawing From Nature ... 83 Drawing From Cast 66 Elements of Figure Draw- Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions. . . 7 Historic Ornament 293 Elements of Ornament ... 67 Practical Design 55 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . . 25 280 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Plant Analysis 36 Distemper Color 31 Bookcover Designing 59 Carpet Designing 24 Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Bound Designing -. . . . 25 | Volume Wallpaper Designing 47 1 The American Vignola . . . 104 2 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions . . 18 Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes. 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No ecitations are asked for in the subjects in light- ace type. The student of the Wallpaper Design JouRSE is furnished with the five Bound Vol- umes containing the text of all our Arts and Drafts Courses. The student of the Wallpaper Design Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- struction for SIO a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish for the Student a. They will enable him to make wallpaper designs artistic and tech- nically correct from the manufacturer's standpoint. Such designs are always salable. b. They will train him in the study of plant form and the conventionaliza- tion of the various parts of flowers and leaves for use in wallpaper designs. c. They will give him a working knowledge of color harmony and color matching and a training in the mix- ing and using of distemper color, the medium in which wallpapers are rendered. 281 d. They will give him a knowledg(, of the principles of general design; enabling him to make designs fo,' menu cards, monograms, trade marks, initial letters, etc. in addition to hii: wallpaper designing. e. They will teach him to understanc' and use intelhgently ornament or details of any historic style. /. They will enable him to make freehand sketches for the purpose o:' illustrating an idea or making a memo- randum for future use in designs. g. _ They will train him in the geo-' metrical shapes and combinations usee as methods of repeats in wallpaper, designs. _ h. They will give him clear descrip- tions and illustrations of the best wall- papers of this and other countries. The student is thus furnished with a high standard to work to. Persons That Should Enroll a. _ Persons whose early attempts at! drawing and whose present tastes show! a trend toward pictures or designs con- taining groups of flowers, leaves, trees,,' etc. h. Persons liking color work, but' having no desire to do illustrating of any kind. c. Employes in wallpaper factories! and upholstery and drapery depart- ments. d. Wallpaper Hangers. e. Interior Decorators. /. Painters. g. General Designers having a knowl- edge of ornamental forms and decora-, tions and desiring a knowledge of the 282 :hnical requirements for wall-paper ^^^^Artists whose illustration work :asionally includes interiors of rooms Dmng wall surface and drapenes that ist be historically correct. sfoTE— The Wallpaper Design Course is the NER^L Design Course with the instruction walipaper designing added. The General sTgx Course is a broad, genera treatise on famental design, without particular reference i am branch of apphed design; it lays a good Imdation for the practice of any line of artistic ! ?gning. Persons undecided as to what special e of disigning they prefer should enroll for the cneral Design Course A specialty may be osen after the student^as learned the under^ ng principles of designing; besides, he will then in a better position to know what work pealslmost to his taste. Why Persons Should Enroll a Wallpaper design is one of the ost attractive and profitable branches - ornamental design. The competition fnong wallpaper manufacturers is een and those that can furnish the lost popular designs at reasonable rices naturally secure the greatest com- lercial advantages. Wallpaper manu- icturers are constantly on the lookout Dr practical and original designs. b The wallpaper designer must not Inly be familiar with the various nethods of manufacture, but he naust omprehend thoroughly the hmitations mposed by the character of the machm- iry used and the methods of its opera- iion He must understand the theory 3f plant analysis and its practical appli- cation in design, and also the handling )f distemper color, so as to obtain the Dest results at the smallest expense m -nanufacture. Our Wallpaper Design 283 Course is thorough. The Hmitatioi- ot wallpaper-prmting machines and tl: manufacturer's requirements, from hot the technical and the artistic sides ai clearly explained. The demands ( popular taste and the varying cond tions of locaHty and season are full treated. The student is well prepare to make salable designs. c. The salary of an expert wallpape designer is dependent on the wor he produces. Designers working inde pendently receive an average of froii $30 to $40 for good designs. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu dent's concentrative powers, his plan o studying, and the time he gives. Some studying 2 hours a day for 6 days j week, finish the Course in about 1 year The average student requires a littl< more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with ouJi Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express cnarges. = Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Kevs of the Course, and give a full and clear treatment of wall-paper designing. 284 b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They explain the details of jwallpaper designing with thoughtful tare and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the description of the proper methods of rendering and the processes of print- ing, and any other details that it would ordinarily take hours to find elsewhere, if they could be found at all. c. They contain excellent illustra- tions of the best grade of wallpapers. These illustrations cultivate the stu- dent's taste and give him, as motifs for his own designs, arrangements of ornament that are correct in artistic style and technically suited to wall decoration. d. They contain text and illustra- tions treating of other fields of design, as well as of illustration and architec- tural drawing, all of which will increase the student's general knowledge and culture and enlarge his scope of work. 285 Linoleum Design Course Eleven subjects are taught in the Linoleum Design Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain thirty-two, as follows: 13 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 1211 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formiilas .... 41 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric F u n c - tions 71 Logarithms . Elementary Mechanics . Examination Questions. Keys Tables 20 64 44 140 37 Geometrical Drawing 77 Freehand Drawing ....... 84 Elements of Perspective. . 71 Perspective Drawing 39 Historic Ornamental Drawing 83 Architectural Drawing ... 98 Advanced Architectural Drawing _ 77 Examination Questions. . . 2 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 Rendering With Pen and Brush Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 Rendering in Water Color 54 Drawing From Nature . . Drawing From Cast Elements of Figure Draw- ing Drawing From the Figure Examination Questions . . . Historic Ornament Elements of Ornament . . . Practical Design 55 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions . . 25 286 1st Bound Volume 50 83 66 82 17 7J 293 67 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 15 Plant Analysis 36^ }6 Distemper Color 31 §7 Bookcover Designing 59 S8 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Bound Designing 25 ( Volume JO Wallpaper Designing 47 51 The American Vignola ... 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions. . . 18 Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face tvpe. ^ _ The student of the Linoleum Design Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- taining all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the Linoleum Design Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruction for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish to the Student a. They will show him how linoleum is printed and teach him to make designs that the manufacturer can carry out without alteration. b. They will train him in the study of plant analysis and the conventionaH- zation of the various parts of flowers and leaves for use in linoleum designs. c. They will give him instruction in the elements of both geometrical and mechanical drawing and the construc- tion of geometrical combinations, which are the basis of all good linoleum designs. d. They will train him to make free- hand sketches of any object for the 287 purpose of illustrating an idea or ma-i king a memorandura for future use in' his designs. e. They will instruct him in what he should know about popular tastes at various times and seasons, the different requirements of various manufacturers, and how best to prepare and present his ' designs to a manufacturer. This knowl- 1 edge is indispensable to the student in-j- tending to make oilcloth and linoleum' designing his life work. He must have it to make salable designs. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons whose early sketches show a talent for designing, but whose tastes run toward the more strictly geometrical and mechanical shapes : rather than the foliated ornament, such as seen in wallpaper designs, etc. h. Persons already making linoleum designs and having worked up through the trade without any special artistic training. c. Designers of hardwood floors or mosaic tiling. d. Oilcloth Makers or Mosaic Tile Workers knowing the manufacturing side of the industry but lacking artistic training. Note — The Linoleum Design Course is the General Design Course with the instruction in oilcloth and linoleum designing added. The General Design Course is a broad, general treatise on ornamental design, without particular reference to any branch of applied design; it lays a good foundation for the practice of any line of artistic designing. Persons undecided as to what special line of designing they prefer should enroll for the General Design Course. A specialty may be chosen after the student has learned the underlying principles of designing; besides, he will then be in a better position to know what work appeals most to his taste. 288 Why Persons Should Enroll a. New and striking designs are leeded every season for the thousands )f patterns of oilcloth and linoleum nanufactured. Expensive linoleums ire now manufactured in large varieties md there is need for skill in preparing iesigns. Original ideas correctly ren- |iered are always in demand; and as |ood prices are paid, the student will md this branch of design both pleasant md profitable. 6. Few linoleum designers work as salaried employes. Manufacturers buy ;heir designs from outside sources and Da}^ liberal prices. With our help the ptudent can learn to invent salable iesigns. There are many that earn arge incomes as independent designers. c. To be successful the linoleum de- signer must have a thorough knowledge )f geometrical ornament and the laws )f contrast in light and shade and color. Se must also have a clear understand- ng of the limitations of design and the Drocesses of manufacture, in all of which horough instruction is given in our bourse. d. The instruction contained in our Linoleum Design Course is of great v^alue to those engaged in making par- quetry or mosaic designs. The prin- nples of design are the same; and the iesigner knowing them has only to sxpress his own individuality in using them and then adapt his design to the biaterial. In fact, we guide the stu- ient through all the subjects in which fie rnust be skilled in order to be a suc- iiessful oilcloth and linoleum designer. 10 289 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu-- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of i studying, and the time he gives. Some, , studying 2 hours a day for 6 days aa week, finish the Course in about 1 year. , The average student requires a little e more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays expresSi. charges. • Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course, and give a clear and concise treatment i of oilcloth and linoleum design. b. They are invaluable for reference e purposes. They explain the details off oilcloth and linoleum design withb thoughtful care and a proper regard fori the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed accord- ing to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the description of the proper methods of rendering and the processes of printing, or any other details it would ordinarily take hours to find elsewhere, if they could be found at all. 290 c. They contain excellent illustra- tions of oilcloth and linoleum patterns now in vogue. These illustrations give the student a good idea of what is being asked for by the public, upon which point he must be well informed in order to make designs that will sell. d. They contain text and illustra- tions treating of other fields of design, as well as of illustration and architec- tural drawing, all of which w411 increase the student's general knowledge and enlarge his scope of work. 291 Bookcover Design Course Eleven subjects are taught in the Bookcover Design Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirty- two, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 121 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... 41 3 Elementary Algebra and Trigonometric Func- I 1st Bound tions 71 I Volume 4 Logarithms 20 5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 Examination Questions. . . 44 Keys 140. 6 Geometrical Drawing 77 7 Freehand Drawing 84 8 Elements of Perspective .. 71 9 Perspective Drawing 39 10 Historic Ornamental I 2d Bound Drawing 83 f Volume 1 1 Architectural Drawing ... 98 12 Advanced Architectural Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 2. 13 Elements of Pen-and-ink Rendering 66 14 Rendering With Pen and Brush 50 15 Elements of Water-Color Rendering 23 16 Rendering in Water Color 54 17 Drawing From Nature ... 83 18 Drawing From Cast 66 19 Elements of Figure Draw- ing 82 20 Drawing From the Figure 17 Examination Questions. . . 7, 21 Historic Ornament 293 22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 23 Practical Design 55 24 Applied Design 84 Examination Questions. . 25 292 3d Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGEf 25 Plant Analysis 36 26 Distemper Color 31 27 Bookcover Designing 59 28 Carpet Designing 24 29 Oilcloth _ and Linoleum I 5th Bound Designing 25 i Volume 30 Wallpaper Designing 47 31 The American Vignola . . . 104 32 Color Harmony 27 Examination Questions. . . 18. Pages 2,369 Illustrations, 1,378 Drawing Plates, 87 Instruction Papers, 37 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- face type. The student of the Bookcover Design Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. The student of the _ Bookcover Design Course wanting instruction in any subject or subjects included in any other Course in the School of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- struction for $10 a subject. What the Points of Information Con- tained in These Instruction Papers Will Accomplish to the Student a. They will train him to prepare bookcover designs technically correct from the manufacturer's standpoint and at the same time artistic and attractive. Such designs are always salable. b. They will instruct him in plant analysis and the conventionalizing of flower and leaf forms for application to bookcover designs. c. They will give him instruction in color harmony and color matching, enabling him to discriminate between good and bad color schemes and to prepare successful schemes of his own. They will teach him the mixing and 293 using of distemper color and give him a knowledge of other mediums (pen- and-ink, wash, water color, etc.) in which bookcover designs are sometimes rendered. d. They will so train him in historic styles of bookbinding and bookcover designing that he will not only have the best work of former times for motifs but will be enabled to prepare designs historically correct. e. They will enable him to make freehand sketches for the purpose of illustrating an idea or making a memo- randum for future use in his designs. /. They will train him in the geo- metrical shapes and combinations used as the basis of symmetrical repeats in bookcover designs. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons having a liking for draw- ing and whose early sketches consisted of symmetrical flower groups, cartouches, shields, decorative ribbons, etc. b. Persons whose tastes run toward decorative effects, bold and striking color schemes, and so-called "poster" designs. (Persons attracted by good bookcovers or magazine covers on the news stands are of this class.) c. General Designers having artistic training and desiring to know how a design for a bookcover or a magazine cover must be prepared in order to be technically correct for the publisher and at the same time artistic and attractive enough to be salable. d. Bookbinders and Workers in pub- lishing houses desiring to design book- covers but lacking the artistic training. 294 c. Wallpaper Designers, Carpet De- signers, Stained-Glass Window Design- ers, etc. having the technical and artistic training in their own work but desiring a knowledge of the technical require- ments of bookcover design. Note — The Bookcover Design Course is the Gener.\l Design Course with the instruction in bookcover designing added. The General Design Course is a broad, general treatise on ornamental design, without particular reference to any branch of applied design; it lays a good foundation for the practice of any line of artistic designing. Persons undecided as to what special line of designing they prefer should enroll for the General Design Course. A specialty may be chosen after the student has learned the under- lying principles of designing; besides, he will then be in a better position to know what work appeals most to his taste. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The practical bookcover designer must be familiar with the materials and the methods used in bookcover. manufacture. He must be able to decide the number of dies advisable to use and the relative importance of the cover design to the contents. He must know how to approach the publisher to get his ideas, and how to estimate the cost of reproduction. These things are thoroughly explained in our Course. b. Every first-class book or magazine has a specially designed cover, the character of which may influence the sale of the book. Once a designer has demonstrated his ability to originate good cover designs, he will not lack opportunities to place his work before the public. A design of the simplest character brings from So to $10, and a design of the best class sells for from $50 to $75. 295 c. The BooKcovER Design Course teaches the student the practical require- ments of bookcover design. It gives him instruction in the history and the development of bookbinding, the effect of the old methods of binding, the evolution of machine-bound books, and the details of modem binding. In addition, the designs of old French and Italian binders are illustrated and described, and details peculiar to differ- ent countries or styles are pointed out. This valuable instruction is followed by a treatise on the principles of artistic bookcover design and the modem meth- ods of hand tooling and machine print- ing. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of . studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- tion Questions, and Keys of the Course, 296 and give a clear, full, and practical treat- ment of bookcover design. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They explain the details of bookcover design with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- fully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the description of the methods of render- ing and the processes of hand tooling and machine printing, or any other details that it would ordinarily take hours or even days to find elsewhere. c. They contain text and illustra- tions treating of other fields of design, as well as of illustration and archi- tectural drawing, all of which will increase the student's general knowl- edge and culture and enlarge his scope of work. 297 Complete Plumbing and Heat- ing Course PAGES LIST OF SUBJECTS Arithmetic 122 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas. . . . Principles of Mechanics. . . Hydromechanics Pneumatics Strength of Materials .... Elementarj^ Chemistry . . . Contracts Geometrical Drawing Principles of Mechanical Drawing Plumbing and Heating Drawing Reading Architects' Draw- ings 20 Examination Questions . . . 33 Keys 75 Tables, 10 J 48] 1r! 14 Gas Supply and Distribu- tion 71 15 Domestic Uses of Gas. . . . 82 16 Plumbing Materials and Tools 89 17 Soldering and Wiping .... 61 \ IS Lead Work 49 30 19 Pipework 20 Washing and Drinking Fixtures 59 21 Baths and Urinals 39 Examination Questions. . . 25 Keys 31 00, Water Closets 581 71 0-3, House Drains 24 Soil, Waste, and Vent Stacks 67 '?5 Traps and Vents 40 26 Drainage and Sewerage . . 56 27 Sewage Disposal 30 28 Sources of Water Supply. 53 t 39 r 71 9q Water Filtration 30 Cold-Water Supply 31 Hot-Water Supply 54 32 Plumbing Inspection .... 39 33 Plumbing Plans and Speci- fications 36 Examination Questions . . . 27 Keys 29 298 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Pipes and Fittings 59^ Steam-Fitting Accessor- ies 51 Radiators and Coils 72 Heating and Power Boil- 4th Bound ers 63 63 Boiler Fittings Volume Principles of Heating. . . . 81 Principles of Ventilation .. 122 Examination Questions. . . 17 Keys 20 J Steam Generation 66 ^ Pipe-Fitting Tools 53 Pipe-Fitting Practice 145 Steam-Heating Pipe Sys- tems 100 Exhaust and Vacuum Sys- tems 51 . 5th Bound Hot-Water Heating Sys- Volume tems 74 Hot-Water Heating Appa- ratus 26 Central-Station Heating. . 61 Examination Questions. . . 23 Keys 26 Hot-Air Heating 126 Blower Systems of Heat- ing 156 Drying and Cooking by Steam 45 Engine-Room Equipment 55 ^ 6th Bound High-Pressure Pipe Fit- Volume ting 43 Heating Plans and Speci- fications 66 Examination Questions. . . 22 Keys 28 Pages 3,651 Illustrations, 1,994 Instruction Papers, 69 Drawing Plates, 14 Bound Volumes, 6 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They teach the fundamental principles of sanitary plumbing, heat- ing, and ventilation. b. They teach workshop practice. 299 c. They explain the arrangement of baths, wash basins, water closets, sinks, and laundry tubs. d. They contain instruction in cop- per bit work, joint wiping, lead burning, brazing, sheet-lead work, and pipe fitting. e. They will enable plumbers and fitters to understand architects' plans and specifications. /. They show how to do gas-fitting. g. They describe various systems of sewage disposal — including the Durham, or wrought-iron, system. h. They explain how plumbing and heating contractors can make and per- form contracts; estimate accurately on work; prepare plans for filing with the Board of Health or the Bureau of Buildings; make working drawings; superintend plumbing and heating work ; and keep records of both time and mate- rials. The Instruction Papers give the information the student must have to become a successful plumbing and heating contractor or engineer. Persons That Should Enroll a. Sanitary Engineers. h. Heating and Ventilating Engi- neers. c. Plumbing Inspectors. d. Master Plumbers. e. Journeymen Plumbers, Appren- tices, and Helpers. /. Steam Fitters and Steam-Fitters' Helpers. g. Gas-Fitters and Gas-Fitters' Helpers. h. Furnacemen, Tinners, and Sheet- Metal Workers. 300 i. Hardware-Store Employes. j. Salesmen of supplies pertaining to sanitary plumbing, heating, and ventilation. k. Architects and Builders. /, Building Superintendents. m. Persons whose work requires a knowledge of the layingout and the installing of plumbing, heating, and ventilation systems. Remarks In all large cities where unions exist, and where the plumbers do not work at steam fitting, nor steam fitters at plumb- ing, the Courses subordinate to the Complete Plumbing and Heating Course may be preferred by those engaged in the respective branches of work. These Courses are the Complete Plumbing Course; the Complete Heating Course; the Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course; the Steam Fitters' Course; the Short Plumbing Course ; and the Plumbing Inspectors' Course. After finishing Mechanics, the student may take up either the plumbing sec- tion, the heating section, or the steam- fitting section of the Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The plumbing, heating, and ven- tilating trades are advancing so rapidly that the man engaged in them must keep abreast of the times, or fall behind to give place to a workman more con- versant with the science of his work. b. That the plumbing of buildings shall in every possible way conduce to 301 good health, is required by common sense and demanded by the authorities. The proper work can be done by only those workmen that thoroughly under- stand the requirements and know the best methods of fulfilling them. In cities, plumbers are compelled to pass examinations before properly consti- tuted boards of examiners. Men that cannot pass the examinations and thereby become registered by a Board of Health, must either work as helpers at reduced pay, or get out of the busi- ness. All plumbers' apprentices should therefore take our Course. c. The heating of dwelling houses, public halls, etc. — which has only in late years begun to receive due atten- tion — has been developed into a nice art. Success never comes from guess- work in planning a heating system. The man that would succeed as an expert in heating must understand the theory of combustion, steam-making, condensation, hot- water circulation, convection and radiation of heat, etc. d. People are becoming more and more convinced that the ventilation of a building is a matter of first importance. Along certain lines there may be con- tention as to what are or are not laws of health; but on this one point all are agreed: pure air is vitally essential. Every building should have its ducts and flues to secure in the various rooms a sufficient influx and circula- tion of fresh air, as well as a proper escape of foul air. Considerable skill is necessary to meet these requirements. The man knowing the principles of air circulation is the man that can do the 302 best work and therefore demand the best salary. c. The trade of gas-fitting is one of the most important relative to Hghting and heating. To locate burners, deter- mine what are the best fixtures and burners for each location, and install a first-class system of piping in a house, requires a fund of good judgment and technical skill. What is more annoying than leaky joints and wabbly fixtures? Who is more unwelcome in a home than the workman that leaves them? Who has greater difficulty in obtaining employment and gets less pay for his services? Our Course contains full instruction in gas-fitting; it describes the best practice and quickly teaches the student how to do fitting in a workmanlike manner. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Complete Plumb- ing AND Heating Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an . outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. 303 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applica- tions in sanitary plumbing, heating, and ventilation with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common- sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their sub- jects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subjects of sanitary plumb- ing, heating, and ventilation, and the details of these subjects are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. 304 c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and processes used in the best sanitary plumbing, heating, and ventilation practice in the country are here collected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 305 Complete Plumbing Course Complete Heating Course Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course Steam Fitters' Course Short Plumbing Course Plumbing Inspectors' Course These Courses are made up from the Complete Plumbing and Heating Course, which contains the following subjects: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 122" 2 Mensuration and Use of Letters in Formulas .... 42 3 Principles of Mechanics. . 43 4 Hydromechanics 50 5 Pneumatics 26 6 Strength of Materials 25 7 Elementary Chemistry ... 75 8 Contracts 37 9 Geometrical Drawing 77 10 Principles of Mechanical Drawing 29 11 Plumbing and Heating Drawing 19 12 Reading Architects' Draw- 20 ings 20 Examination Questions ... 33 Keys 75 Tables 10 13 Gas Making .. 48 14 Gas Supply and Distribu- tion 71 15 Domestic Uses of Gas. ... 82 16 Plumbing Materials and Tools 89 17 Soldering and Wiping. ... 61 I 2d Bound 18 Lead Work 49 f Volume 19 Pipework ... 30 20 Washing and Drinking Fixtures 59 21 Baths and Urinals. 39 Examination Questions ... 25 Keys 31 J 306 1st Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS Vent Water Closets House Drains Soil, Waste, and Stacks Traps and Vents Drainage and Sewerage. . . Sewage Disposal Sources of Water Supply. . Water Filtration Cold- Water Supply Hot- Water Supply Plumbing Inspection Plumbing Plans and Speci- fications Examination Questions. . . Keys Pipes and Fittings Steam-Fitting Accessories Radiators and Coils Heating and Power Boilers Boiler Fittings _ Principles of Heating Principles of Ventilation . Examination Questions. . . Keys Steam Generation 66 Pipe-Fitting Tools 53 Pipe-Fitting Practice 145 Steam-Heating Pipe Sys- tems 100 Exhaust and Vacuum Sys- tems 51 Hot-Water Heating Sys- tems 74 Hot-Water Heating Apparatus 26 Central-Station Heating. . 61 Examination Questions ... 23 Keys 26 Hot- Air Heating 126' Blower Systems of Heating 156 Drying and Cooking by Steam 45 Engine-Room Equipment 55 High-Pressure Pipe Fitting 43 Heating Plans and Speci- fications 66 Examination Questions. . . 22 Keys 28 58 71 67 40 56 30 53 39 71 54 39 36 27 29 59 51 72 63 63 81 122 17 20 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume Pages . .3 651 307 Illustrations, 1,994 Instruction Papers, 69 Drawing Plates, 14 Bound Volumes, 6 Note — Three Bound Volumes containing the subjects of his Course are furnished to each student of the Complete Plumbing Course, the Steam Fitters' Course, the Short Plumbing Course, and the Plumbing Inspectors' Course. The student of the Complete Heating Course receives four Bound Volumes containing the sub- jects of his Course, and the student of the Steam Fitters' Course, five Bound Volumes. Subjects Taught in the Courses In the Complete Plumbing Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, and 33. In the Complete Heating Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, and 54. In the Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 31, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45. Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be omitted. In the Steam Fitters' Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 46. Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be omitted. In the Short Plumbing Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, and 31. Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be omitted. In the Plumbing Inspectors' Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31, 32, and 33. 308 Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be omitted. Time Required to Finish the Courses That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Complete Plumb- ing Course or the Complete Heating Course in about 1^ years, and the Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course, the Steam Fitters' Course, the Short Plumbing Course, or the Plumbing Inspectors' Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of the Complete Plumb- ing Course, the Complete Heating Course, or the Plumbing Inspectors' Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. 309 10 11 12 15 18 Full Mining Course Thirty-six subjects are taught in the Full Mining Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain thirty-eight, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 124" 2 Formulas 13 3 Geometry and Trigo- nometry 75 4 Mine Surveying and Map- ping 192 5 Geometrical Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 118 Tables 25 J 6 Mechanics 96 7 Steam and Steam Boilers 44 8 Steam Engines 46 9 Air and Air Compression . 60 Hydromechanics and Pumping. Mine Haulage Examination Questions. . . Keys Hoisting and Hoisting Appliances 106 Prospecting 59 Placer and Hydraulic Mining 105 Preliminary Operations at Metal Mines 95 Metal Mining 148 Surface Arrangements at Metal Mines 48 Examination Questions ... 20 Keys... 15, Percussive and Rotary Boring 108 Dynamos and Motors. . . . 292 Ore Dressing and Milling 239 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 46 , Gases Met With in Mines 77" Mine "Ventilation 141 Surface Arrangements of Bituminous Mines .... Surface Arrangements of Anthracite Mines Examination Questions . . . Keys 310 103 123 53 67 J 105 161 34 38 J 6th Bound Voltime LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 25 Economic Geology of Coal 71 26 Prospecting for Coal and Location of Openings . . 57 27 Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts 77 28 Methods of Working Coal Mines 146 29 Electric Haulage and Hoisting 33 30 Electric Pumping, Signal- ing, and Lighting 53 31 Electric Coal-Cutting Machinery 27 32 Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- ting Machinery 27 Examination Questions ... 34 Keys 33 33 Elementary Chemistry . . 88 34 Chemistry and Chemical Operations 31 35 Blowpiping 81 36 Mineralogy 89 37 Assaying 143 38 Geology. 128 Examination Questions. . . 24 Keys 28 Pages 4,302 Illustrations, 1,960 Instruction Papers, 48 Drawing Plates, 5 Mapping Plates, 5 Bound Volumes. 7 Note — Subjects 33 and 34 are not included in this Course. 7th Botmd Volume Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give instruction in the methods of working both coal and metal mines. b. They treat of placer and hydraulic mining. c. They describe the different sys- tems of mine haulage and treat of hoisting and hoisting appliances. d. They show the surface arrange- ments at both coal' and metal mines. 311 e. They give the student a good knowledge of coal preparing and of ore dressing and milling. /. They explain the sinking of shafts and slopes and the driving of tunnels and drifts. g. They enable the student to get a good understanding of mine surveying and mapping, mine timbering, and mine ventilating. h. They furnish reliable information pertaining to prospecting, blowpiping, and assaying. i. They treat of mine gases; explain the principle of the safety lamp; show various types of lamps ; and teach how to test for gas. j. They embrace instruction in both geology and mineralogy. k. They explain the application of electricity in mining. /. They treat of mine pumping and drainage. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mine Owners. h. Operators, Managers, and Super- intendents of mining properties. c. Mining Engineers and Mine In- spectors. d. Mine Foremen and Assistants. e. Fire-Bosses. /. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. g. Draftsmen in mining engineers' offices. k. Deputy Mineral Surveyors, i. Miners. j. Laborers. k. Hoisting Engineers, Haulage En- gineers, Pumpmen, etc. 312 /. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Black- smiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, etc. m. Breaker Bosses and Men in charge of concentrating mills, amalga- mating plants, smelters, and refineries. n. Weighmasters, and Clerks and Accountants in mining stores and mining offices. 0. Contractors for mills, breakers, washeries, and other mine buildings. p. Metallurgists, Assayers, and Amalgamators. q. Prospectors. r. Persons engaged in sinking shafts or slopes and driving tunnels or drifts. 5. Men that sell mining machinery and appliances, and men that wish to become such salesmen. t. Persons interested in mining or living in localities where mining is carried on. u. Students and Graduates of mi- ning schools and colleges. V. Professors and Teachers in mining schools and colleges. w. Editors of mining journals and newspapers in mining regions. X. Mine Brokers and Stock Dealers. Note — Prospective students wanting a full knowledge of mining — both coal and metal mining — should enroll for the Full Mining Course. Those wishing to study coal mining only, should enroll for the Complete Coal Mixing Course. Persons desiring to take up metal mining alone, should enroll for the Metal Mixing Course. After finishing the mathematics, the student of the Full Mining Course may take up the Coal-Mining Section, the Metal-Mining Section, or the Mine-Mechanical Section. If a student desires he can take up Mine Surveying and Mapping immediately after finishing the mathe- matical work of the Course. The drawing 313 required in this Course may be done at any time, but the student must finish all the Geo- metrical Drawing Plates before taking up Mine Surveying and Mapping. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Enormous amounts of money have been invested in mining, and operations are now conducted on a larger scale than ever before. The mining engineer is in constant demand and well paid for his services. It used to be that a young man wanting to become a mining engineer had to spend 4 years in acquiring his education at some technical school or college. But today a student that has finished our Full Mining Course can at once begin to practice as a mining engineer with- out having to go to college. By enroll- ing for our Full Mining Course and taking up Mine Surveying and Mapping first, the student can in a few months qualify for a position in a drafting room or in a mine-surveying corps — the two principal entrances to the field of mining engineering. The student hav- ing once secured a foothold, his progress is a matter of experience and further study. With the knowledge obtained from our Course, the student advances rapidly. He puts into practice the information as fast as he learns it. b. The demand in the mining indus- try today is for economy in operation. In order to fill his position satisfactorily the mine superintendent must know how to obtain the coal or mineral with the smallest expense and how to save the largest quantity in its preparation. To accomplish this the superintendent 314 is obliged to keep himself informed in regard to improved methods and labor- saving machinery. And in no other way can he do this so readily as through our Full Mining Course. Our Course contains the best that is known con- cerning mining ; it is both thorough and practical, and gives instruction in exactly the subjects of which a mine superintendent must have knowledge. The possession of such money-saving knowledge will enable the superintend- ent to advance his own interests by increasing the confidence of his employ- ers in his ability to serve them to the greatest advantage. c. Even though the student intends to make a specialty of some one branch of mining, a general knowledge of all branches of the work is essential. d. Professors and teachers in mining schools and colleges will find in our Course a store of knowledge that will be of inestimable value in their class- room work. Our instruction will enable them to give their students a thorough knowledge of mining operations as carried on in actual practice — a feature so often lacking in college courses but of paramount importance to the college man about to engage in mining as a profession. e. In no class of mining does theo- retical knowledge count for so much as in coal or metal mining. The most val- uable qualification a miner can have is to know where to look for coal or ore, and how to find deposits that have been cut off by faults or lost from other causes. The man that relies on experience alone will never make the headway 315 that he would if he had supplemented his experience with a knowledge of the different subjects contained in our Full Mining Course. Our instruction, written by practical raining men, will teach the student to discriminate between barren and productive coal measures and to trace ore deposits and mineral-bearing rocks. It will qualify him to work intelligently. /. Education is essential to the mine worker that would advance. Without it he cannot pass the state examination for a certificate of competency, which in many states he must have before he can become a mine official. Our Course is well adapted to the needs of those preparing for examinations for fire-boss, mine foreman, and mine inspector. It is a significant fact that a large number of the mine inspectors in the United States have been or are our students. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 J years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Full Mining Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. 316 It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Complete Blowpiping Outfit as soon as he is ready to study Blowpiping, and has paid $20. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course. They are of the greatest value to those desiring to study at home and therefore requiring forceful and well-arranged instruction. Few persons wanting to use their spare time for home study are wise enough to plan out for them- selves a progressive Course; and few are faithful enough to plod through such a Course when made up of average textbooks. It is here our specially planned Bound Volumes exactly meet the requirements of those that would otherwise have endless trouble in rightly selecting and arranging an order of studies suited to their needs. Our Bound Volumes contain in a logical order all the subjects properly included in a full mining course. The instruc- tion is so forcefully written and illus- trated that the student can take it into his mind unaided. By thoughtfully 317 reading the Bound Volumes, the stu- j dent can get a good knowledge of both coal and metal mining. b. They contain the best that has been learned concerning mining. They are invaluable to the student wanting to make a comparative study of both coal and metal mining. Our experience in preparing textbooks enables us to make our Bound Volumes superior to all others for reference purposes. It. is the universal verdict that nowhere else can the student get so readily so much reliable information pertaining to both coal and metal mining. c. They are admirably suited to the needs of mine officials and mine inspect- ors engaged in mining districts that include both coal and metal mines. d. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 318 Complete Coal Mining Course Twenty-six subjects are taught in the Complete Coal Mining Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Librar}'- contain twenty-seven, as fol- lows : LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 124 Formulas 13 Geoinetry and Trigonom- etry 75 Mine Surveying and Map- ping 192 Geometrical Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 41 Kevs 118 Tables 25 Mechanics 96 Steam and Steam Boilers 44 Steam Engines 46 Air and Air Compression 60 Hydromechanics and Pumping 103 Mine Haulage 123 Examination Questions ... 53 Keys ■ 67J Dynamos and Motors . . . 292 Percussive and Rotary Boring 108 Ore Dressing and Milling. . 239 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 46 Gases Met "With in Mines 77 Mine Ventilation 141 Hoisting and Hoisting Appliances 106 Surface Arrangements of Bituminous Mines .... 105 Surface Arrangements of Anthracite Mines 161 Examination Questions. . . 34 Keys 38 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 319 71 146 LIST OF SUBJECTS ] Economic Geology of Coal Prospecting for Coal and Location of Openings. . Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts Methods of Working Coal Mines Electric Haulage and Hoisting _. . . . . 33 Electric Pumping, Signal- ing, and Lighting 53 Electric Coal-Cutting Ma- chinery 27 Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- ting Machinery 27 Examination Questions. . . 34 Keys 33 5th Bound Vokime Pages 3,200 Illustrations, 1,483 Instruction Papers, 39 Drawing Plates, 5 Mapping Plates, 5 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — Subject No. 14 is not included in this Course. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give instruction in mine ventilating, mine timbering, and mine surveying and mapping. b. They explain the application of electricity in coal mining. c. They show the surface arrange- ments of both anthracite and bitumi- nous mines. d. They explain pillar-and-chamber methods and long-wall methods of working coal mines. e. They describe the different sys- tems of mine haulage. /. They explain the sinking of shafts and slopes and the driving of drifts. g. They contain instruction in the geology of coal — enabling the student 320 to recognize coal-bearing strata and discriminate between that and strata in which coal is never found. h. They treat of mine pumping and drainage. i. They are so clear and easy of comprehension, the student readily grasps the principles involved without the presence of a teacher. ;'. They are made clear with frequent illustrations. k. They contain numerous worked- out examples, showing the methods of solving practical mining problems. Persons That Should Enroll a. Coal Operators. b. Managers and Superintendents of coal properties. c. Mining Engineers. d. Mine Inspectors. e. Mine Foremen and Assistants. /. Fire-Bosses. g. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. h. Hoisting Engineers, Haulage Engineers, Pumpmen, etc. i. Miners. j. Laborers. k. Clerks and Accountants in mining stores and offices. /. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Blacksmiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, etc. m. Men in charge of or operating rolls, crushers, conveyers, and other breaker machinery. n. Contractors for breakers, wash- eries, and other mine buildings. o. Persons engaged in sinking shafts or slopes and driving tunnels or drifts. 11 321 p. Men that sell mining machinery and appliances, and men wishing to become such salesmen. q. Persons interested in coal mining, or living in localities where coal mining is carried on. r. Professors and Teachers in mining schools and colleges. 5. Graduates of high schools and Students in mining schools and colleges. t. Editors and Lawyers in mining districts, Mine Brokers, and Dealers in mining stocks. Note — Persons wanting a knowledge of coal mining only, shotdd enroll for the Complete Coal Mining Course. Persons wanting a knowl- edge of both coal and metal mining should enroll for the Full Mining Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Many states have passed laws requiring mine officials to hold certifi- cates of competency. It is probably only a question of time when all mining states will pass similar laws. The examinations for state certificates are becoming more dif&cult from year to year. Our Course is especially suited to the needs of the student preparing for the examinations for fire-boss, mine foreman, and mine inspector. h. Before the mine worker can advance he must add to his practical experience a knowledge of mining con- ditions and the principles involved in mining operations. This knowledge, and this alone, will bring him promotion and increase in wages. The man that supplements his practical work with the knowledge contained in our Course can qualify for any position in or about the anthracite or the bituminous mines. 322 c. The mine official should know how to work a mine with the greatest safety to his men. The responsibility of having men's lives in his charge should alone be sufficient incentive for him to instruct himself for their protection. d. Wonderful progress has been made in the coal-mining industry within the last few years. Indeed, so scien- tifically is coal mining now carried on that little of real value is lost either in mining or preparing. Coal that for- merly could not be worked except at a loss is now being mined at a profit, and the finer sizes of coal — previously classed as culm and placed in the refuse bank — are now saved and bring good prices. With improved methods has come a demand for men whose knowledge qualifies them to secure the coal with the least expense and save the largest per cent, in its preparation. e. Mining companies everywhere are searching for men competent to direct operations. The opportunities for trained men were never better. Through our instruction a man can learn to locate, open, and equip a mine; to direct operations; and to deal intelli- gently with the problems that daily arise. /. The superintendent's position is one of great importance and responsi- bility. On him depends, in a great measure, the success or the failure of the mine. To perform his duties efficiently, the superintendent must know how to direct his subordinates. If he lacks a technical education he will daily meet questions he cannot answer; 323 he will find his lack of systematic knowl- edge a constant stumbling block. g. By enrolling for our Complete Coal Mining Course and taking up the mine surveying and mapping section first, a student can quickly qualify for a position in a mine surveying corps or in a drafting room. Then by supple- menting his practical experience with the knowledge contained in our Course, he can rapidly advance. Many success- ful mining engineers began their careers in a surveying corps or in a drafting room. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1^^ years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Complete Coal Mining Course should have our Com- plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- fit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The stu- dent pays express charges. 324 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course. These Papers hav- ing successfully met the exacting requirements of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applications in coal mining with more thoroughness and conciseness than is possible in a work prepared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common- sense application. For easy gradation; for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their sub- jects; and for practicability, they are unequaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted to the subject of coal mining, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the solution of a problem it might otherwise take hours to master. They are the very best text- books ever prepared for home study. 325 c. They are written in a simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood, even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary principles and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work of which they treat. The tried and proved facts, formulas, and proc- esses used in the best coal-mining practice in the country are here col- lected and bound into an orderly and systematic whole. 326 1st Bound Volume Short Coal Mining Course Ten subjects are taught in the Short Coal Mining Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain fourteen, as foUows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 124 2 Mensuration and Trigono- metric Functions 32 3 Gases Met With in Coal Mines 48 4 Mine Ventilation 51 5 Mine Surveying 93 6 Mine Machinery 96 Examination Questions. . . 46 Keys 136 Tables 25 J 7 Economic Geology of Coal 71 8 Prospecting for Coal and Location of Openings. . . 57 9 Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts 77 10 Methods of Working Coal Mines 146 11 Electric Haulage and Hoisting 33 12 Electric Pumping, Signal- ing, and Lighting 53 13 Electric Coal-Cutting Ma- chinery 27 14 Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- ting Machinery 27 Examination Questions. . . 34 Keys 33 2d Bound Volume Pages 1,238 Illustrations, 537 Instruction Papers, 16 Bound Volumes, 2 Note— No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They explain pillar-and-chamber methods and long-wall methods of mining. b. They contain instruction in the geology of coal — enabling the student 327 to recognize coal-bearing strata and discriminate between them and strata in which coal is never found. c. They treat of the sinking of shafts and slopes and the driving of drifts. d. They treat of mine gases, explain the principle of the safety lamp and show various types of lamps, and teach how to test for firedamp. e. They furnish instruction in mine ventilation. /. They will enable the student to understand the principles of mine surveying. g. They explain the principles of mechanics and teach how to calculate the sizes of engines and the horsepower of boilers. h. They describe mining machinery such as drums, cages, air compressors and pumps, drilling and coal-cutting machines, etc. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mine Foremen and Assistants. b. Fire-Bosses. c. Driver Bosses. d. Miners. e. Laborers. /. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. g. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Black- smiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, Timber- men, etc. h. Breaker Bosses, Docking Bosses. i. Headmen, Footmen. j. Weighmasters and Check Weigh- men. k. Clerks and Accountants in mining stores and offices. 328 I: Persons owning coal mines or coal lands and wanting to get a fair knowl- edge of coal mining in order to talk intelligently on mining topics and to guard better their own interests. m. Persons living in localities where coal mines are operated and desiring to understand in a general way how the mining is carried on. n. Persons employed in or about the coal mines. Note — The Short Coal Mining Course— an abridgment of the Complete Coal Mining Course — is intended for persons wanting to prepare in the shortest time possible _ for the examinations for fire-boss, assistant mine fore- man, and mine foreman; or for those wishing simply to take up or review the subject of coal mining in a short and concise form without studying it so fully as treated in our Complete Coal Mining Course. If the prospective student has time and desires a better preparation for the examination or a more comprehensive knowledge of coal mining than that given in the Short Coal Mining Course he should enroll for the Complete Coal Mining Course. We should not in any case recommend the Short Coal Mining Course to men desiring a full knowledge of coal mining. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Mere manual labor and mechan- ical drudgery are never profitable; and mining is no exception. So long as the mine worker toils with his hands only, his lot will be a hard one. With- out a mining education he will always be down; for he is in competition with cheap labor and labor-saving machinery. To hold his own he must make his brains direct and help the work of his hands; and to advance and become a success he must get a thorough knowledge of mining conditions and the principles involved in mining operations. In no 329 other way can the mine worker get so readily so much information pertaining to practical mining as through our instruction. It will lift him from the rut in which he has worked all his life, and give him that intelligent grasp of mining principles so essential to success. Without a mining edu.cation the mine worker cannot pass the state examina- tion for a certificate of competency, which he must have in some states before he can become a mine official. b. Positions are no longer secure without an education. The mine fore- man must keep himself informed or else step aside for a man that combines education and experience. c. Mining is a progressive art. The whole tendency in mining is toward economy and increased efficiency. Economical methods are constantly being adopted and better appliances introduced. These improvements call for men that can use them to the greatest advantage. d. The miner or the laborer that appreciates what opportunities will come to him through an increased technical knowledge, and makes an effort to obtain this knowledge, is usually rewarded with an advance in both salary and position. Our Course opens the doors of hope and opportunity to all ambitious miners and laborers. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 330 week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a Httle more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Quesiions, and Keys of the Course. The Bound Vol- umes are exactly suited to the needs of the student that failed to get an educa- tion in his youth and now finds he needs it in his work. Our instruction is so forcefully written, the student can take it into his mind unaided. By thoughtfully reading the Bound Vol- umes in spare times at home, the stu- dent can get a good idea of the methods and principles of coal mining. b. They are a valuable reference library. The Bound Volumes contain in logical order all the subjects properly included in a short coal-mining course. Each subject is treated as fully as neces- sary to give the student a good under- standing of it. The information given in the Bound Volumes will increase the mine worker's ability to accomplish work in the mines at less cost of time and labor, thus making him more valuable to himself and to his employer. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. d. They are well illustrated and give worked-out examples of how to solve practical mining problems. 331 Metal Mining Course Twenty-three subjects are taught in the Metal Mining Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain twentv-six, as follows: 12 15 18 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 124 Formulas 13 Geometry and Trigonom- etry 75 Mine Surveying and Map- ping 192 Geometrical Drawing 77 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 118 Tables 25 Mechanics . 96 Steam and Steam Boilers 44 Steam Engines 46 Air and Air Compression 60 Hydromechanics and Pumping. . . Mine Haulage. 103 123 53 67 Examination Questions Keys Hoisting and Hoisting Ap- pliances 106 Prospecting 59 Placer and Hydraulic Mining 105 Preliminary Operations at Metal Mines 95 Metal Mining 148 Surface Arrangements at Metal Mines 48 Examination Questions ... 20 Keys 15 Percussive and Rotary Boring 108 Dynamos and Motors .... 292 Ore Dressing and Milling. 239 Examination Questions ... 38 Keys 46. 332 1st Bound Vohime 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 21 Elementary Chemistry ... 88 22 Chemistry and Chemical Operations 31 oA 21°'''^?'''^ li I 5th Bound 24 Mmeralogy Sn Volume 25 Assaymg 143 26 Geology 128 Examination Questions. . . 24 Keys 28 Pages 2,988 Illustrations, 1,541 Instrtiction Papers, 34 Drawing Plates, 5 Mapping Plates, 5 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — No recitations are asked for in sub- jects 18, 21, and 22. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They furnish full instruction in metal mining. b. They supply the student with a thorough knowledge of placer and hydraulic mining. c. They show how to determine the approximate composition of min- erals. d. They will enable the student to prospect intelligently. Our instruction in prospecting will save a vast amount of time and futile labor to the would-be prospector. e. They contain instruction in both wet and dry methods of assaying the principal metals. /. They take up fully the subjects of geology and mineralogy, explaining rock formations and enabling the student to recognize various rocks and minerals by their distinguishing characteristics. g. They show the surface arrange- ments at metal mines. 333 h. They describe the different sys- tems of mine haulage. i. They treat of mine pumping and drainage. j. They tell how to recover gold and silver from ores by the processes of amalgamation. Amalgamating appa- ratus is shown and described. k. They give instruction in ore dressing and milling. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mine Owners. h. Managers, Superintendents, and Foremen of ore properties. c. Mining Engineers. d. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. e. Hoisting Engineers, Pumpmen, etc. /. Metal Miners and Placer Miners. g. Clerks and Accountants in Mi- ning offices. h. Mine Mechanics, Drill Runners, Drill Helpers, Machinists, Blacksmiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, Timbermen, etc. i. Prospectors. j. Deputy Mineral Surveyors and Assistants. k. Assayers and Assistants. /. Contractors for mills, concen- trating plants, and other mine buildings. m. Contractors engaged in sinking shafts or slopes, driving tunnels, dia- mond drilling, or deep-well drilling. n. Men that sell mining machinery and appliances, and men that wish to become such salesmen. o. Persons interested in metal mi- ning, or living in localities where it is carried on. 334 p. Professors and Teachers in mi- ning schools and colleges. q. Graduates of high schools, and Students in mining schools and colleges. r. Editors and Lawyers in mining districts, Mine Brokers, and Dealers in mining stocks. Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of both coal and metal mining should enroll for the Full Mining Course. After finishing the mathematics the student of the Metal Mining Course may take up the Metal-Mining Section or the Mine-Mechanical Section. If a student desires he may take up Mine Surveying and Mapping immediately after finishing the Geomet- rical Drawing and the mathematical work of his Course. The student may take up drawing as soon as he pleases, without waiting until he has finished the mathematics. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Metal mining is undergoing a transformation. Old and wasteful meth- ods are being pushed aside by scien- tific methods and modem machinery. Many mines that a few years ago could not be worked except at a loss are today being operated at a profit. There is a constant advancement in the standard of knowledge required of mine officials. The mine official that does not know how to manage every branch of the business — to do the best possible for his employers — is not qual- ified for his position. He must educate himself or step aside for a better man. Our Metal Mining Course is a boon to the untrained official; it enables him to supplement his practical experience with a thorough knowledge of the theory of metal mining — to qualify himself to fill his position successfully. 335 b. Every mine worker wanting to improve his condition and get more pay should systematically study the sub- jects necessary to make him proficient. It is by showing himself a better man than his fellow workmen that the ambitious mine worker can rise. The man determined to get ahead and realizing that to do it he must have the proper training, can advance easily and quickly through study of our Course. Through our instruction the student is given a practical working knowledge of mine surveying and map- ping; he learns the best methods of mining; and becomes familiar with various kinds of mining and milling machinery. This knowledge coupled with his practical experience is a valu- able recommendation for the position of foreman or superintendent. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 2 J years. The average student requires a little more time. Drawing Outfit Required The student of our Metal Mining Course should have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally good, as soon as he is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our student for $7.95. The student pays express charges. 336 Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Complete Blowpiping Outtit as soon as he is ready to stud}^ Blowpiping, and has paid $20. The student pays express charges. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys of the Course, which were prepared to meet the needs of the student that must get an education, if he gets it at all, by means of home study and w4th no instructor by his side. Instruction for this purpose must be so forcefully w^ritten that the student can take it into his mind unaided. So well does our instruction meet this requirement, many students have obtained a good knowledge of metal mining by thought- fully reading the Bound Volumes in spare time at home. It is because our Bound Volumes are so clearly written and illustrated as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read that they are universally accepted as the best for home study. b. They are for reference purposes better than any other work of the kind ever published. Our Bound Volumes keep the student in touch with the best metal-mining practice, and give him a fund of reliable information, much of which he cannot obtain elsewhere. 3.37 That our Bound Volumes are consid- ered superior to ordinary textbooks is shown by the fact that many of the leading mining schools and colleges are using them for reference purposes. The Bound Volumes are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They have been written and arranged with the idea of providing the student with a practical working knowl- edge of metal mining that will help him secure a good position and to fill it satisfactorily. d. They are replete with illustrative examples, showing the methods of solv- ing practical mining problems. 338 Metal Prospectors' Course Six subjects are taught in the Metal Prospectors' Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library con- tain twelve, as follows: 10 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Elementary Chemistry . . 88 Chemistry and Chemical Operations 31 Blowpiping 81 Mineralogy 89 Assaying." 143 Geology 128 Examination Questions . . 24 Keys 28 Hoisting and Hoisting Ap- pliances 106 Prospecting 59 Placer and Hydraulic Mi- ning 105 Preliminary Operations at Metal Mines 95 Metal Mining 148 Surface Arrangements at Metal Mines 48 Examination Questions . . 20 Kevs 15 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Pages 1,008 Illustrations, 532 Instruction Papers, 6 Bound Volumes, 2 Note — No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. Blowpiping gives the student a knowledge of the fundamental principles of qualitative analysis by means of the blowpipe; describes the apparatus and the reagents used in making blowpipe tests; explains clearly the examination of a substance before the blowpipe; takes up the reduction of metallic oxides with soda; and contains tables showing the colors imparted by various minerals to the flame and to both 339 borax and phosporous beads, as well as a table giving the most characteristic reactions for the more common metallic oxides. The purpose of blowpiping is to furnish a rapid method for deter- mining the approximate composition of ores and minerals. Blowpipe tests indicate the presence of the different con- stituents, not the proportions. With the information given in our Paper, the student should have no difficulty in distinguishing the principal ores and oxides of metals — information invaluable to a prospector. Mineralogy takes up the physical characteristics of minerals, explaining clearly how the different minerals can be recognized by such properties as hardness, specific gravity, color, cleav- age, fracture, streak, etc. ; describes the form in which minerals occur, giving the various systems of crystallography; familiarizes the student with the impor- tant metallic minerals, telling him how to identify them; contains tables of the minerals constituting metallic ores of secondary importance, as well as a table of the minerals sent with the Blowpipe Outfit; and embraces reliable information about precious stones. Assaying teaches how to make quanti- tative analyses of ores by both wet and dry methods. The apparatus used is clearly described and the student can obtain a thorough theoretical knowl- edge of gold and silver assaying, which can be readily put to practical use. The determination of iron, copper, lead, sulphur, etc. is given careful treatment. Many of our former stu- dents are now working as assay ers. 340 Geology gives the student a knowl- edge of the earth's history as recorded in the rocks. It explains the various agencies instrumental in changing the form of the earth ; describes the structure of rocks; gives valuable information about mineral veins and ore deposits; shows fossils characteristic of the dif- ferent periods; and tells about the occurrence of minerals of commercial importance, such as gold, silver, lead, copper, etc. Prospecting teaches how to search intelligently for mineral veins and ore deposits; tells how to locate placer claims and lode claims according to United States practice as well as British Columbian practice; deals with the location and recording of mill sites ; takes up prospecting for gems and precious stones, underground pros- pecting, drilling, magnetic prospecting; gives examples of prospecting regions; and tells about the most important prospectors' tools and shows how to keep them in repair. The information contained in this Paper is invaluable to every prospector; it will save him a vast amount of time and futile labor and put him in possession of knowledge that will be a potent factor in his success. Placer and Hydraulic Mining explains the origin of gold placers; takes up placer mining, describing the apparatus and methods used in placer and hy- draulic mining ; deals with the important subject of water supply, telling how to build reservoirs, dams, ditches, and flumes, and explains how to measure the flow of water: and gives examples 341 of placers and tells about the practical way in which they have been worked. Persons That Should Enroll a. Prospectors. b. Placer Miners. c. Assayers and Assistants. d. Contractors engaged in drilling, etc. e. Trappers, Hunters, Lumbermen, etc. _/. Persons interested in mines or mineral lands. g. Deputy Mineral Surveyors. h. Persons living in metal-mining regions. Why Persons Should Enroll a. To prospect intelligently for precious metals, the prospector must have a thorough knowledge of the condi- tions under which the ores occur. He must know in what rocks he may rea- sonably hope to discover rich deposits. Without this knowledge he cannot discriminate between promising regions and those regions barren of prospects, and he will probably waste both time and money in fruitless search. Our Course embraces just the information the student must have to become a successful prospector, and this infor- mation is given in the best possible way. The student does not have to make an exhaustive study of many books to find what he must know. We have epitomized the best known about metal prospecting, and the student gets the whole thing in a nutshell. Our instruction is invaluable to every one 342 searching for rich ore deposits or in any way connected with metal pros- pecting. b. The discovery of every new mining field rekindles the mining fever, and thousands rush to the new field in search of fortune. Few of these as a rule are equipped with practical train- ing or technical education. Many have never seen a mine and are unable to distinguish glittering pyrites from free gold. And where one haphazard pros- pector succeeds, thousands fail. If the man having no practical experience and wanting to prospect would devote some time to the study of blowpiping, miner- alog}^ assaying, and geology before be- ginning his search for valuable mineral deposits, his chances of success would be immeasurably increased. Our Metal Prospectors' Course will equip the student with exactly the instruction he must have to prospect in the most in- telligent manner. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Complete Blowpiping Outfit as soon as he is ready to study Blowpiping, and has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dents' concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 6 months. The average student re- quires a little more time. 343 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course, and give the stu- dent knowledge that will enable him to prospect intelligently for mineral veins and ore deposits — knowledge that will save much time and trouble and increase greatly the chances of making rich discoveries. b. They are invaluable to the student realizing the tragedy of idle moments and the infinite possibilities of spare- time study. Replete with practical information, our Bound Volumes are full of knowledge indispensable to the student ; written in a style so simple as to preclude misunderstanding, and indexed so thoroughly that every important subject can be found in an instant. c. They are thorough, practical, and easy to understand— three features essential to success in home study, and which our long experience and constant endeavor to provide ideal instruction has enabled us to fill to the letter. Our instruction was originally prepared by practical men, then carefully gone over by our own textbook writers and adapted to the peculiar needs of the home student. 344 lst!_Bound Volume Complete Cotton Course Forty-seven subjects are taught in the Complete Cotton Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain fifty-five, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 124 2 Mensuration 17 3 Mechanical Definitions ... 38 4 Mechanical Calculations . . 17 5 Yarn Calculations, Cotton 22 6 Yam Calculations, Vv^'oolen and Worsted 26 7 Yarn Calculations. Gen- eral 39 8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 9 Cloth Calculations, Wool- en and Worsted 28 10 Draft Calculations 33 11 Reading Textile Drawings 34 Examination Questions. . . 38 12 Cotton 34^ 13 Pickers 74 14 Cotton Cards 117 15 Drawing Rolls 41 16 Railway Heads and Draw- ing Frames 41 17 Combers 78 18 Fly Frames 83 Examination Questions. . . 28.* Ring Frames 73 Cotton Mules 116 Twisters 37 Spoolers 27 Beam Warpers 30 Slashers 57 Chain Warping 85 Examination Questions. . . 23 Yarns 95 Cloth Rooms 72 Mill Engineering 178 Reeling and Baling 33 Winding. 32 Examination Questions. . . 19 345 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Woolen and "Worsted Cam- Looms 48 Woolen and Worsted Fancy Looms 95 Woolen and Worsted Loom Fixing 37 Plain Looms 46 Fixing Looms 31 Loom Attachments 29 Automatic Looms 29 Dobbies 33 Leno Attachments 34 Box Motions 29 Jacquards 112 Examination Questions ... 29 Glossary of Weaves 35 Elementary Textile De- signing 30 Analysis of Cotton Fabrics 25 Analysis of Woolen and Worsted Fabrics 27 Twill Weaves and Deriva- tives 35 Satin and Other Weaves. . 22 Combination Weaves 27 Construction of Spot Weaves 26 Weaves for Backed Cotton Fabrics • 22 Woolen and Worsted Ply Weaves 38 Leno Weaves 65 Pile Weaves 34 Color in Textile Designing 87 Designing in General 17 Examination Questions. . . 38. 5th Bound Volume Pages 2,895 Illustrations, 1,461 Instruction Papers, 76 Bound Volumes, 6 Note — No recitations are asked for in the sub- jects in light-face type. The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad to furnish any special information about the Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write to him whenever they need his help. Address: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Depart- ment, International Correspondence Schools, New Bedford, Mass. 346 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the information the student must have in order to make cotton-mill calculations, b. They treat of raw cotton — de- scribing fully the different varieties and qualities of cotton, the characteristics of the cotton fiber, and the selecting of cottons. c. They explain the construction, operation, and care of cotton card-room machinery, such as pickers, cotton cards, railway heads and drawing frames, combers, and fly frames. d. They treat of spinning machinery, describing the construction, adjustment, and operation of both ring frames and mules. The characteristics of yarns and the various forms of putting them up for the market by means of reeling, winding, spooling, warping, baling, and other machinery are fully described. e. They describe the processes of preparing warps, including spooling, warping, slashing, and drawing-in cot- ton warps. /. They explain the construction, adjustment, and operation of weaving machinery, including plain looms, loom attachments, automatic looms, dobbies, box motions, and jacquards. The fix- ing of looms is given due consideration. g. They explain cloth-room proc- esses, describing the machinery used and the baling of cloth for shipment. h. They give instruction in cotton fabric designing, including a thorough description of elementary textile design- ing. 347 i. They take up the analysis of cotton fabrics, and show how to deter- mine the weave and reproduce fabrics from given samples, make the necessary calculations, and prepare the chain and harness drafts. With certain of the designing Instruction Papers, actual samples of various fabrics are supplied for practice in cloth analysis. /. They describe the leading weaves for fabrics made from cotton yams, such as twill weaves and derivatives, satin weaves, basket weaves, stripes and checks, spot weaves of various kinds, weaves for backed-cotton fabrics, piques, Bedford cords, and others. k. They treat of leno weaves and describe leno-weaving attachments. /. They give the student a thorough knowledge of color in textile designing; of the classification of colors; of simple and compound colorings; and of the use of color in regular and irregular stripes and checks, two or more color effects, and combinations with fancy weaves. m. They give instruction in design- ing in general, and supply the student with a reference glossary of 400 weaves. n. They treat of pile weaves, inclu- ding weaves for velvets, velveteens, plush, and Turkish toweling. o. They describe the features of mill construction, including excavation, foundation walls, brickwork, roofs, and interior construction. They explain the details of mill equipment, such as power plants, heating, ventilation, and lighting plants, fire protection, plumb- ing, and water supply. 348 p. They show how to plan the machinery layout for a cotton mill. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mill Owners. h. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and Superintendents . c. Cotton Samplers. d. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss Weavers, and other Overseers and Fore- men in cotton mills. e. Second Hands and Third Hands in picking, carding, spinning, weaving, and other departments of cotton mills. /. Grinders, Strippers, Machine Operators, and Oilers in cotton-card rooms. g. Spinners and Doffers. h. Slasher Tenders. i. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain Builders, and Spare Hands in weave rooms. j. Designers, Assistant Designers, and Pattern Weavers. k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, and Erectors of machinery in cotton mills. /. Young Men learning the cotton- mill business, and persons wishing to qualify for positions in cotton mills. m. Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. n. Dealers in cotton-mill machinery and supplies and their Salesmen. o. Cotton- Yarn Agents, Cotton Mer- chants, and their Salesmen. p. Cloth Commission Agents and their »Salesmen. q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and Clerks in mill ofhces, storerooms, and other departments. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Textile manufacturing is one of the most important industries. The manufacture of cotton into yarns and cloths, as well as the producing and the handling of raw materials, gives employment to a vast army of workers. The textile field offers splendid oppor- tunities to the man fully understanding the business. To hold a position pay- ing a good salary, however, the textile worker must thoroughly understand the various processes of manufacturing a be familiar with the constructic ■' operation, and care of textile machinei And in no way can he obtain tl knowledge so quickly as through o instruction. Indeed, our Course is t. only practical way; for other than o" instruction there is comparatively litt reliable information to be had on Ame ican methods and processes. Oi Course, written under the supervisic of one of the recognized authorities c textile matters, is in full accord wit the latest and best practice; it gives tht student in simple language the precis information he must have to fill sue cessfully any position in a cotton mill it will help the second hand become ai overseer; give the overseer the knowl edge he must have to rise to the positioi of superintendent; enable the superin tendent to run the mill in the mosi economical manner; furnish the mil. agent with reliable information about the kinds, qualities, etc. of cotton, cotton yams, and cotton fabrics; and broaden the treasurer's ideas and give him a better insight into the business. 350 b. Time was when a person wishing to rise to a high position in the textile tield had to get a knowledge of mill methods either by slow experience or by attending some textile school. Both these methods are good ; but theory and practice should go hand in hand. It is here that our Course offers the ideal solution of the problem for the mill hand determined to win promotion. By supplementing his mill experience with the information contained in our Complete Cotton Course, the student -■ 'm — without leaving his work — quickly " p,m not only the theory of cotton Y^nufacturing, but also the best mill ^ftactice. Our instruction contains the ■ 4st that is known about cotton manu- -ijcturing; it explains in detail the vari- ftts processes the cotton undergoes .Ilom the time it is received at the mill •.ktil it finally leaves in the form of ikished yam or cloth. i c. Presidents of textile corporations, firectors, agents, superintendents, and "■fhers in responsible positions in textile iSiills should study our Course in order 'p get a better knowledge of the cotton ^usiness and so be able more effectively IP direct the work of the different .iepartments. ^ d. So rapid has been the growth of [)he textile industry, comparatively few people realize the great opportunities it ■i)ffers. New inventions and improve- inents made in textile machinery have oroadened immeasureably the field of ,the textile worker. Each new inven- tion leads either to new industries or to a greater development of those already ^existing. I 1 351 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1| years. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, and give the student the best that is known about cotton manufacturing. b. They are for reference purposes the most valuable volumes ever pub- lished on cotton manufacturing. Con- taining as they do in logical order all the subjects properly included in a com- plete cotton course, the Bound Volumes give the latest and most improved methods used in modern textile mills. No reference library on textile manu- facturing is complete without our Bound Volumes. They contain a vast store of knowledge nowhere else obtain- able and put the student in possession of just the information he must have to rise to a responsible position. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 352 1 Courses Extracted From the Complete Cotton Course There are five Courses made up from the Complete Cotton Course, The subjects contained in the Bound Vol- umes of the Reference Library of the Complete Cotton Course are : LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 Arithmetic 2 Mensuration 3 Mechanical Definitions . . . 4 Mechanical Calculations. . 5 Yam Calculations, Cotton 6 Yam Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 7 Yam Calculations, Gen- eral 8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 9 Cloth Calculations, Woolen and Worsted LO Draft Calculations LI Reading Textile Drawings Examination Questions. . . L2 Cotton L3 Pickers L4 Cotton Cards L5 Drawing Rolls L6 Railway Heads and Draw- ing Frames L7 Combers L8 Fly Frames Examination Questions. . . Ring Frames Cotton Mules Twisters Spoolers Beam Warpers Slashers Chain Warping Examination Questions. . . Yams Cloth Rooms Mill Engineering Reeling and Baling Winding Examination Questions. . . 353 PAGES 124 17 38 17 22 26 39 26 28 33 34 38 341 74 117 41 41 78 83 28 J 73 116 37 27 30 57 85 23 95 72 178 33 32 19 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS P. 31 Woolen and Worsted Cam- Looms 32 Woolen and Worsted Fancy Looms 33 Woolen and Worsted Loom Fixing 34 Plain Looms 35 Fixing Looms 36 Loom Attachments 37 Automatic Looms 38 Dobbies 39 Leno Attachments 40 Box Motions 41 Jacquards Examination Questions. . . 42 Glossary of Weaves 43 Elementary Textile De- signing 44 Analysis of Cotton Fab- rics 45 Anah'sis of Woolen and Worsted Fabrics 46 Twill Weaves and Deriva- tives 47 Satin and Other Weaves 48 Combination Weaves 49 Construction of Spot Weaves 50 Weaves for Backed Cotton Fabrics 51 Woolen and Worsted Ply Weaves 52 Leno Weaves 53 Pile Weaves 54 Color in Textile Designing 55 Designing in General Examination Questions. . . 48 95 37 46 31 29 29 33 34 29 112 29 351 30 25 27 35 22 27 26 22 38 65 34 87 17 38 5th Bound Volume 6th Bound Volume Pages 2,895 Ilhistrations, 1,461 Instruction Papers, 76 Bound Volumes, 6 Note — The instruction in our Courses in Tex- tiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad to furnish any special information about the Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write to him whenever they need his help. Ad- dress: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, International Correspondence Schools, New Bedford, Mass. 354 Titles of the Courses Cotton Carding and Spinning Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, and 21. Cotton Warp Preparation and Plain Weaving Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, and 37. Fancy Cotton Weaving Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, and 41. Cotton Carding, Spinning, and Plain Weaving Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 34, 35, 36, and 37. Cotton Designing Course, con- sisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 22, 23, 24. 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, and 55. Note — Four Bound Volumes containing the subjects of his Course are furnished to each stu- dent of the Cotton Carding and Spinning Course; the Cotton Warp Preparation and Plain Weaving Course; the Fancy Cotton Weaving Course; and the Cotton Carding, Spinning, and Plain Weaving Course. The student of the Cotton Designing Course re- ceives five Bound Volumes containing the sub- jects of his Course. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mill Ovv^ners. b. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and Superintendents . c. Cotton Samplers. d. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss Weavers, and other Overseers and Fore- men in Cotton Mills. 3.55 e. Second Hands and Third Hands in picking, carding, spinning, weaving, and other departments of cotton mills. /. Grinders , Strippers , Machine Operators, and Oilers in cotton card rooms. g. Spinners and Doffers, k. Slasher Tenders. i. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain Builders, and Spare Hands in weave rooms. j. Designers, Assistant Designers, and Pattern Weavers. k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, and Erectors of machinery in cotton mills. /, Young Men learning the cotton- mill business and persons wishing to qualify for positions in cotton mills. m. Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. ■n. Dealers in cotton-mill machinery and supplies and their Salesmen. 0. Cotton- Yarn Agents, Cotton Merchants, and their Salesmen. p. Cloth Commission Agents and their Salesmen. q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and Clerks in mill offices, storerooms, and other departments. Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of cotton manufacturing should enroll for the Com- plete Cotton Course. Those desiring to study textile designing — both cotton and wool — should enroll for the Complete Textile Designing Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The rapid development of the cotton industry and the increase in the number of mills and in the manu- facture of fine and fancy fabrics have created a great demand for technically 356 trained mill men understanding the latest and best methods of cotton manufacture and the care and operation of textile machinery. We help the stu- dent qualify for the highest and best- paid positions in the textile field by giving him the information necessary to advancement. b. The man with a knowledge of both the theory and practice of textile manufacturing is the man mill owners want and are glad to pay well. We teach the theory of cotton manu- facturing and give instruction in the latest and best textile mill methods. Our Course gives indispensable infor- mation to the student that would be an overseer or a superintendent. c. Promotion to the position of overseer is a possibility that every second hand looks eagerly forward to from the time he enters the mill. But before a second hand can advance to the position of overseer he must have a good knowledge of mill calculations, and textile machinery construction, for with- out this knowledge he cannot solve the problems constantly arising. We give the student the information he requires to fill successfully the overseer's position. Time Required to Finish the Courses That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Cotton Card- ing AND Spinning Course, the Cotton Warp Preparation and Plain Weav- ing Course, the Fancy Cotton Weav- ing Course, or the Cotton Carding, 357 Spinning, and Plain Weaving Course in about 6 months, and the Cotton Designing Course in about 10 months. The average student requires a Httle more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Writ- ten Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, which contain in simple language the best that is known about cotton manufacturing and textile de- signing, and give the student a fund of information that cannot be obtained elsewhere. h. They are invaluable for refer- ence purposes. Indeed, no reference library on textile subjects is complete without them. Our Bound Volumes contain much valuable information never before published. They are the only volumes treating thoroughly and from a practical standpoint American methods and processes of cotton manu- facture. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all the letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They have been written and arranged with the idea of providing the student with a practical working knowledge of the various processes of cotton manufacturing — knowledge that will enable him to secure a position and to fill it satisfactorily. 358 Complete Woolen Course Thirty- two subjects are taught in the Complete Woolen Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain fifty-one, as follows: 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1st Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 124 Mensuration 17 Mechanical Definitions 38 Mechanical Calculations. . 17 Yam Calculations, Cotton 22 Yarn Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 26 Yam Calculations, General 39 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 Cloth Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 28 Draft Calciilations 33 Reading Textile Drawings. 34 Examination Questions ... 38 Yarns 95^ Cloth Rooms 72 | Mill Engineering 178 I 2d Bound Reeling and Baling 33 j Winding 32 Examination Questions. . . 19 J Wool 33 Wool Scouring 39 Wool Drying 18 Burr Picking 25 Carbonizing 16 Wool Mixing 31 Wool Oiling 15 Woolen Carding 138 Woolen Spinning 88 Woolen and Worsted Warp Preparation 78 Examination Questions. . . 30 Volume 3d Bound Volume 359 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Woolen and Worsted Cam- Looms 48 Woolen and Worsted Fancy Looms 95 Woolen and Worsted Loom Fixing 37 Plain Looms 46 Fixing Looms 31 Loom Attachments 29 Automatic Looms 29 Dobbies 33 Leno Attachments 34 Box Motions 29 Jacquards 112 Examination Questions. . . 29. Glossary of Weaves Elementary Textile Design- ing Analvsis of Cotton Fab- rics Analysis of Woolen and Worsted Fabrics Twill Weaves and Deriva- tives Satin and Other Weaves . . Combination Weaves Construction of Spot Weaves Weaves for Backed Cotton Fabrics Woolen and Worsted Ply Weaves Leno Weaves Pile Weaves Color in Textile Designing Designing in General 17 Examination Questions. . . 38 4th Bound Volume 5th Bound Volume Pages... 2,462 Illustrations, 1,256 Instruction Papers, 67 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — No recitations are asked for in the sub- jects in light-face type. The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad to furnish any special information about tlae Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write to him whenever they need his help. Address: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, International Correspondence Schools, New Bed- ford, Mass. 360 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the information the stu- dent must have in order to make calcu- lations regarding woolen-mill machinery and processes, yarns, and fabrics. b. They give instruction on raw wool, describing the different varieties and qualities, the characteristics of the fiber, and wool selecting and sorting. c. They explain the scouring and drying of wool. Scouring materials and the processes and machines used for scouring and drying are described. d. They treat of the burr picking, carbonizing, mixing, and oiling of wools; of the various types of machines and materials used in such processes, and of the best methods of using them. e. They explain woolen carding, including the construction, operation, and care of various types of carding machinery. /. They treat of the woolen spinning mule, describing its construction, opera- tion, and adjustment. The character- istics of yams and the different forms of putting them up for market are explained. g. They explain the processes of preparing woolen and worsted warps, including spooling, dressing, reeling, beaming, and drawing in and reeding. h. They describe the construction, adjustment, and operation of woolen and worsted weaving machinery, inclu- ding cam-looms and fancy looms, of both the Knowles and the Crompton types. The fixing of looms is thor- oughly treated of. 361 i. They give instruction in woolen fabric designing, including a thorough description of elementary textile design- ing. j. They take up the analysis of woolen and worsted fabrics; show how to determine the weave and repro- duce fabrics from given samples ; make the necessary calculations; and pre- pare both chain and harness drafts. With certain of the designing Instruc- tion Papers, actual samples of various fabrics are supplied for practice in cloth anal3^sis. k. They describe the leading weaves for fabrics made from woolen yams, including t^vill weaves, satin weaves, corkscrew weaves, spot weaves, stripes and checks, filling-backed fabrics, warp- backed fabrics, double cloths, double plain weaves, and triple cloth. /. They give the student a thorough knowledge of color as used in textile designing; of the classification of colors; of simple and compound colorings; of the use of color in regular and irregular stripes and checks, two or more color effects, and combinations w^ith fancy weaves. fn. They supply the student with a reference glossary of 400 weaves. n. They describe the features of mill construction including excavation, foundation walls, brickwork, roofs, and interior construction. They explain the details of mill equipment, such as power plants; heating, lighting, and ventilating plants ; fire-protection ; plumbing; and water supply._ Cotton- mill planning is given due consideration. 362 Persons That Should Enroll a. Mill Owners. b. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and Superintendents. c. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss Dressers, Boss Weavers, and other Overseers and Foremen in woolen mills. d. Second and Third Hands in carding, spinning, weaving, and other departments of woolen mills. e. Wool Sorters and Scourers, and workers in the scouring and drying departments of woolen mills. /. Grinders, Strippers, and other workers in wool card rooms. g. Fixers, Spinners, Doffers, Spoolers, and Dresser Tenders. h. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain Builders, and Assistants in weave rooms. i. Burlers, Perchers, and Cloth Inspectors. ;'. Designers, Assistant Designers, and Pattern Weavers. k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, and Machinery Erectors. /. Young Men learning the mill business, and persons wishing to qualify for positions in woolen mills. m. Woolen-Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. n. Dealers in woolen-mill machinery and supplies, and their Salesmen. o. Woolen- Yarn Agents, Woolen Merchants, Salesmen, and Clerks. p. Woolen-Cloth Commission Agents and their Salesmen and Clerks. q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and Clerks in woolen-mill offices, store- rooms, and other departments. 36.3 Why Persons Should Enroll a. Never were there better oppor- tunities for trained men in the textile industry; and never has the textile worker been better paid. New mills are constantly being established, and competent men are needed to take charge. Old mills formerly making only coarse or plain goods are now manufacturing fine yarns and fancy fabrics, and men understanding the new processes are in demand. With our help, the superintendent, the boss weaver, or the designer can learn to manufac- ture fancy and elaborate fabrics and obtain reliable information about the newest processes. Spinners, weavers, and others can become more efficient and rise to higher and better-paying positions through our instruction. h. Owing to the strict discipline in textile mills, and to the unwillingness of the heads of departments to give information to the heads of other depart- ments, it is difficult for an overseer to get a knowledge of the various branches of mill work sufficient to advance him to the superintendent's position. Our Course is the overseer's opportunity. Written by men of long experience in the textile industry, our instruction is in full accord with the latest and best woolen-mill practice ; it gives the student a thorough knowledge of the various processes of woolen manufacturing — a knowledge it would take him years to get by slow experience, and one that coupled with his mill experience will be a valuable recommendation for the position of superintendent. 364 c. The way for the textile worker to win promotion is through special training, and we can give him this. Our instruction fully covers the field of woolen manufacturing and gives the student a thorough knowledge of the various processes the wool undergoes from the time it leaves the fleece until it is made up into yarn or cloth. The man possessing this information is in demand, and gets good pay. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, and are exactly suited to the needs of the student that must get his education by home study and with no instructor by his side. Instruc- tion for this purpose must be so force- fully written and illustrated that the student will take it into his mind unaided. So well do our Bound Volumes meet this requirement, they are universally accepted as the best for home study. 365 b. They stand without an equal as a reference Hbrary, and are invaluable to every one in any way connected with the manufacture of woolen and worsted fabrics. Each volume is a mine of practical information. The instruction given is accurate and represents the latest and best practice. Nowhere else can the student get so much authoritative information on woolen manufacturing. We have epitomized the most important data of textile manufacturing and present it to our students in clear and concise language. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 366 Courses Extracted From the Complete Woolen Course Five Courses are made up from the Complete Woolen Course. The sub- jects contained in the Bound Volumes of the Reference Library of the Com- plete Woolen Course are: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 124 1 2 Mensuration 17 3 Mechanical Definitions ... 38 4 Mechanical Calculations . . 17 5 Yam Calculations, Cotton 22 6 Yam Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 26 7 Yam Calculations, Gen- eral 39 8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 9 Cloth Calculations.Woolen and Worsted 28 10 Draft Calculations 33 11 Reading Textile Drawings 34 Examination Questions. . . 38 12 Yams 95 13 Cloth Rooms 72 14 Mill Engineering 178 15 Reeling and Baling 33 16 Winding 32 Examination Questions. . . 19 J 17 Wool 331 18 Wool Scouring 39 19 Wool Drying 18 20 Burr Picking 25 21 Carbonizing 16 22 Wool Mixing 31 23 Wool Oiling 15 24 Woolen Carding 138 25 Woolen Spinning 88 26 Woolen and Worsted Warp Preparation .... 78 Examination Questions. . . 30 367 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 27 Woolen and Worsted Cam- Looms 48 28 Woolen and Worsted Fancy Looms 95 29 Woolen ' and Worsted Loom Fixing 37 30 Plain Looms 46 31 Fixing Looms 31 32 Loom Attachments 29 33 Automatic Looms 29 34 Dobbies 33 35 Leno Attachments 34 36 Box Motions 29 37 Jacquards 112 Examination Questions ... 29 38 Glossary of Weaves 35 39 Elementary Textile De- signing 30 40 Analysis of Cotton Fabrics 25 41 Analysis of Woolen and Worsted Fabrics 27 42 Twill Weaves and Deriva- tives 35 43 Satin and Other Weaves . . 22 44 Combination Weaves 27 45 Construction of Spot Weaves 26 46 Weaves for Backed Cotton Fabrics 22 47 Woolen and Worsted Ply Weaves 38 48 Leno Weaves 65 49 Pile Weaves 34 50 Color in Textile Design- ing 87 51 Designing in General 17 Examination Questions .. . 38 Pages 2,462 Illustrations, 1,256 Instruction Papers, 67 Bound Volumes, 5 Note — The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad to furnish any special information about the Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write to him whenever they need his help. Address: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, International Correspond- ence Schools, New Bedford, Mass. 5th Bound Volume 368 Titles of the Courses Woolen Carding and Spinning Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25. Woolen Warp Preparation and Weaving Course, consisting of sub- jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, and 29. Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving Course, consisting of sub- jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, 29, and 37. Woolen Carding, Spinning, and Weaving Course, consisting of sub- jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, and 29. Woolen and Worsted Designing Course, consisting of subjects 1,2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, 29, 37, 38, 39, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 47, 49, and 50. Note — Four Bound Volumes containing the subjects of his Course are furnished to each student of the Woolen Carding and Spinning Course; the Woolen Warp Preparation and Weaving Course; the Worsted Warp Prep- aration AND Weaving Course; and the Woolen Carding, Spinning, and Weaving Course. The student of the Woolen and Worsted Designing Course receives five Bound Volumes containing the subjects of his Course. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mill Owners. h. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and Superintendents. c. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss Dressers, Boss Weavers, and other Overseers and Foremen in woolen mills. d. Second and Third Hands in card- ing, spinning, weaving, and other de- partments of woolen mills. e. Wool Sorters and Scourers, and workers in the scouring and drying departments of woolen mills. /. Grinders, Strippers, and other workers in wool card rooms. g. Fixers, Spinners, Doffers, Spool- ers, and Dresser Tenders. h. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain Builders, and Assistants in weave rooms. i. Burlers, Perchers, and Cloth Inspectors. j. Designers, Assistant Designers, and Pattern Weavers. k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, and Machinery Erectors. /. Young Men learning the mill business, and persons wishing to qualify for positions in woolen mills. m. Woolen-Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. n. Dealers in woolen-mill machinery and supplies, and their Salesmen. o. Woolen- Yam Agents, Woolen Merchants, and their Salesmen and Clerks. p. Woolen-Cloth Commission Agents and their Salesmen and Clerks. q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and Clerks in woolen-mill offices, storerooms, and other departments. Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of woolen manufacturing should enroll for the Complete Woolen Course. Those desiring to study textile designing — both cotton and woolen — should enroll for the Complete Tex- tile Designing Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Textile mills are constantly chan- ging their products. Mills formerly making coarse or plain goods are now manufacturing fine yams and fancy 370 fabrics. This change to finer and more elaborate fabrics requires men that understand the new processes and that are able to operate the improved machinery. b. The designer is an important factor in a textile mill. His position is a good-paying one, and he is always in demand. Our instruction is the best ever prepared on woolen and worsted designing. Written in a simple and easy style, our Course so clearly explains the technical details of design- ing that any ambitious student can understand them and their application in the manufacture of textiles. c. Owing to the strict discipline in mills and to the unwillingness of heads of departments to give information to heads of other departments, it is hard to obtain a good general knowledge of all branches of mill work unless through a systematic course of study such as we offer. Our Course provides an oppor- tunity for a man employed in one de- partment to obtain a knowledge of other departments. d. Never has there been so great a need of competent textile workers. Textile mill owners everywhere want men able to produce salable goods, and are willing to pay big salaries. We train men that mill owners are glad to em- ploy and pay well. e. College graduates intending to make textile manufacturing their life business can, through the study of our Course, add to their education the knowledge that will qualify them for responsible and good-paying positions. 371 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Woolen Warp Preparation AND Weaving Course or the Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving Course in about 4 months, the Woolen Carding and Spinning Course in about 6 months, the Woolen Carding, Spin- ning, and Weaving Course in about 8 months, and the Woolen and Worsted Designing Course in about 10 months. The average student re- quires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, which were prepared to meet the requirements of the home- study student. Our ceaseless endeavor to provide ideal instruction for home study has made our Bound Volumes the most practical textbooks in existence. They are exactly suited to the needs of the student that must study with no instructor by his side and must there- fore have instruction so forcefully written that he can take it into his mind unaided. h. They possess almost unlimited value as reference books. Containing information that it would take hours or even days to find elsewhere, and much 372 that cannot be obtained from any other publications, our Bound Volumes are invaluable to the man needing trust- worthy facts about the latest and best textile mill methods. We epitomize the most important facts pertaining to woolen manufacturing, present them in language easily understood by the man of little education, arrange them in a systematic manner, and index them carefully and thoroughly for ready reference. No other books contain so much reliable information on textile subjects. 373 Complete Textile Designing Course Forty subjects are taught in the Com- plete Textile Designing Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain fifty-eight, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 124' Mensuration 17 Mechanical Definitions ... 38 Mechanical Calculations . . 17 Yarn Calculations, Cotton 22 Yarn Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 26 Yarn Calculations, General 39 Cloth Calculations, Cotton. 26 Cloth Calculations, Woolen and Worsted 28 Draft Calculations 33 Reading Textile Drawings . 34 Examination Questions ... 38 Ring Frames 73 Cotton Mules 116 Twisters 37 Spoolers 27 Beam Warpers 30 Slashers 57 Chain Warping 85 Examination Questions. . . 23 Yarns 95 Cloth Rooms 72 Mill Engineering 178 Reeling and Baling 33 Winding. ._ 32 Examination Questions .. . 19 Wool 33 Wool Scouring 39 Wool Drying 18 Burr Picking 25 Carbonizing 16 Wool Mixing 31 Wool Oiling 15 Woolen Carding 138 Woolen Spinning 88 Woolen and Worsted Warp Preparation 78 Examination Questions. . . 30 374 5th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Woolen and Worsted Cam- Looms 48 Woolen and Worsted Fancy Looms 95 Woolen and Worsted Loom Fixing 37 Plain Looms 46 Fixing Looms 31 Loom Attachments 29 Automatic Looms 29 Dobbies 33 Leno Attachments 34 Box Motions 29 Jacquards 112 Examination Questions. . . 29 Glossary of Weaves 35' Elementary Textile De- signing 30 Analysis o f Cotton Fabrics . 25 Analysis of Woolen and Worsted Labrics 27 Twill Weaves and De- rivatives 35 Satin and Other Weaves ... 22 Combination Weaves 27 Construction of Spot Weaves 26 Weaves for Backed Cot- ton Fabrics 22 Woolen and Worsted Ply Weaves 38 Leno Weaves 65 Pile Weaves 34 Color in Textile Designing 87 Designing in General 17 Examination Questions. . . 38 Pages 2,910 Illustrations, 1,421 f; ■ Instruction Papers, 64 Bound Volumes, 6 Note — No recitations are asked for in the subjects in light-face type. The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad to furnish any special information about the Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write to him whenever they need his help. Address: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, International Correspondence Schools, New Bed- ford Mass. 6th Bound Volume 375 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They teach the student how to make calculations regarding yams, fabrics, warp preparation, and weaving machinery, b. They treat of yams, describing their classification, characteristics, vari- eties, qualities, and the forms in which they are put up for commercial purposes. c. They explain the processes of preparing warps, such as spooling, warp- ing, slashing, dressing, beaming, and drawing in and reeding. d. They describe the construction, operation, and adjustment of weaving machinery, including plain looms, loom attachments, cam-looms, woolen and worsted fancy looms, dobbies, box motions, and jacquards. The fixing of looms is given due consideration. e. They describe cotton cloth-room processes and machinery and tell how to bale the cloth for shipment. /. They give thorough instruction in elementary textile designing. g. They take up the analysis of fabrics; show how to determine the weave, the warp and filling patterns, and the chain and harness drafts; make the necessary calculations; and repro- duce fabrics from given samples. h. They describe the leading weaves for fabrics made from cotton, woolen, and other yams, such as twills and derivatives, satin weaves, basket weaves, ribbed weaves, honeycomb weaves, stripes and checks, spot weaves of vari- ous kinds, filling-backed fabrics, warp- backed fabrics, double cloths, double 376 plain weaves, and triple, cloth. Leno weaves and the attachments for weav- ing lenos are fully treated of. ■i. They give the student a thorough knowledge of color in textile designing; of the classification of colors; of simple and compound coloring; of the use of color in regular and irregular stripes and checks, two or more color effects and their combination v/ith fancy weaves. j. They give instruction in design- ing in general and the student is pro- vided with a reference glossary of 400 weaves. k. They treat of pile weaves, inclu- ding weaves for velvets, velveteens, plush, and Turkish toweling. I. They give instruction in textile designing as applied to cotton, woolen, and worsted fabrics, and the machinery for weaving them is fully described. With certain of the designing Instruc- tion Papers, actual samples of various fabrics are supplied for practice in cloth analysis. TH. They teach the student the vari- ous methods of designing fabrics and prepare him for changes in fashions and styles involving new methods of manu- facturing. Persons That Should Enroll a. Mill Owners and Mill Officials in general. h. Designers, Assistant Designers, and Pattern Weavers. c. Boss Dressers, Boss Weavers, and other Overseers and Foremen in textile mills. 377 d. Second Hands and Third Hands n the weaving and other departments of textile mills. e. Slashers and Dresser Tenders. /. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain Builders, and Spare Hands in weave rooms. g. Overseers of cloth rooms, Cloth Inspectors, Perchers, and Burlers. h. Clerks in mill offices, Shipping Clerks, and other clerical assistants in textile mills. i. Cloth Commission Agents, Cloth Merchants and their Salesmen. Note — The principles of designing are com- mon to almost all textile fabrics. While this Course deals more directly with cotton, woolen, and worsted designing, the knowledge derived can be applied to the designing of fabrics other than those mentioned in the Course. _ It should be understood, however, that the instruction does not treat specifically of silk nor linen fabrics; but since the principles of designing are practically the same, it is merely a matter of intelligent application of the knowledge derived from our Course to make it of _ great value to any one desiring to learn the designing of fabrics other than cotton, woolen, or worsted goods. For those having a good knowledge of warp preparation and weaving machinery, but whose knowledge of designing is incomplete, we have arranged a Theory of Textile Designing Course. This Course is exactly suited to those wanting instruction in the analysis and the reproduction of fabrics and of the drafting of weaves; also to those engaged in getting out new styles and therefore needing a knowledge of the structure and the designing of fabrics in general, but not needing to devote time to the study of machinery and manufacturing processes. After finishing the Mathematical Section, the student of the Complete Textile Designing Course may take up either the Cotton Warp Preparation and Weaving Section or the Woolen and Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving Section. He may omit either of these sections, but before he has finished the subject of Yams he must notify the Textile Department which section he desires to study. 378 Why Persons Should Enroll a. An important part of every de- signer's duties is the analyzing of fabrics sent to the mill for reproduction. This analysis is of the utmost importance not only in cases where a mill desires to manufacture certain fabrics for which there is a large demand, but also for the purpose of gaining new ideas for the production of other fabrics. The per- son able to analyze a sample of cloth and reproduce it exactly or with certain de- sired modifications is always in demand and receives good pay. We can help weave-room men become designers. Our Course is the best ever prepared on textile designing; it treats fully of woolen, worsted, and cotton designing — starting with the elementary princi- ples and leading the student progres- sively from the simplest to the most complicated weaves. Samples of cloth are sent to the student. He is required to analyze them, record the results, and send his work to us for criticism. This gives the student practical experi- ence. He is taught not only to analyze the samples, but also to reproduce them and to make original designs. b. In the manufacture of textile fab- rics, no branch of the business is more important than that of designing, nor does anything affect the desirability and selling qualities of a fabric more than the design. The material may be costly, the yarn perfect, and the weaving and finishing well done; but if the design is not well conceived or is not adapted to the purpose for which the cloth is intended, the fabric will be inferior. 379 c. In order that one may intelli- gently understand the best methods of manufacturing fabrics, it is first of all essential to acquire a thorough knowl- edge of woven fabrics. Our Course teaches the student all the principles underlying woven fabrics, explaining and illustrating the methods used to produce cloth and yarns ; it contains the information a man must have to become a successful textile manufacturer. d. Textile manufacturing is turning rapidly toward the finer and more elaborate fabrics such as have pre- viously been imported. There is dis- crimination against fabrics that do not attain the highest grade of excellence. This provides better opportunities for the textile designer, and has created a demand for competent men thoroughly understanding the manufacture and design of cotton, woolen, worsted, and other textiles. Our textile designing Courses are the best ever prepared on the subject. They have been written by experts and are of inestimable value to designers, superintendents, overseers, section hands, weavers, and all others desiring to advance themselves. Much of the instruction pertaining to Ameri- can methods of design and manufacture has never before been published. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 380 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They embrace the Instruction Papers and. Examination Questions of the Course, and explain fully and clearly both cloth analyzing and designing. h. They are invaluable for reference purposes. Containing in logical order all the subjects properly embraced in a textile designing course, our Bound Volumes are exactly suited to the needs of the student that must know all the technical details pertaining to textile designing. They contain much infor- mation never before published. Every- thing of an experimental nature has been excluded, our purpose being to give only information that can readily be put to practical use. Our Bound Volumes are an epitome of useful, com- mon-sense knowledge of the best and latest practice of textile designing. No reference library on textile subjects is complete without them. c. They are superior to any other books of the kind ever published. They are far ahead of the textbooks used in textile schools. The information given has been so simplified, it can be easily understood and used by people of little education. Because our instruction is so clearly written as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read, our Bound Volumes are universally acknowl- edged the best for home study. The subject of textile calculations has been so simplified, it can be easily understood by 381 any one having a knowledge of no higher mathematics than arithmetic. This fact alone makes our Bound Volumes of priceless worth to the textile worker. d. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 382 French Course Edison Standard Phonograph (equipped with a special repeat- ing attachment) Brass Horn (14-inch) Model "C" Reproducer Recorder Special Hearing Tube (with head- piece attachment and sound mod- ifier. The sound modifier is our own patented invention, and is used exclusively with our Courses) Speaking Tube Winding Crank Camel's-Hair Chip Brush Two Blank Cylinders Twenty-five Molded Phonographic Records (corresponding to the French Textbooks) Four French Textbooks Instruction and Correction of Stu- dent's Work, comprising the fol- lowing : A set of the pamphlet Instruction Papers issued to a student as he progresses with his studies Blank Cylinders on which to make his phonographic recitations Thorough and careful criticism of his work, and guidance in his studies ._ Privilege of writing, as frequently as he may desire, for special in- struction in his Course Our Diploma when he completes the Course and satisfactorily passes our examination Section A Section B Section C Section D Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of Teaching French a. We teach the student to read understandingly ; for we train his eye, his ear, and his memory at the same time. b. We teach the student to write correctly; for, after the first few les- sons, we require him to use the language of his Course in correspondence with his Instructor. 383 c. We teach the student to speak fluently; for we require him to recite into the phonograph and send his records to his Instructor for correction and criticism. d. We teach the student to think logicahy; for we require him to practice drills, using the idioms and construc- tions in the various combinations occurring in conversation and liter- ature. e. We require our student to learn each lesson before we give him the next. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain practical conversa- tional lessons, prepared strictly on a common-sense plan, and the student at once learns to talk on general affairs and the topics of the times. h. They require the student to write what he learns, besides reciting it into the phonograph. c. They include instruction in gram- mar to the full extent required. This grammar instruction is written in English, and the student is required to practice translation and carry on French correspondence with his In- structor. d. They include courses of reading on technical subjects; many selections are given from the classics; and the commercial, political, and industrial conditions of foreign countries are described. e. They enable the student to acquire a vocabulary of over five thousand French words. 384 /. They teach the student how to translate EngHsh into French, and French into EngHsh. g. They require the student to do original composition in French. How We Are Able to Guarantee That Our French Instruction Records Bear Correct Pronunciation Our Instructors repeat a lesson into the phonograph many times until a per- fect record is made. A metal mold is then made from this perfect record, by the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then all the Instruction Records of that lesson are cast in the mold. This insures abso- lute precision and standardizes the language for the first time in its history. Persons That Should Enroll a. Persons interested in the engi- neering professions, chemistry, etc. b. Employes in all classes of United States Government service. c. Employes of firms having trade in foreign countries. d. Men and Women ambitious of developing their intellectual powers, improving their conversational ability, etc., in order to appear to advantage in the society of persons of the better sort. e. Students in high schools and academies. /. Teachers. g. Physicians. h. Clergymen. i. Persons that intend to travel abroad. y. Persons engaged in the study of political conditions. 13 385 Why Persons Should Enroll a. The French is generally recog- nized as the nearest approach to a universal language. A person inter- ested in civil engineering, hydraulic engineering, mining engineering, chem- istry, electrical engineering, etc., will find a big increase in his business and social opportunities through a knowl- edge of French. b. The rapid development of Amer- ican trade in Europe has opened many avenues of advancement to salesmen and othes employes able to read, write, and speak French. c. Some universities and colleges require that their students shall have a knowledge of French before entering. d. To the student of French is opened one of the richest literatures of the world, in the various depart- ments of professional, technical, and scientific learning. e. All physicians need a knowledge of French, in order to read the excellent French literature devoted to medicine and surgery. /. Ability to converse well in French will often contribute more than any other accomplishment to one's social advancement. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 386 Remarks One of the difficult things in language teaching is to get the student to prac- tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous tone in the presence of his teacher. A personal instructor seldom can spare enough time with the student to give him sufficient practice in speaking; and the student frequently cannot rehearse his lesson alone, because he forgets most of it. Then, too, a personal teacher's peculiarities of manner and dress often distract the attention of the student. Our method avoids all diffi- culties of this sort. We give to the stu- dent what is in many respects superior to a personally present teacher. Our student is able to hear his Instructor's voice, when, where, and as long as he likes, and he ma}^ hear a word or a phrase repeated as often as he desires; for the phonograph has no distracting peculiarities, has no engagements, is not nervous, and never grows impatient. 387 German Course Edison Standard Phonograph" (equipped with a special repeat- ing attachment) Brass Horn (14-inch) Model "C" Reproducer Recorder Special Hearing Tube (with head- piece attachment and sound mod- }■ Section A ifier. The sound modifier is our own patented invention, and is used exclusively with our Courses) Speaking Tube Winding Crank Camel's-Hair Chip Brush Two Blank Cylinders Twenty-five Molded Phonographic 1 Records (corresponding to the > Section B German Textbooks) J Four German Textbooks Section C Instruction and Correction of Stu- dent's Work, comprising the fol- lowing : A set of the pamphlet Instruction Papers issued to a student as he progresses with his studies Blank Cylinders on which to make his phonographic recitations Thorough and careful criticism of Y Section D his work, and guidance in his studies Privilege of writing, as frequently as he may desire, for special in- struction in his Course Our Diploma when he completes the Course and satisfactorily passes our examination Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of Teaching German a. We teach the student to read understandingly ; for we train his eye, his ear, and his memory at the same time. b. We teach the student to write correctly; for, after the first few lessons, we require him to use the language of his course in correspondence with his Instructor. 388 c. We teach the student to speak fluently; for we require him to recite into the phonograph and send his records to his Instructor for correction and criticism. d. We teach the student to think logically; for we require him to practice drills, using the idioms and construc- tions in the various combinations occur- ring in conversation and literature. e. We require our student to learn each lesson before we give him the next. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain practical conversa- tional lessons, prepared strictly on a common-sense plan, and the student at once learns to talk on general affairs and the topics of the times. h. They require the student to write what he learns, besides reciting it into the phonograph. c. They include instruction in gram- mar to the full extent required. This grammar instruction is written in English, and the student is required to practice translation and carry on Ger- man correspondence with his Instructor. d. They include courses of reading on technical subjects; many selections are given from the classics; and the commercial, political, and industrial conditions of foreign countries are described. e. They enable the student to acquire a vocabulary of over five thousand German words. /. They teach the student how to translate English into German, and German into English. 389 g. They require the student to do original composition in German. How We Are Able to Guarantee That Our German Instruction Records Bear Correct Pronunciation Our Instructors repeat a lesson into the phonograph many times until a perfect record is made. A metal mold is then made from this perfect record, by the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then all the Instruction Records of that les- son are cast in the mold. This insures absolute precision and standardizes the language for the first time in its history. Persons That Should Enroll a. Business Men. b. Clerks. c. Salesmen. d. Persons interested in the engineer- ing professions, chemistry, etc. e. Employes in all classes of United States Government service. /. Employes of firms having trade in foreign countries. g. Men and Women ambitious of developing their intellectual powers, improving their conversational ability, etc., in order to appear to advantage in the society of persons of the better sort. h. Students in high schools and academies. i. Teachers. /. Physicians. k. Clergymen. /. Persons that intend to travel abroad. m. Persons engaged in the study of political conditions. 390 Why Persons Should Enroll a. A knowledge of the German language is of inestimable value to business men and their employes. A good conversationist in German has important social and business advan- tages. He is able to enjoy the associa- tion of hundreds of congenial people that he would otherwise not know; and he is in a position to attract a good deal of custom that ignorance of German would be sure to leave to his com- petitors. 6. Germany is acknowledged fore- most in medicine and surgery, and a majority of the best writings on these subjects is found in the German lan- guage. Physicians, surgeons, and med- ical students find our German Course of inestimable help. It enables them to keep informed of the latest achieve- ments of their German brethren. c. The Germans are among the lead- ers in every branch of modern discovery, invention, and engineering. Ability to read, write, and speak German is there- fore of special value to the scientists and the engineers of all countries. d. German is taught so commonly in the schools, teachers will find our Courses of special value. Our system possesses unique advantages that enable us to guarantee correct pronunciation. e. It is a great advantage to every intelligent person to have a knowledge of the German language. The impor- tant works on nearly every subject of interest to the philosopher, the scientist, the educator, the artist, the linguist, the poet, and the musician, are in German. 391 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Remarks One of the difficult things in language teaching is to get the student to prac- tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous tone in the presence of his teacher. A personal instructor seldom can spare enough time with the student to give him sufficient practice in speaking; and the student frequently cannot rehearse his lesson alone, because he forgets most of it. Then, too, a personal teacher's peculiarities of manner and dress often distract the attention of the student. Our method avoids all diffi- culties of this sort. We give to the stu- dent what is in many respects superior to a personally present teacher. Our student is able to hear his Instructor's voice, when, where, and as long as he likes, and he may hear a word or a phrase repeated as often as he desires; for the phonograph has no distracting peculiarities, has no engagements, is not nervous, and never grows impatient. 392 Spanish Course Edison Standard Phonograph' (equipped with a special repeat- ing attachment) Brass Horn (14-inch) Model "C" Reproducer Recorder Special Hearing Tube (with head- piece attachment and sound mod- } vSection A ifier. The sound modifier is our own patented invention, and is used exclusively with our Courses) Speaking Tube Winding Crank Camel's-Hair Chip Brush Two Blank Cylinders j Twenty-Five Molded Phonographic Records (corresponding to our ^ Section B Spanish Textbooks) Four Spanish Textbooks Section C Instruction and Correction of Stu-" dent's Work, comprising the fol- lowing : A set of the pamphlet Instruction Papers issued to a student as he progresses with his studies Blank Cylinders on which to make his phonographic recitations Thorough and careful criticism of J- Section D his work, and guidance in his studies Privilege of writing, as frequently as he may desire, for special in- stniction in his Course Our Diploma when he completes the Course and satisfactorily passes our examination Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of Teaching Spanish a. We teach the student to read understandingly ; for we train his eye, his ear, and his memory at the same time. b. We teach the student to write correctly; for, after the first few lessons, we require him to use the language of his Course in correspondence with his Instructor. 393 c. We teach the student to speak fluently; for we require him to recite into the phonograph and send his records to his Instructor for correction and criticism. d. We teach the student to think logically; for we require him to practice drills, using the idioms and construc- tions in the various combinations occurring in conversation and litera- ture. e. We require our student to learn each lesson before we give him the next. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain practical conversa- tional lessons, prepared strictly on a common-sense plan, and the student at once learns to talk on general affairs and the topics of the times. h. They require the student to write what he learns, besides reciting it into the phonograph. c. They include instruction in gram- mar to the full extent required. This grammar instruction is written in Eng- lish, and the student is required to practice translation and carry on Span- ish correspondence with his Instructor. d. They include courses of reading on technical subjects; many selections are given from the classics; and the commercial, political, and industrial conditions of foreign countries are described. e. They enable the student to acquire a vocabulary of over five thousand Spanish words. 394 /. They teach the student how to translate English into Spanish, and Spanish into English. g. They require the student to do original composition in Spanish. How We Are Able to Guarantee That Our Spanish Instruction Records Bear Correct Pronunciation Our Instructors repeat a lesson into the phonograph many times until a perfect record is made. A metal mold is then made from this perfect record, by the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then all the Instruction Records of that lesson are cast in the mold. This insures absolute precision and standard- izes the language for the first time in its history. Persons That Should Enroll a. Business Men. b. Clerks. c. Salesmen. d. Persons interested in the engi- neering professions, chemistry, etc. e Employes in all classes of United States Government service. /. Employes of firms having trade in foreign countries. g. Students in high schools and academies. h. Teachers. i. Physicians. j. Clergymen. k. Persons that intend to travel abroad. I. Persons engaged in the study of political conditions. 395 Why Persons Should Enroll a. Commercial opportunities in the South American countries and our new possessions should make Spanish the most popular foreign language in the United States. b. Every young man should be able to speak Spanish before he goes into our new possessions to identify himself with their industrial development. c. Engineers should understand Spanish, in view of the constant calls being made on Americans to construct and manage engineering works in Spanish-speaking countries. d. American manufacturers and merchants need employes that speak, read, and write the Spanish language. They also need correspondents, stenog- raphers, and assistants in Spanish- American cities to carry on the corre- spondence growing out of the increased trade relations. e. Professional men and women, especially those recently graduated at colleges, need to speak Spanish if they would consider the possibility of giving their services to our new possessions. Doctors, lawyers, architects, clergymen, and missionaries are of this class. /. Teachers are being recruited from the United States to serve in the public- school systems how being installed in Porto Rico, Cuba, and the Philippines. Educators that are able to read, write, and speak Spanish will have a decided advantage in this field. g. Persons engaged in the army have great need to speak Spanish, and many important military positions at home 396 and in our new possessions require this knowledge. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time given. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Remarks One of the difficult things in language teaching is to get the student to prac- tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous tone in the presence of his teacher. A personal instructor seldom can spare enough time with the student to give him sufficient practice in speaking; and the student frequently cannot rehearse his lesson alone, because he forgets most of it. Then, too, a personal teacher's peculiarities of manner and dress often distract the attention of the student. Our method avoids all diffi- culties of this sort. We give to the stu- dent what is in many respects superior to a personally present teacher. Our student is able to hear his Instructor's voice, when, where, and as long as he likes, and he may hear a word or a phrase repeated as often as he desires; for the phonograph has no distracting peculiarities, has no engagements, is not nervous, and never grows impatient. William Bulfin, in a recent issue of "The World's Work," had this to say regarding the qualifications absolutely essential to business success in South 397 America : " It is necessary to found big wholesale and retail stores and man them efficiently. When the right goods are pushed here in the proper way, there is always a satisfactory result. But too often are the wrong men sent out with the right goods. It would pay the manufacturers and the exporters of the United States to send out first-class men — men who would gild a business transaction with the urbanity so much prized by Latin Americans, men who would take the trouble of studying the language. * * * The man who depends on 'smartness' alone is a commercial calamity for the people who employ him. * * * The Spanish word 'simpatico' is translated in English as 'sympathetic,' but it means a great deal more in Spanish than it means in English. Amongst other things it means cultured social amenity, sympathy with the people, a knowledge of their language, a decent respect for their ways which pleases and flatters, and an attitude more or less indulgent to what a foreigner may consider their antiquated business methods." 398 Demonstration of Language Courses Demonstration of our language Courses has proved to be one of the best general advertisements of the International Correspondence Schools. Our careful preparation of the I. C. S. Textbooks; the unique advantages of the I. C. S. system of correspondence instruction ; our successful method of criticizing and correcting our students' exercises; our ability to originate sys- tems and carry out details — all these are quickly observed by new classes of persons at language demonstrations, who increase our field for general solici- tation fully one-half. ■ Best Way to Make a Demonstration of Our Language Courses a. Place circulars of the language Courses in the hands of the listeners. b. Explain the advantages of our molded records, which are made in gold molds through the Edison process. c. Find the proper lesson page in the circular before the phonograph is allowed to talk. Explain that we train the eye, the ear, the tongue, and the memory. d. Let the phonograph talk. The machine should run slowly (ninety revolutions a minute) and reproduce the Instructor's voice distinctly and in a natural tone. If the hearing tube is used, see that the sound modifier is properly adjusted. e. Explain the plan of each conver- sational lesson. Before the prospective 399 students close their circulars, and after the phonograph is stopped, refer to the printed extracts from the lessons. These are entitled " Remarks " ; "Drill"; "Re- view and Conversation"; and "Phono- graph Exercise." /. Call attention to the fact that records of pronunciation are made by the students (on blank cylinders that we furnish free with our Phonograph Outfit), and sent to the Schools for criticism and correction. g. Make a record of your voice and reproduce it immediately. Explain that students cannot progress in their les- sons unless they send in phonograph exercises for correction. Explain that the student must talk, and that his desire to speak as accurately as the phonograph will lead the student to attain a perfect pronunciation. h. Explain that in the I. C. S. system the student is supplied with only a few advanced lessons at any point in the Course, progression being attendant upon recitation. It is the only system that obliges the student to speak aloud and provides for the careful criticism and correction of his oral lessons recited into the phonograph. i. Show how I. C. S. students learn to write the foreign languages. Explain that all but the first few Conversational lessons and all the Grammar and Reader lessons provide for written exercises. Thus instruction is given at the same time in speaking, reading, and writing. /. Refer to the synopses of the Courses in the circular. Here may be shown the completeness of each Course. 400 Show that the thirty Conversational lessons have a definite grammatical arrangement; that they give the aver- age student a good working knowledge of the language in a few months; that the Grammar and the Reader teach the rules for construction after the student has learned to speak the language, which is an important advantage. k. Demonstrate the use of the repeating attachment on the phono- graph, and the sound modifier in the hearing tube. Explain that with our special apparatus the student has a complete and satisfactory outfit for both amusement and language study. Proper Course of Procedure in. Allow- ing an Audience to Hear a Language Record With the phonograph at rest, see that the Model C Reproducer is in place in the Speaker Arm. See that the nickel-plated screw in the Speaker Arm is turned out of the way, and the handle of the Reproducer is tight up against the casting. Be sure that the instru- ment is wound up. Open wide the Swing Locking Arm. Raise the Lift Lever to its highest point. Place the record on the Mandrel, bevel end first. Close the Swing Locking Arm and see that the record is on the Mandrel tight, without using too much force. Move the Speaker Arm over to the left to the beginning of the record. Throw the Start-and-Stop Level to the left, start- ing the instrument. From experience the demonstrator should be able to adjust the speed properly to ninety 401 revolutions a minute, before the instru- ment begins to talk. Attach the 6-way Hearing Tube to the Reproducer, stop the instrument, and distribute the cir- culars containing the lessons. After adjusting the Sound Modifiers in the tubes, which adjustment the demon- strator should learn by experience before attempting a demonstration, invite the listeners to take up the Hearing Cups. Explain to each listener that he should use only one Hearing Cup, holding it in one hand while he holds the circular in the other. Be sure to open the cir- cular so that the proper lesson is before the listener. When all the , listeners are in a com- fortable position ready to follow the lesson, start the instrument and turn down the Lift Lever, with the Repro- ducer as near the beginning of the record as the eye can judge. It is probable that the exact starting point will not be found at first; but instead of lifting up the Speaker Arm and setting it back, work the repeating attachment until the Reproducer starts at the beginning. Do not make the starting of the instru- ment appear difficult by looking under- neath the Reproducer and frantically endeavoring to find the exact starting point at once. Never let the instrument talk before the proper place for the listener to read is found in the circular. Much of the fascination of listening to a foreign- language record is lost unless the listener reads the translation of the lesson while the instrument is talking. When removing a record, be sure that the Lift Lever is up. Do not set the 402 record down, but immediately place it in the pasteboard box. Proper Way to Make a Record During a Demonstration Put the tool called the Recorder in place of the Reproducer. Be sure that the instrument is wound up. Place the Blank Cylinder on the Mandrel of the instrument, bevel end first, and see that the Recorder is lifted up so that it will not cut before dictation is begun. Start the instrument. Dust off the cylinder while it is running, wnth the soft brush furnished with the Outfit. Adjust the speed about the same as for hearing the instruction records. Attach the speak- ing tube to the Recorder. Do not use the Horn for dictation. Sit in a com- fortable position directly in front of the instrument so as to remain at ease while speaking. Do not be in haste to begin. Be sure there will be no interruption, and then let down the Recorder on the cylinder — not too near the left end. Allow a few revolutions to take place before speaking, and lift the Recorder off the cylinder the instant you have finished. Then carefully dust off the loose wax — the instrument still running to make the cylinder perfectly clean. Change the Recorder for the Repro- ducer, and the record may be heard at once. A little practice will show the correct position for any person to assume when making a record. It is well for Repre- sentatives to remember, however, that the prospective student should not be encouraged to record his voice during 403 a demonstration; the voice of an inex- perienced person sometimes reproduces improperly and proves a detriment to an otherwise good impression. A record can be made at any speed, but it must be reproduced at the same speed to obtain the best results. Remarks It is expected that the Outfit will be kept in perfect condition, and that the Representative charged with its care will demonstrate the Language Courses a sufficient number of times to produce at least one language enrolment a month. Blank cylinders are not furnished free to demonstrators. Cylinders may be made blank by rubbing them evenly with a cloth wet with ordinary kerosene. As often as the record surface is thus removed, a new record may be made on the cylinder. Still, while excellent results are possible with the kerosene, perhaps the better plan is to have a local dealer shave the cylinders in a special lathe. Supervisors and Division Superin- tendents should understand that every Phonograph Outfit in their possession is to be placed in various parts of the territory under their charge to produce at least one language enrolment (for each Outfit) a month, and that they must not allow the apparatus to remain unproductive in any locality if it is possible to put it to greater advantage in some other place. Broken or damaged Instruction Rec- ords will be replaced without charge, upon application to the Superintendents of the Districts. 404 Repairs that may be charged to wear and tear will always be made promptly by direction of the Home Office if reported on the monthly Inspection Report of Representatives' Outfits. Articles reported missing from the Outfit must be paid for at cost prices. 405 Complete Commercial Course Fourteen subjects are taught in the Complete Commercial Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain fifteen, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 293 ] Examination Questions. . . 32 [ Keys 54 J English Grammar 338 Punctuation and Capital- ization 54 Letter Writing 204 Examination Questions. . . 34 Spelling 39 Penraanship (Slanting) ... 60 Penmanship (Vertical) . . 48 Stenography 139 Typewriting 207 I Examination Questions. . . 99 J Single-Entry Bookkeeping 119" Double-Entry Bookkeep- ing Opening, Closing, and Changing Books 27 Corporation Organization and Bookkeeping 68 Elements of Cost Account- ing 74 Bank Bookkeeping 86 Examination Sets 106. 2,207 226 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Vokime 4th Bound Volume Pages Illustrations, 310 Instruction Papers, 55 Bound Volumes, 4 • Note — The student of the Complete Commer- cial Course receives instruction in either Slant- ing or Vertical Penmanship, according to his selection. The student may take up Bookkeeping as soon as he finishes Arithmetic and Penmanship; or if he writes a good hand and understands Interest and Percentage, he can begin with Book- keeping at once; or he can study Stenography as the first subject of his Course, if he has a fair knowledge of English. 406 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give the student a good business training. h. They explain fully the business forms in common use. c. They enable the student to take charge of a set of books — either single- entry or double-entry — and to devise olhce systems adapted to various lines. d. They contain thorough instruc- tion in letter writing — explaining how to compose a good letter in which the grammar, punctuation, and spelling are correct. e. They embrace thorough instruc- tion in stenography. /. They treat typewriting fully, explaining not only the operation of the machine by the touch system, but also its use in tabulating, billing, duplicating, etc. g. They teach how to open or close a set of books and how to change from single-entry to double-entry or from double-entry to single-entry. h. They give the student a thorough knowledge of modem office methods, card systems, the use of special columns in books of accounts, etc. i. They treat fully of corporation organization, the opening and the closing of corporation books, and the duties of corporation officials. j. They explain fully cost account- ing and show how its introduction into any business is made easy. 407 Persons That Should Enroll a. Young Persons desiring to fit themselves for positions as bookkeepers and stenographers. b. Students and Graduates of busi- ness colleges and commercial schools. c. Typewriters wishing to become stenographers, bookkeepers, or experts in labor-saving office systems. d. Stenographers wanting a knowl- edge of accounting, expert office work, and management. e. Bookkeepers and persons desiring to become expert accountants. /. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors desirous of becoming accountants, pri- vate secretaries, or managers. g. Store Managers and Floor Walkers wanting to become proprietors or cor- poration officials. h. Teachers desirous of becoming expert accountants, private secretaries, and managers. i. Persons intending to engage in business for themselves. ;. Business Men and Women that keep their own books. Note — The Complete Commercial Course is intended for persons wishing a thorough busi- ness training. Persons wanting a ftill knowledge of EngHsh, Stenography, and Typewriting only, should enroll for the Complete Stenographic Course. Those desiring a knowledge of Book- keeping (including _ department-store work), corporation accounting, and cost accounting only, should enroll for the Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Business life offers great oppor- tunities to both young men and young women. Beyond the certainty of good 408 salaries for all competent workers, there are always within reach higher positions for those possessing the necessary knowledge and ability. b. Worth will manifest itself; and the employe that acquires ability to more than fulfil his duties is already started on the road to success. The information contained in our Cotirse will greatly increase his chances of promotion. The clerk that thoroughly understands bookkeeping, modern office methods, card systems, cost accounting, etc., and uses this knowledge in his daily work, will be first selected for an advanced and better-paid position. c. Our Course is a boon to the young man about to engage in business for himself; it will enable him to carry on his affairs in an economical and business- like manner; it may prevent his failure. d. To the person that has never gone to school, our Course furnishes not only a good general education, but also a knowledge of business and busi- ness principles that will enable him to fill desirable office positions or to better handle his own business affairs. e. The bookkeeper will find our instruction replete with new and useful ideas. Our Course will enable him to fill his position with greater ease to himself and better satisfaction to his employer. /. When a young man desired to get a business education it was formerly the custom for him to secure employ- ment with a reliable firm and then learn as best he could. This method, however, necessitated a long appren- ticeship with small pay. Things have 409 changed. Today the business man has neither the time nor the inchnation to make a schoolroom of his store or his office; he requires that his employes shall already be trained. We do the training. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 18 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, and KcA^s of the Course. They include in concise form the best that has been learned of up-to-date business methods and commercial subjects. The Bound Volumes were prepared to meet the re- quirements of people that must get an education, if they get it at all, by means of home study and out of the presence of a teacher. They are written in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. It is because our Bound Volumes are so clearly written as to make impos- sible a misunderstanding of what is read that they are universally accepted as the best for home study. 410 b. They are for reference purposes superior to any other books of the kind ever pubHshed. They are far ahead of the best commercial textbooks used in business colleges. The Bound Volumes contain an invaluable collection of facts, processes, and principles of the best commercial practice, and furnish infor- mation indispensable to every one requiring a knowledge of bookkeeping and modern office methods. Indeed, nowhere else can the student get so readily so much helpful, money-earning information. c. They are so fully indexed, the student can find in an instant any information pertaining to the subjects of which they treat. All questions are answered fully and in language easily understood, even by the man of little education. 411 Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course Nine subjects are taught in the Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course. The Bound. Volumes of the Reference Library contain ten, as follows : 10 LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 2931 Spelling 39 Penmanship (Slanting) ... 60 Penmanship (Vertical) . . 48 Examination Questions. . . 41 Keys 54 Single-Entry B ookkeeping 119' Double-Entry Bookkeep- ing 226 Opening, Closing, and Changing Books 27 Corporation Organization and Bookkeeping 68 Elements of Cost Account- ing 74 Bank Bookkeeping 86 Examination Sets 106 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Pages 1,241 Illustrations, 203 Instruction Papers, 27 Bound Volumes, 2 Note — The student of the Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course may have instruction in either Slanting or Vertical Penmanship (Sub- ject No. 3 or No. 4), according to his selection. The student may take up Bookkeeping as soon as he finishes Arithmetic and Penmanship; or if he writes a good hand and understands Interest and Percentage, he may begin with Bookkeeping at once if he so desires. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They fully explain the business forms in common use. b. They qualify the student to take full charge of a set of books — either 412 single-entry or double-entry — and to devise office systems adapted to various lines of business. c. They teach how to open or close a set of books, and how to change from single-entry to double-entry or from double-entry to single-entry. d. They give the student a thorough knowledge of modem office methods, card systems, the use of special columns in books of accounts, etc. e. They treat fully of corporation organization, the opening and the clo- sing of corporation books, and the duties of corporation officials. /. They fully explain cost account- ing and show how easily it can be intro- duced into any business. Persons That Should Enroll a. Young Persons wanting to fit themselves for positions as clerks, bookkeepers, and accountants. b. Students and Graduates of busi- ness colleges and commercial schools. c. Stenographers desiring a knowl- edge of bookkeeping, modem office methods, card systems, etc. d. Typewriters wishing to become bookkeepers or experts in labor-saving office systems. e. Bookkeepers and all others desir- ous of becoming expert accountants. /. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors wanting to become bookkeepers and accountants. g. Teachers wishing to become ac- countants, office experts, and managers. h. Persons intending to engage in business for themselves. 413 i. Business Men and Women that keep their own books. Note — All callings and professions are so inter- woven with the keeping of accounts and the application of business methods, a practical knowledge of bookkeeping is of inestimable value to a person in any walk of life. It enables many to transact business profitably and honor- ably that could not hope to succeed without it. The Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course is intended for persons wanting a knowl- edge of bookkeeping (including department-store work), corporation organization, and cost accounting. Those desiring a thorough business education should enroll for the Complete Com- mercial Course. Persons wishing a full knowledge of English, Stenography, and Type- writing only, should enroll for the Complete Stenographic Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. It is well known that a large num- ber of those that start in business fail; and a large percentage of these failures are due to a lack of knowledge of book- keeping and business methods. Busi- ness cannot be run properly without keeping accounts, and accounts cannot be kept properly except by compe- tent bookkeepers. Our Course includes thorough instruction in both single- entry and double-entry bookkeeping. The instruction in single-entry book- keeping clearly explains and illustrates the single-entry system and its use — both for books of a single proprietor and a partnership — and gives forms suitable for any kind of business. The instruc- tion in double-entry describes the use of a large number of special forms of books designed to show, with less labor, better results than do many systems of bookkeeping in common use. Each lesson represents a set of books suitable 414 not only for the business shown, but for many other lines. The different books cover a large field, and the book- keeper or proprietor that does not care to use any particular set in exactly the combination we give will have no trouble in adapting the set exactly to his needs. We give our student a practical working knowledge of book- keeping — ^not a smattering of cut-and- dried rules, but a live knowledge that can be applied in any business or office. Through our bookkeeping instruction the proprietor not only can see at a glance whom he owes, who owes him, and how much; but also the amount of each kind of business done, the cost of conducting that business, the profits arising from it, and from exactly what part of the business the profits were received. All this information is vital to the business man; it will enable him to plan wisely his purchases and expenses for each particular line of work, basing his calculations for the future on the past as shown by his books. This knowledge may prevent his failure. b. There are unusual opportunities for the stenographer that is also a bookkeeper. There are thousands of offices in which the work is hardly sufficient to justify the emxployment of both a stenographer and a bookkeeper; and the person able to fill both positions can command a much larger salary than if he were qualified only as a stenog- rapher or a bookkeeper. Then, again, by having a thorough knowledge of both subjects a student doubles his chances for employment and greatly 415 increases his probabilities for rapid promotion. c. New firms are being organized constantly and the trade of old firms is increasing; the field for bookkeepers is consequently always widening. d. To the business man wishing to keep his own books or to improve his present system our Course offers an opportunity to obtain the desired results with the least expenditure of time and money. e. The first-class bookkeeper has so great a knowledge of the general prin- ciples of bookkeeping that he can grasp the system of any set of books and keep or audit them intelligently; he opens and closes books, or changes them as is required. The average bookkeeper cannot do this; he some- times has difficulty in keeping his own set in good order. But there is no reason why any one with intelligence enough to become a bookkeeper of any kind should not become more expert and earn three or four times the salary of the ordinary man. The best posi- tions in banks, with trust and insurance companies, and other large corpora- tions, are open to bookkeepers of this class. The way to qualify for a better position as bookkeeper is through the study of our Bookkeeping and Busi- ness Forms Course. This Course affords thorough training in commer- cial accounting. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, 416 studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, and Ke3^s of the Course, and give a full and clear treatment of the principles of bookkeeping and their application to modem methods of accounting. They include in concise form the best that has been learned about up-to-date busi- ness methods and commercial subjects. h. They are for reference purposes superior to any other books of the kind ever published. They are far ahead of the best commercial textbooks used in business colleges. The Bound Vol- umes furnish information indispensable to every one requiring a knowledge of bookkeeping and modem office systems. They contain in concise form the methods used in the best commercial houses in the country. From no other source can the student get so quickly so much money-earning knowledge. c. They are so fully indexed, the student can find in an instant any information pertaining to the subjects of which they treat. All questions are answered fully and in language easily understood by the man of little edu- cation. 14 417 Complete Stenographic Course i Seven subjects are taught in the ; Complete Stenographic Course. The ' Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain eight, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 English Grammar 338 ] ^ ^'StioS*'°'' ^"""^ Capital!- ^^ I ^g^ 3^^^^ , 3 Letter°Writing .■;.■.■. ■.;■.::: 204 I Volume Examination Questions ... 34 J 4 Spelling... 39] 5 Penmanship (Slanting) ... 60 | 6 Penmanship (Vertical) ... 48 I 2d Bound 7 Stenography 139 | Volume 8 Typewriting _ 207 " Examination Questions. . . Pages 1,122 Illustrations, 137 Instruction Papers, 34 Bound Volumes, 2 Note — The student of the Complete Steno- graphic Course receives instruction in either Slanting or Vertical Penmanship, according to his selection. The student may take up Stenog- raphy as the first subject of his Course, if he has a fair knowledge of English. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace thorough instruc- tion in stenography. b. They give the student a full knowledge of letter writing — showing how to compose a good letter in which the grammar, punctuation, and spelling are correct. c. They give full instruction in type- writing — explaining not only the opera- tion of the machine by the touch system, but also its use in tabulating, billing, duplicating, etc. d. They give instruction in law reporting. 418 Persons That Should Enroll a. Young Persons wanting to learn stenography. b. Students and Graduates of busi- ness colleges and commercial schools. c. Students and Graduates of high schools and academies. d. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors wanting to add a knowledge of stenog- raphy to their other qualifications in order to advance. e. Typewriters wishing a knowledge of stenography. /. Stenographers desirous of review- ing the subjects of grammar, letter writing, punctuation, etc., or to increase their speed in either shorthand or typewriting. g. Young Men preparing for civil service examinations that require a knowledge of stenography and type- writing. h. Bookkeepers and Accountants wanting a knowledge of stenography and typewriting. i. Office Boys desirous of fitting themselves as stenographers. y. Private Secretaries. k. Lawyers. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The ability to write shorthand is becoming more and more a necessary qualification for young men and young women in business life. It is the step- ping-stone to advancement. The very nature of their work places stenographers in close touch with their employers; and the person that writes the firm's correspondence is the one that learns 419 the business quickest. The thoroughly trained stenographer not only gets a good salary at the start, but also has the advantage that his work cannot fail to be noticed. He has, further- more, good chances of promotion because of the knowledge he gains of the inner workings of the business. In many cases stenographers, on account of the opportunities the work offers, have been able to advance rapidly to positions of trust and responsibility. h. Stenography affords a pleasant and profitable opening for women wishing to earn their own living. While there are hundreds of so-called stenographers glad of employment at from $4 to $5 a week, really competent stenographers are sure of good positions at much higher salaries, even at the start. A capable young woman stenog- rapher can command twice the salary of one that is not capable, and there is not a city where she cannot readily secure a good position. Through our instruction any young woman of aver- age ability can soon qualify as a com- petent stenographer. c. There are good openings in the government service for competent men stenographers and typewriters. The number of eligibles has not been suffi- cient to meet the needs of the service; and the prospect for advancement is good. d. A good stenographer never need lack employment; for nearly every business employs one or more, and the demand for those really able will always exceed the supply. 420 Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, which were prepared to meet the requirements of the student that must get an education, if he gets it at all, by means of home study and with no instructor by his side. It is essential that the instruction for this purpose be so forcefully written and illustrated that the student will take it into his mind unaided; and so well do our Bound Volumes meet this requirement, they are universally ac- cepted as the best for home study. They are easily understood, even by the man of little education. Many students have acquired a thorough knowledge of the principles of stenog- raphy and typewriting by thoughtfully studying the Bound Volumes alone. This knowledge, supplemented with practice, will enable the student to acquire speed, accuracy, and ability in taking dictation and transcribing his notes. Our Bound Volumes are in- valuable to every one that would 421 be a competent stenographer and type- writer. b. They are of great value as ref- erence books. They are superior to the best textbooks used by business coUeges. The Bound Volumes contain many special features not found in any other single work on stenography. They not only give the student a good knowledge of English, Stenography, and Typewriting, but also of their practical application to business. The Bound Volumes embrace the methods of many of the best reporters, stenographers, and typewriters in the country. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 422 Banking and Banking Law Course Nine subjects are taught in the Banking and Banking Law Course. The Bound Volumes of the Reference Library contain thirteen, as follows: LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Single-Entry Bookkeeping 119' Double-Entry Bookkeep- ing 226 Opening, Closing, and Changing Books 27 Corporation Organization and Bookkeeping 68 Elements of Cost Account- ing 74 Bank Bookkeeping 86 Examination Sets 106 History of Banking 26 National and State Banks 120 National Bank Supervision 54 Savings Banks 83 Trust Companies. 58 Examination Questions. . . 12 The Law of Commercial Paper 194 The Law of Banks and Banking 109 Supplement Examination Questions. 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume • 15. Pages 1,466 Illustrations, 369 Instruction Papers, 27 Bound Volumes, 3 Note — The subjects in light-face type are not included in this Course. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They give a concise outline of the development of banking — both foreign and domestic. h. They describe the incorporation of both national and state banks and 423 treat of their management and opera- tion. c. They deal with the government supervision of national banks — cover- ing their organization, reorganization, examination, and the conversion of state banks into national banks. d. They explain the purposes of clearing houses and their methods of operation. e. They contain the history of the development of savings banks. The incorporation of both mutual and stock savings banks as well as their administration and the system of bookkeeping used is given due con- sideration. /. They take up the organization, supervision, operation, and administra- tion of trust companies. g. They give the law of commercial paper — ^both English and American codification. The requisities of negoti- able instruments, indorsement, pre- sentment of bills and notes for pay- ment, dishonor, protest, liabilities of parties, rules governing when laws conflict, bills of lading, warehouse receipts, and forgeries — all are treated of in a clear and concise manner. Every business man should have this knowledge ; it may prevent his making costly mistakes. h. They give full instruction in the law of banks and banking. i. They contain a digest of the banking laws of the states and terri- tories in the United States and give the banking law of Canada. y. They embrace the national-bank act. 424 Persons That Should Enroll a. Bank Directors and Trustees. b. Officers of national and state banks. c. Officers of savings banks. d. Officers of trust companies. e. Paying Tellers and Assistants. /. Receiving Tellers and Assistants. g. Note Tellers and Assistants. h. Discount Clerks. t. Collection Clerks. j. Bank Bookkeepers. k. Young Men wanting to fit them- selves for positions with banks or trust companies. /. Students and Graduates of busi- ness colleges and commercial schools. m. Auditors. n. Bank Examiners. o. Business Men generally. Why Persons Should Enroll a. A knowledge of the legal side of banking is of vital importance to any bank official. Without it he is con- tinually in the dark as to what course to follow in order to protect the bank. Our instruction is his surest guide: it will give him the law of commercial paper, the law of banks and banking, and the methods of supervision of both state and national banks; it will guard him against making costly mistakes. b. With the great number of banks already in existence and the many new ones being organized every year, any clerk should have little trouble to rise. Promotion is won by efficiency rather than influence. The clerk bending every effort toward fitting himself 425 for the duties of the place above him is sure to forge ahead. c. Today the young man in the bank has too little opportunity to get, even by slow experience, a knowledge of the various methods and functions of his institution. It is a mistake for him to think he must begin at the bottom rung of the ladder. In bank- ing, as in everything else, worth counts. And the man able to prove his ability will soon outstrip the man not ready for promotion — even though the latter be an older employe. d. These are busy times in the banking world, and there are great opportunities for the man that knows the business and is full of energy and initiative: he can soon push his way to the top, where a good salary awaits him. e. To the bank clerk having a resolute purpose to amount to some- thing and realizing that experience is a slow teacher, we offer a way of getting in a short period information it has taken some of the best bankers in the country a lifetime to acquire. Prepared by experts and practical bank- ers, our instruction gives the banking law and represents the best that is known about banking. It enables the student to profit by the long experience of others and gives him the very knowl- edge he must have before he can fill satisfactorily a position of trust and responsibility. /. The wide-awake bookkeeper, mail clerk, or discount clerk is eagerly waiting to seize any opportunity that will help push him up to the position 426 of teller. But he realizes how futile his efforts will be to reach this valuable post without a thorough knowledge of the entire banking business. He knows he cannot acquire the necessary instruc- tion through the daily routine, nor has he time to plod through vaguely written textbooks on banking. We can help such a man by giving him knowledge that no amount of experi- ence can give, and without requiring him to wade through a mass of non- essentials. Our Course contains the very essence of banking and banking law and strikes at the very root of what is required in all branches of banking. g. Except where f_a bank employe has been promoted through all the departments of a bank, he can have only a superficial knowledge of the detail work — of the legal reasons why certain things must be done as they are, and of the state and the national requirements. Every bank employe should know bank bookkeeping and its relation to the bank statement, which every bank is required to make, and to the report made by the bank examiner. Our Course contains this information. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 427 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course, and give the student a ^ood knowledge of banking and bank- ing law. Nearly all textbooks on banking require the student to wade through a great mass of unnecessary material to get the information he needs; nor is the ordinary textbook suited to the requirements of the home-study student. Books for class- room M^oric are written for the hand of the teacher and of necessity must be supplemented with his personal work in the presence of the student. Our Bound Volumes contain nothing that is not necessary for the student to know: their facts are arrayed in that thorough, incisive, and straight- to-the-point manner so essential for the student that must study with no instructor by his side. They are the only satisfactory books for home study. b. They are so fully indexed, the student can find in an instant any information pertaining to the subjects of which they treat. c. They are for reference purposes superior to any other books of the kind ever published. They are far ahead of the ordinary textbook on banking. The Bound Volumes contain an invaluable collection of facts and processes of the best banking practice, and furnish information indispensable 428 to every on^ requiring a knowledge of banking and banking law. Indeed, nowhere else can the student get so readily so much helpful information. d. They contain not only our Instruction Papers in bank book- keeping but also the Instruction Papers in general bookkeeping. 429 Complete Electrotherapeutic Course and Its Subordi- nate Courses LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 Direct Currents 2 Magnetism and Electro- magnetism 3 Electrostatics and High- Frequency Currents. . . . 4 Accessory Apparatus Examination Questions. . . 5 Technique and Physiology of Static and Other High- Frequency Cur- rents 6 Technique and Physiology of Direct Currents . . . . 7 Technique and Physiology of Coil Currents Examination Questions. . . 8 Physics of Roentgen Rays 9 Skiagraphy 10 Practical Applications of Roentgen Rays 11 Physics of Light and Cau- tery. . . ._ _ Examination Questions . . . 12 Therapeutic Uses of Elec- tricity in Gynecology . . 13 Electricity in Diseases of the Nervous System . . . 14 Electricity in Surgery. . . . Examination Questions. . . 15 Electricity in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose, and Throat 16 Electricity in Genito-Uri- nary Diseases 17 Therapeutics of Static Electricity 18 Electricity in Dentistry . . Examination Questions. . . PAGES 117 80 79 19J 64 122 124 13 941 37 108 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 32 17 123 I 211 r 95 4th Bound Volume 13. 120 149 111 159 19 5th Bound Volume Pages 2,002 Illustrations, 770 Instruction Papers, 18 Bound Volumes, 5 430 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They include thorough instruc- tion in the generation, measurement, and control of electric currents of all characters, thus qualifying the practi- tioner to understand fully the principles and processes involved in all applica- tions he may have occasion to make. b. They explain fully the construc- tion and method of operation of all instruments, electrodes, and other appa- ratus used in the treatment of disease with electricity. c. They are profusely illustrated, showing the actual application of elec- trodes to diseased surfaces, to surfaces leading to diseased parts, etc. d. They include all the latest instruc- tion regarding the generation of Roent- gen rays and their employment in medicine and surgery. e. They embrace all the known applications of electricity in dentistry. /. They are written in a simple and straight - to - the - point style, insuring quick comprehension. They are there- fore the best reference papers for the practitioner without time for system- atic study and recitation. g. They contain the best illustra- tions ever made of electrotherapeutie subjects. Persons That Should Enroll a. Physicians. b. Surgeons. c. Nurses. d. Dentists. e. Medical Students. 431 Note — Field Men are urged to call on all the recent graduates (of medical colleges) in their Routes. While our Course is attractive to all practitioners, it offers special advantages to those whose practice is yet to be established. Why Persons Should Enroll a. In view of the recent great strides in electrotherapeutics, the treatment of disease with electric currents and Roentgen rays is no longer restricted to the hospitals and the offices of cele- brated specialists. The time is not far distant when the sick of every city, town, village, and hamlet will enjoy the relief that electrical treatment will give — and that at the hands of the regular family physician. The practitioners first to adopt the new methods will be the first to realize the increased prac- tice and the larger income that is sure to result. b. About electrical apparatus there is always a certain charm that appeals to patients, and they submit hopefully to electrical treatment, often while without faith in anything else. Possess- ing the knowledge of electrophysics and electrophysiology contained in our In- struction Papers, the physician will not only maintain his patient's interest and hope by bringing about beneficial -results, but he will be able to cure per- manently many cases that have not yielded to other treatment at all. c. The only correct treatment of stricture known today is by means of the galvanic current, which cures stric- ture by liquefying and absorbing it. The cure is permanent. The physician has an excellent field for scientific 432 achievement in the treatment of stric- ture, if he follows the instruction given in our Course. There are many other chronic maladies frequently encoun- tered, in the treatment of which elec- tricity is the practitioner's best friend. Among these are neuralgia; gonorrheal arthritis ; constipation ; intestinal ob- struction; gynecological diseases; dis- eases of the nervous system; hysteria; neurasthenia; rheumatism; gout; and diabetes. d. In the homes of the busy practi- tioner's patients, in the hospital, and in the sanitarium, the nurse will find steady, pleasant, and remunerative employment if she has a good knowl- edge of electricity, its generation, and its medical application. Our Nurses' Electrical Course will give the elec- trical knowledge required, either while the student is studying to become a nurse or after she has graduated at her training school. e. Any physician without a Roentgen ray outfit, and a thorough knowledge of how to secure its best results with safety to his patients, is deprived of one of the most valuable agents known to the medical world. In the presence of fractures, dislocations, injured joints, and certain diseases of the osseous sys- tem, and in locating foreign bodies, a well-lit fluoroscopic screen affords the only accurate means of examination. /. As a source of motive power for the various mechanical devices peculiar to dentistry, such as drills, burrs, bur- nishers, and mallets, electricity has many unique advantages. Electrically driven appliances have a steadiness of 433 motion that insures comfort to the \ patient, and freedom to the operator. For exploring the mouth and accessory cavities, the miniature electric lamp is far superior to all other sources of light. And when strictly limited applications of heat are needed, electricity meets the requirements as no other agent can. The dentist using good electrical appa- ratus under our instruction is sure to prosper. With the direct current he can destroy any amount of tissue he desires ; he can render teeth insensitive ; he can sterilize teeth; and he can dis- integrate abnormal growths. Courses Extracted From the Complete Electrotherapeutic Course Gynecological Electrotherapeu- tic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 12. This Course is intended for physicians, surgeons, and medical students desiring a knowledge of how to employ electricity in treating diseases peculiar to women. Genito-Urinary Electrothera- peutic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 16. This Course is intended for physicians, surgeons, and medical students desiring a knowledge of how to employ elec- tricity in treating diseases peculiar to the genito-urinary system. Surgical Electrotherapeutic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, and 14. This Course is intended for surgeons and medical students desiring a knowledge of how to employ electricity in surgery. Neurological Electrotherapeu- tic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 434 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and_ 13. This Course is intended for physicians, sur- geons, and medical students desiring a knowledge of how to employ electricity in treating diseases of the brain, the spinal cord, the peripheral nerves, and the muscles. Eye, Ear, Nose, and Throat Elec- TROTHERAPEUTic CouRSE, including Sub- jects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 15. This Course is intended for specialists desiring a knowledge of how to employ electricity in treating diseases of the organs named. Roentgen Rays Course, including subjects Nos. 8, 9, and 10. This Course includes instruction in the operation and care of all apparatus used by the fore- most Roentgen ray workers. It gives full instruction in the generation of the rays, and thoroughly explains every de- tail of their application. Our Course comprises the only complete instruction ever written on Roentgen ray work. Nurses' Electrical Course, in- cluding subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11. This Course will increase the efficiency and earning capacity of any nurse. Note— Arithmetic is included in this Course. The student, however, may omit this subject by passing our examination. The Arithmetic Instruction Papers are not included in the Bound Volumes. Dental Electrotherapeutic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 18. This Course is intended for dentists and dental stu- dents. Note — The five Bound Volumes containing- the Complete Electrotherapeutic Course are fur- nished to each student enrolling for any of its extracted Courses. 435 Time Required to Finish the Complete Electrotherapeutic Course, or One of Its Extracted Courses That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Complete Electro- therapeutic Course in less than 1 year and some finish one of its extracted Courses in less than 6 months. The average student requires a little more time. Remarks The attractiveness of our electro- therapeutic proposition is increased a thousandfold. Physicians, surgeons, nurses, dentists, and medical students may now secure the five Bound Volumes containing our Complete Electro- therapeutic Course, for about a third the regular price we charge for furnishing a student with pamphlet Instruction Papers, Bound Volumes, and criticism and correction of his written recitations. Lack of time to study systematically and recite to us need no longer keep our instruction from the hands of the thousands that want it for consultation. 436 Complete Commercial Law Course LIST OF SUBJECTS. PAGES The Law in General 48 ~ The Law of Personal Rights 35 The Law of Property 201 The Law of Wills 21 The Law of Contracts. . . . 254 Examination Questions. . . 29. The Law of Commercial Paper 194 The Law of Banks and Banking 110 The Law of Partnership. . 135 The Law of Corporations 125 The Law of Building Asso- ciations 50 The Law of Beneficial As- sociations 23 Examination Questions .. . 37 The Law of Agency 67 The Law of Master and Servant 30 The Law of Bailments. ... 92 The Law of Landlord and Tenant 70 The Law of Mechanics Liens 28 The Law of Guaranty and Suretyship 32 The Law of Executors and Administrators 80 The Law of Debtor and Creditor 128 The Law of Business and Commerce 22 The Law of Trusts 50 Examination Questions. . . 41 437 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 22 The Law of Husband and Wife 61 23 The Law of Divorce 45 24 The Law of Parent and Child 26 25 The Law of Guardian and Ward 20 26 The Law of Notaries Pub- lic 19 27 The Law of Justices of the Peace ^^ 28 The Law of Patents, Copy- right, and Trade Marks 97 29 The Law of Insurance. ... 156 30 The Law of Mines and Mining 85 Examination Questions .. . 38 Appendix 512' 5th Bd. Vol. Forms 421 6th Bd. Vol. Pages 3,417 Instruction Papers, 61 Bound Volumes, 6 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They embrace every subject of importance in commercial law in the United States and Canada. b. They treat thoroughly of the principles and rules that govern busi- ness relations. c. They make clear the many legal technicalities that ordinarily are con- fusing. d. They make easy to understand every principle and application they present. e. They are not only instructive, but fascinating. They are so concisely written, and contain so much pertinent information, no effort is required to study them. Once the student begins any subject, he is reluctant to lay down the Instruction Paper before he has mastered its contents. 438 Persons That Should Enroll a. Presidents; Secretaries; Treasur- ers; Directors; and all Corporation Officials. b. Partners; Managers; Superinten- dents; Accountants; Bookkeepers. c. Bankers; Bank Officers; Bank Clerks. ■ d. Insurance Officials and Agents. e. Merchants; Clerks. /. Justices of the Peace; Magis- trates; Aldermen. g. Notaries Public. 7i. Law Students. i. Administrators ; Guardians ; Trus- tees. /. Real-Estate Agents. k. Contractors and Builders. /. Mechanics. m. Farmers. n. Patentees. o. Credit Men. p. Collectors. q. Conveyancers. r. Municipal Employes. s. Stenographers. Note — There is really no class of persons to whom a knowledge of Commercial Law would not be worth much more than the cost of our Course. We have arranged a number of special Courses in commercial law for those persons wanting to study only that branch pertaining solely to their business. The Courses are as follows, each name indicating the class to which the Course is suited: the Law for Corporation Managers, etc., Course; the Law for Business Men Course; the Law for Clerks Course; the Law for Stenographers Course; the Law for Bookkeepers Course; the Law for Secre- taries Course; the Law for Contractors and Builders Course; the Law for Credit Men Course; the Law for Collectors Course; the Law for Real-Estate Agents Course; the Law for Conveyancers Course; the Law for 439 Insurance Agents Course; the Law for Justices of the Peace Course; the Law for Magistrates Course; the Law for Aldermen Course; the Law for Notaries Public Course; the Law for Town Clerks Course; and the Law for Municipal Employes Course. The six Bound Volumes containing the Com- plete Commercial Law Course are furnished to each student of any of these Special Courses. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Mere opinion as to what ought to be right or wrong in the eyes of the law, is an unsafe guide in any transac- tion. Our Course explains what the law is, and gives explicit directions for avoiding the many legal oversights and omissions to which all classes of people are liable. b. The law is a statement of cus- toms, constitutional and legislative enactments, and court decisions. It is easy to fail to comply with some of the many requirements or to do some forbidden thing unwittingly. No per- son, however desirous of doing right, can safely conduct his own affairs or those of another unless he has positive knowledge of the principles taught in our Course. c. Our Course will increase the relia- bility of any employe, and put him in a position to meet the demand of em- ployers for men that can be implicitly trusted with important duties. d. Any agent may learn from our Course his duties to his principal; his rights in his relations with his principal and a third party; to what extent he can bind his principal by his acts; and the extent to which he becomes per- sonally liable for his acts. 440 e. Our Course is the most thorough, clear, and concise work ever prepared on commercial law. It is written in an easy and entertaining style, and may be readily understood by any reader of average intelligence. /. Every business man for his own protection should know the law of commercial transactions. Without this knowledge he may make mistakes that it will take years of hard work to recover from. Our instruction is his best safe- guard. Our ■ Complete Commercial Law Course will equip the student to conduct his business better; it offers the opportunity, to get a good knowl- edge of the well-established rules and principles of law governing everyday business transactions. We give the student a clear understanding of the facts and processes of ordinary business and equip him Math information indis- pensable to him in everyday business life. How Our Student Gains a Knowledge of the Laws of the Different States Each student is furnished with an' Appendix of 512 pages, embracing the legislative enactments bearing on the subjects of the Course in various states and jurisdictions. Remarks The Course is replete with reference to decisions of the Canadian Courts. The abbreviations U. C. C. P., U. C. Ch., and U. C. Q. B. (which mean Upper Canada Common Pleas Reports, Upper Canada Chancery Reports, and Upper 441 Canada Queen Bench Reports, appear at the bottom of many pages of our Instruction Papers, showing that^ we have been careful to state the decided law of Canada on the various subjects we treat of. No complete course on any subject of the law could be written without reference to the principles and rules of law as they pertain in England and Canada. In fact, the law as it exists in the United States and Canada today had its first existence in England. If a person has no time for systematic lesson study and therefore does not care to enroll for our Course of instruc- tion, though wanting the Bound Vol- umes, he may secure them for about a third of the price of the Course. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives to it. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about IJ years. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They embrace the Instruction Papers of the Course ; a Book of Forms showing the best modem forms for prac- tical use ; and an Appendix containing the legislative enactments of various states and jurisdictions in reference to 442 the subjects treated in the Course. Our Bound Volumes are written in an entertaining style and are easily under- stood by the reader of average intelli- gence. They give the student a clear knowledge of commercial law — knowl- edge that will broaden immeasureably his view of business affairs and enable him to avoid costly legal troubles and mistakes. b. They contain all the subjects properly included in a complete com- mercial law course. For reference pur- poses they are invaluable. The refer- ences to various authorities, reports, and statutes are given in the form of numbered foot-notes under the state- ments they are used to illustrate. These citations are numerous and render it a simple matter to find plenty of decisions, etc. c. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 443 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume ' Complete Advertising Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Advertisement Construc- tion 25 2 Principles of Display 20 3 Illustrations in Newspaper Ads 27 4 Engraving Processes .... 26 5 Ads for Various Busi- nesses 31 6 Cyclopedia of Retail Ads . . 98 7 Printing-House Methods . . 154 Examination Questions .. . 14 8 Copy Preparation and Proof Reading 33 9 Supplementary Advertis- ing 35 10 Retail Advertising Man- agement 37 1 1 Conducting an Advertising Office 26 12 Department-Store Adver- tising 63 13 Department-Store Adver- tising Management 76 14 Ad Illustration 136 Examination Questions .. . 14 Pages 815 Illustrations, 402 Instruction Papers, 13 Bound Volumes, 2 Note — No recitations are asked for in sub- ject 14; this subject is added to the Course for reference purposes only. The student of our Complete Advertising Course is furnished with an I. C. S. Ad- Writers' Type Gauge and an I. C.S. Ad-Writers' Copy Table together with a sufficient number of I. C. S. Ad- Writers' Charts to finish the Course. We do not furnish a separate type book, as specimen pages of leading type faces are included in the Instruction Papers. Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They are the most practical, thorough, and concise ever prepared on ad writing. 444 b. They give the student a thorough Ij knowledge of the principles of ad wri- ting, and will enable him to write effective ads for any product or any I business. c. They teach the student to dis- I cover quickly the selling points of an [ article and present them in the most j effective manner. d. They require the student to write and lay out original ads. e. They give the student a thorough knowledge of typographical and illus- trative display. /. They give the student all the knowledge of engraving and printing the ad writer needs. g. They give the student all the information necessary to enable him to prepare copy, read proof, and conduct his business with the printer. h. They give instruction in the prep- aration of miscellaneous retail adver- tising matter, in retail advertising management, and in department-store advertising. i. They are replete with illustrations . y. They enable the student to write practical, effective ads almost as soon as he begins to study. k. They do not teach drawing; but they teach what kind of illustrations are suitable for newspaper and maga- zine ads, and how to display illustra- tions in ads to the best advantage. /. They do not include instruction in grammar nor rhetoric; they teach only what applies directly to adver- tising, and that is treated completely and thoroughly. 445 m. They are free from problems and mathematical work — excepting a few simple calculations as to the amount of type that will go into a given space, etc. Persons That Should Enroll a. Clerks. h. Salesmen. c. Bookkeepers. d. Young Men wanting to learn ad writing. e. Young Women desiring to become ad writers. /. Retail Merchants. g. Advertising Solicitors. h. Printers. i. Ad Writers. j. Students and Graduates of ordi- nary ad- writing schools. k. Students and Graduates of high schools and business colleges. /. Show-Card Writers and Window Trimmers. m. Persons wanting to increase their salaries by adding a knowledge of ad writing to their present qualifications. Note — So closely related are the subjects of advertising, show-card writing, window trim- ming, and mercantile decorating, that frequently a prospective student is found desiring a knowl- edge of all. Or, on the other hand, he may want to study only such a combination as he thinks he needs. To meet the demands of such a per- son we combine the Complete Advertising Course, the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course, and the Window Trimming and Mercantile Decoration Course; or the Com- plete Advertising Course and the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course; or the Complete Advertising Course and the Window Trim- ming and Mercantile Decoration Course; or the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course and the Window Trimming and Mercantile Decoration Course so as to give him exactly the knowledge he wants. The first Instruction 446 Papers of each division of these Courses are sent to the student as soon as he enrolls, and he niay study one, two, or three divisions at once. Why Persons Should Enroll a. This is the advertising age. In fact no business education is complete without a knowledge of advertising. For advertising purposes there is expended in the tjnited States over one hundred million dollars a year. Much of this is wastefully spent by people ignorant of how to write ads that will sell goods. Our Course will enable merchants to advertise with the greatest possible certainty of success. Through our Course any one possessing average intelligence and a fair knowl- edge of English can learn to write business-getting ads. Here is the oppor- tunity for ambitious persons to qualify for more interesting and better-paid work. b. A revolution has been made in advertising within the last few years. Advertising has become a profession. The ad writer of today must quickly see the selling features of his wares; moreover, he must know where, when, and how to advertise. c. In order for the ad writer to ana- lyze quickly any article of merchandise, find its selling points, and write and lay out an ad that will so present these selling points as to impel the reader to become a purchaser, he must have the information contained in our Course. d. Today the business man that does not advertise properly is sure to lose ground. And it is next to impos- sible to start in for oneself without 447 advertising. How important it is, then, that the knowledge contained in our Course should be had by every clerk or other employe expecting to conduct successfully a business of his own. e. Hundreds of young men and women that might be earning good pay as ad writers are practically wasting their time at uncongenial and unre- munerative work. Any one having ordinary intelligence and a common- school education can learn to write good advertisements. The ability to write catchy effective advertisements is the result of the right kind of training combined with practical experience. Our Course supplies the best training it is possible to secure, and the instruc- tion is so practical that the student can secure experience almost as soon as he begins to study. /. The increase of advertising matter within the last few years is simply astounding. New lines of business are advertising largely, and old lines are doubling their advertising. So great is the demand for advertisement writers, it is impossible to secure enough com- petent men to do the work. A student that studies our Course and is faithful in his work, can qualify in a few months to write good ads ; this means pleasanter work and more pay. g. Our Course is the only Course that provides for thorough criticism and correction of the student's work. A helpful personal letter is written to the student regarding each written reci- tation he sends to us. h. A unique feature of our Course is a comprehensive cyclopedia of retail 448 advertisements, headlines, and selling points. This will prove invaluable to the beginner in helping him form ideas of his own. i. Our Course includes more than twenty times as much practical infor- mation as any other advertising course. /. This Course contains the only adequate treatment of department- store advertising in existence. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in less than 7 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers and Examination Questions of the Course. These Papers having successfully met the exacting require- ments of thousands of students, it is evident that the Bound Volumes treat of principles and applications of adver- tising with more thoroughness and con- ciseness than is possible in a work pre- pared on any other plan. They are in fact an epitome of common-sense appli- cation. For easy gradation; for con- ciseness; for intelligent adherence to the important features of their subjects; 15 449 and for practicability, they are un- equaled. From no other source can a student get so quickly so much money- earning knowledge. b. They are invaluable for reference purposes. They are better than an encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- sively to the subject of advertising, and the details of that subject are explained with thoughtful care and a proper regard for the possible shortcomings of the reader. Every important item is indexed according to all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all items classified and indexed, the student can find in a moment the answer to a practical question it might otherwise take weeks to obtain. c. They are written in simple style, particular care having been taken to avoid unusual words. The information they contain is so set forth as to be easily understood — even by the man of little education. They begin with the simplest and most elementary prin- ciples and lead easily and quickly to the best theory and practice of the work. 450 Advanced Show-Card Writing Course I.IST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Show-Card Writing 77 2 Show-Card Design and Ornament 52 3 Letter Formation 35 Pages 164 Illustrations, 178 Lettering Plates, 22 Instruction Papers. 4 Bound Volumes, 1 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They teach how to write attrac- tive and artistic show-cards, window signs, store banners, etc. b. They contain full instruction in freehand lettering, taking up the free- hand alphabets adapted to show-card writing and explaining in detail the formation of their different letters. c. They qualify the student for doing freehand brush work in water colors, shading, etc. d. They teach how to employ the various styles of letters to the best advantage. e. They are replete with illustrations. /. They embrace every subject prop- erly included in a show-card writing course. g. They are free from mathematical work. h. They are the most thorough, practical, and comprehensive ever pre- pared on show-card writing. i. They contain practical examples in design, ornament, and inscription arrangement. 451 Persons That Should Enroll a. Clerks in retail stores. h. Retail Merchants. c. Window Trimmers. d. Show-Card Writers. e. Letterers. /. Sign Painters. g. Salesmen. h. Bookkeepers. i. Floor Walkers. j. Retail-Store Managers. k. Ad Writers. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Show-cards are recognized as one of the best means of interesting and influencing the public to buy. No merchant can afford to be without them. Displayed directly in connec- tion with the goods to which they relate, well-written cards make a striking appeal to shoppers. Our Course will enable the student to write cards setting forth the merits of any merchandise in a clear and convincing manner. h. Clerks and other store employes can quickly make themselves more valuable to their employer by learning to write attractive and business-bring- ing show-cards. c. Our Course solves the problem for young men and women eager to better their condition. Opening the way to a comparatively new and uncrowded field, this instruction offers to young men a profitable profession, and to young women a clean and remunerative line of work that may be done at home. d. Show-card writing has risen to the dignity of a profession. Any person 4.52 possessing ordinary intelligence may at slight expense for studio equipment start in business for himself. Many merchants unable to employ a show- card writer constantly are glad to secure the occasional services of an expert when a contract can be made for a stated number of cards each week. By thus supplying several merchants, a competent person may build up a profitable business of his own. Our Course gives the student in a clear and concise manner the information neces- sary to his success. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Show-Card Writers' Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. A student not pre- pared to pay cash in advance or $10 down, can study Show-Card Writing (the first Instruction Paper of his Course) until his payments amount to $10, when the Outfit will be furnished. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 6 months. The average student re- quires a little more time. 453 Window Trimming and Mer- cantile Decoration Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Backgrounds _ 173 Examination Questions ... 23 2 Dress Goods 83 3 White Goods 13 4 Clothing 26 Examination Questions .. . 16 5 Foot, Hand, and Head Covering 6 Men and Women's Fur- nishings 7 Handkerchiefs 8 Linens 9 House Furnishings Examination Questions. . . 10 Miscellaneous Merchandise 11 Decorations 12 Collection of Artistic Dis- plays 13 Illumination and Motion in Displays 14 Fixtures and Useful Infor- mation 15 Ideas for Window Deco- rations Examination Questions. . . 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume 3d Bound Volume 4th Bound Volume 18 37. 35 f 15 30 17. 26 22 28 11 J Pages 645 Illustrations. 1,510 Instruction Papers, 42 Bound Volumes, 4 Note — Students of this Course are furnished with 1 year's subscription to the "Merchants Record and Show Window." This is the most up-to-date periodical published in the interests of window trimmino-, and is the official organ of the National Association of Window Trimmers of America. The subscriptions of students enrolling before the twentieth of the current month will begin with the following month's issue. The subscriptions of students enrolling after the twentieth of the month will begin with the issue of the second month following. 454 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They will enable any student of average intelligence to qualify as an expert window trimmer and store decorator with any line of merchandise. b . They give the student full instruc- tion in window trimming and store dec- orating. c. They contain the fullest and most explicit directions for getting the best color effects. d. They are the most thorough, . practical, and complete ever prepared on mercantile decoration. e. They give the student a thorough knowledge of the various materials suit- able for decorative and display purposes. /. They teach the student the vari- ous methods of displaying merchandise. g. They are replete with suggestive ideas for window and store decoration. h. They are free from mathematical work. i. They include instruction in deco- rations for special occasions, as outside store decorations, floats, booths, etc. /. They require the student to analyze and describe in his own words the various displays shown. k. They teach the student stencil and fresco work. /. They give instruction in the use of electricity for illumination in displays. They treat of motion in displays — showing how attractiveness may be enhanced by means of moving objects. m. The}^ are replete with the best illustrations ever made of mercantile decorations. 455 n. They require the student to send photographs of his best work for inspec- tion and criticism. 0. They require the student to state the time consumed in performing the various operations illustrated. p. They are so clear that much of the information they contain is readily understood from the many illustrated demonstrations; these show in detail the successive steps in the formation of a display. The illustrations are so clear that reference to the text is often almost unnecessary. Persons That Should Enroll a. Clerks. h. Salesmen. c. Retail-Store Managers. d. Floor Walkers. e. Bookkeepers. /. Young Men that desire to learn window trimming. g. Retail Merchants that do their own trimming. h. Students and Graduates of high schools and business colleges. i. Show-Card Writers. j. Ad Writers. k. Window Trimmers. 1. Persons that sell merchandise at retail, or that desire to become such salesmen. Why Persons Should Enroll a. Striking window displays and artistic store decorations make an effective appeal to the shopping public. Every up-to-date business man knows the importance of having his store 456 present an attractive appearance. This is the merchant's method of displaying goods and securing trade. Many mer- chants that cannot afford to employ a professional trimmer appreciate the business-bringing value of strong dis- plays, and have good ideas as to how the work should be done; but through lack of training they are unable to put their ideas to practical use. Our Course will enable merchants either to do or to direct their own trimming. Through our instruction any person of ordinary ability and average good taste can qualify as a first-class trimmer. b. Window trimming is now a recognized profession, and a profitable one. The expert is in constant demand and receives good pay for his services. c. The clerk or salesman that can create strong, attractive, business-bring- ing displays has a knowledge that insures higher wages as a clerk and a good chance of advancement to the more important and better-paid posi- tion of trimmer. d. Our Course is a boon to the young man about to engage in the mer- cantile business for himself. Through our instruction he can acquire informa- tion that will prove a potent factor in his commercial success. e. The trimmer will find our Course of great value as a reference work and a source of inspiration in the production of original effects. It embraces the latest ideas of the art. Our instruction will give the student engaged in the practice of mercantile decorating a new and enlarged working knowledge 457 that will enable him to originate striking, business-creating displays. /. The business man is quick to perceive the worth of employes that take an active interest in his affairs, and he is glad to show his appreciation by advancing those that are striving to help him. How can a clerk or salesman better and quicker bring himself to his employer's notice than by an attractive arrangement of the merchandise at his counter ? g. A special and remarkably strong feature of this Course is a descriptive list of the most successful displays of the past 10 years as worked out by the ablest trimmers. This will be of inestimable value to the beginner in assisting him in forming ideas and con- ceptions of his own. It is really an inexhaustible mine of ideas and sugges- tions for display composition. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 6 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Voiumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers and Examination Questions of the Course. They are the most valuable 458 work ever prepared, on mercantile decorating. They treat the subject fully and in detail. They are the only volumes in existence suitable for home study. Some students have enrolled simply to secure these Bound Volumes, and have achieved success through the study of them alone, without sub- mitting recitations to us. b. They are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They contain the latest and best ideas on window trimming and store decoration. For reference purposes their value is almost unlimited. No- where else can the student find such practical, helpful answers to the many different questions that come up in his daily practice. The student possessing them has a complete up-to-date work unexcelled for clearness and concise- ness, and containing exactly the infor- mation necessary to his success. 459 Complete Lettering and Sign Painting Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Elements of Lettering 99 1 2 Lettering and Sign Painting 68 I 1st Bound 3 The Formation of Letters . 146 | Volume Examination Questions ... 4 J 4 Sign and Banner Making. . . SSI 5 Practical Design and Oma- I 2d Bound ment 161 ( Volume Examination Questions ... 4 J Pages 565 Illustrations, 379 Instruction Papers, 5 Lettering Plates, 34 Bound Volumes, 2 Elements of Lettering begins with the history of the alphabet; gives rules for punctuation; includes instruction in lettering, explaining how to space, shade, condense, elongate, telescope, and interlace letters; treats of orna- mental forms of letters ; tells how to get artistic effects in ribbon, panel, and inscription designs ; takes up the making of stencil patterns; and teaches the use of drawing instruments. Lettering and Sign Painting treats of the tools and materials used in sign painting; tells how to prepare surfaces for various kinds of painting and letter- ing; shows how to gild on glass, wood, and metal; contains instruction in embossing; and explains the construc- tion of relief letters, and their application to various styles of signs. The Formation of Letters contains thirty-four Lettering Plates and gives detailed instruction for drawing them: there are thirty — each containing an alphabet exactly suited to the sign 460 painter's needs; and the remaining four are devoted to color work, consisting of plain and fancy shading, inscription designing in color, monograms, indexes, and bands. This instruction is the best ever prepared on lettering, and is invaluable to the person having letter- ing to do; it will not only enable the student to lay out all the principal styles of English alphabets, but will qualify him to form correctly German, Greek, and Hebrew letters. Sign and Banner Making describes the manufacture of signs; tells about carv- ing, mirror silvering, white-acid process, glass chipping, frosted window panels, etching on gold leaf, and many other subjects the up-to-date sign painter must have a knowledge of; treats of advertising signs; explains how to make banners; and gives valuable information about charges for signs and lettering. This instruction is thor- oughly practical and fully prepares the student to handle successfully and profitably all work of this character. It enables him to engage in business without having had experience in a sign-painting establishment. Practical Design and Ornament con- tains a large collection of photographs of original and artistic signs. These photographs represent the best work of leading sign painters and are of almost infinite value to the student in suggest- ing ideas for new and original designs. A careful study of these illustrations will give the student a good under- standing of many practical points about the location of a sign on and the 461 best method of attaching it to a build- ing. The subject of ornament is given special attention, and the character and composition of ornaments used in gen- eral practice are explained. This in- struction fills a long-felt want and will be welcomeji by every letterer and sign painter desiring to take up this pleasant and profitable branch of the business. Persons That Should Enroll a. Sign Painters. b. Letterers. c. Lithographers. d. Designers. e. Engravers. /. Workmen and Apprentices in sign-painting shops. g. Carriage Painters. h. House Painters. i. Car Painters. y. Architects. k. Interior Decorators. /. Fresco Painters. m. Engrossers. n. Stained-Glass Window Designers. o. Persons wishing to do correct lettering. Note — Persons intending to write show-cards sho^lld enroll for the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The sign painter that has learned his trade in the shop is frequently hin- dered by a lack of knowledge — knowl- edge he cannot get through experience alone, but that he must have before he can get a high salary. To such a man our instruction offers the opportu- nity to make up for shortcomings, 462 broaden his scope, and acquire valuable information not to be had by the appren- tice. Our Course contains all the sub- jects properly included in a lettering and sign-painting course, and gives much reliable information on kindred subjects. It teaches the student to design artistic and effective signs. It gives him a thorough knowledge of lettering, explaining the technical details of letter formation and leading him pro- gressively from the plain block letter to the more elaborate ornamental styles. It will qualify the student as a good letterer and sign painter; fit the apprentice to earn journeyman's wages much sooner than if he depended on shop practice alone; and enable the journeyman to do better work and get better pay. b. Never had the sign painter greater opportunities than at present; never was he better paid. Millions of dollars are spent for signs. Sign paint- ing is a business easily and quickly learned, and one that requires little capital. In nearly every city there is an opportunity for a competent sign painter to make money. B}^ submit- ting appropriate designs to merchants, he can get enough orders to keep him busy and may soon ' build up a well- paying business. c. No one is surer of employment at good wages than the professional let- terer. The man able to do plain letter- ing rapidly and well gets from $15 to $25 a week; and the man competent to design artistic signs can earn twice that amount. 463 d. The student ambitious to become a sign painter must understand the mixing of colors, the making of sizes for gilding, and the applying of both gold leaf and silver leaf. Through our Course, the student is given a thorough knowledge of the handling of colors, the preparing of both quick and slow sizes, and the laying of both gold leaf and silver leaf. e. In submitting estimates, the sign painter is frequently called on to fur- nish a design showing how the work will look when finished. To make this design, he must know how to use draw- ing instruments. Our Course teaches how to use drawing instruments and give them proper care; tells how to describe ellipses; and gives instruction in mechanical lettering. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Complete Lettering and Sign Painting Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. 464 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Lettering Plates, and Examina- tion Questions of the Course, and give a full and clear treatment of lettering and sign painting. b. They are, because of the great practicability of our instruction, invalu- able for reference purposes. The holder of these Bound Volumes can consult them when a difficulty arises and find in a moment information it might otherwise take hours to find. Indeed, much of the information about sign and banner making and practical design and ornament has never before been pub- lished. The Bound Volumes are fully indexed. Every important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. c. They contain the methods and processes used by the leading sign painters, and show many alphabets exactly suited to the sign painter's needs. These alphabets are arranged progressively, leading the student from the plain and simple styles of lettering to the most advanced and ornamental. Alphabets obsolete and not in common use have been omitted, our constant aim being to give the student only the best. Even though he may never recite to us, the student can study the Bound Volumes in spare time at home and, with practice, become a good letterer and sign painter. 465 International Library of Technology The International Library of Technology is the advanced Instruc- tion Papers of the I. C. S. Courses, systematically arranged and bound into eighty-one handsome three-quarter morocco volumes. Why the Library Was Prepared For many years there has been urgent need of a thorough, clear, and concise reference work on the up-to-date methods of the trades and the engineer- ing professions — a work to which the president, the manager, or the foreman could turn for explanation of the facts, principles, and processes, or quick solu- tion of the problems, pertaining to his work. Our success in teaching by mail has established us as the fountain head of industrial science; no other school nor publisher has in hand such a fund of technical knowledge; no other institu- tion has such facilities for dissemina- tion. The Courses of the International Cor- respondence Schools are generally recog- nized as the best in the world for home study, and prominent engineers, officials of industrial establishments, and educa- tional institutions have made persistent requests for our Instruction, Papers, permanently bound, for reference pur- poses. And thousands of our students — ambitious to read up on technical subjects not treated in their Courses — have made similar requests. From the 466 beginning those familiar with our work have insisted that our advanced Instruc- tion Papers, if united in proper order, carefully indexed, and substantially bound, would make the most useful reference work ever known. By Whom the Library Was Compiled The Faculty of the International Correspondence Schools, assisted by many of the foremost engineers, mechanics, and chemists of the United States. The Library Not a Substitute for a Course of Instruction As the Library is intended for refer- ence only, all elementary mathematics and mechanics, examination questions, and keys are omitted. The entire Library would fail to answer the pur- pose of even one of our regular Courses of instruction. Persons That Should Subscribe for the Library a. Faculty Officers and Instructors in universities, colleges, scientific schools, etc. h. Principles and Teachers in high schools and academies. c. Presidents, Secretaries, Treasur- ers, Directors, and all Corporation Officials. d. Electrical Engineers, Mechanical Engineers, and all Professional Men in any way associated with the engineer- ing professions. e. Patent Attorneys. /. Attorneys-at-Law. 467 Note — Many legal controversies bearing on mechanics, electricity, etc., are of so technical a character, an attorney with our Library at hand for consultation may often win cases that would otherwise be lost by reason of his ignorance of the principles, facts, and processes involved. g. I. C. S. students desirous of ac- quiring technical information on sub- jects not in their Courses. Why Persons Should Subscribe for the Library a. It is an epitome of industrial economy. b. It is the most practical, thorough, and concise Library on industrial science — written by men of long experience at their work, and edited by a corps of expert technical writers. c. It is the best-illustrated Library ever published — replete with views, plans, sections, and elevations of the latest machinery and methods, executed by the best corps of illustrators in the country. d. It is the best-indexed Library ever printed — each subject being indexed with all the letters under which it is liable to be sought. e. It is prepared especially for busy men — being written for home study without the aid of a present teacher or additional reference books. /. It is a systematic array of princi- ples, a judicious analysis of up-to-date processes, and a sensible explanation of how to apply these principles and proc- esses; the treatment is simple and clear, and the text is readily understood. It is the most rational reference work ever prepared on the trades and the engineer- ing professions. 468 2d Bound Volume Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 269 | 2 Instrumental Drawing 15 1st Bound 3 Geometrical Drawing 5o > Volume Examination Questions 21 Keys 31 4 Practical Projection 98 5 Development of Surfaces. . 65 6 Practical Pattern Prob- lems 294 7 Architectural Proportion. . 91 8 Development of Moldings. . 81 Skylights 25 J Pages 1,106 Illustrations, 693 Instruction Papers, 23 Drawing Plates, 21 Bound Volumes, 2 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 1 tion Papers ] . a. They are illustrated fully and in [the greatest detail. h. They explain the construction of i skylights and give accurate develop- iments for skylight patterns. j c. They fully explain miters. I d. They give the student full instruc- I tion in the proportionment of classic ■orders — such as the Tuscan, the Doric, the Ionic, etc. — enabling him to_ give the proper proportions to any particular design he may be called on to construct. I e. They contain instruction in let- tering. /. They contain such tables of weights, measures, dimensions, etc. as are needed by the mechanic when he is called on to estimate the sizes and capacities of various articles. g. They explain blueprinting. 469 h. They show how the surfaces o solids are developed by the method o triangulation. Persons That Should Enroll a. Apprentices, Helpers, Journey men, and Foremen in tin shops anc sheet-metal shops. ■ b. Pattemcutters. c. Tinsmiths. d. Coppersmiths. e. Metal Roofers. /. Metal- Work Designers; Alumi num. Workers. g. Sheet-Iron Workers; Boiler makers. h. Architectural Sheet-Metal Work- ers. i. Sheet-Metal Pattern Draftsmen /. Cornice Makers; Conveyer Ma- kers; Skylight Makers; Die Makers; al persons requiring a knowledge of the laying out and the cutting of patterns and the reading of working drawings for sheet-metal work. k. Furnace Setters. /. Managers and Superintendents requiring a knowledge of developing patterns for sheet-metal work. m. Young Men desirous of becoming sheet-metal pattern draftsmen. n. Persons desirous of acquiring a knowledge of some profession such as sheet-metal pattern drafting. Why Persons Should Enroll a. ^ Sheet metal, because of its du- rability, lightness, and ease of applica- tion, is put to almost an infinite numbei of uses. The call for skilled sheet-metal workers far exceeds the supply, and 470 Competent men are always sure of bmployment at good wages. There are plenty of men to be had with only a practical knowledge of sheet-metal work; but the men wanted today to fill the responsible positions — to take full charge of the shops and the drafting tooms — are the men with a theoretical as well as a practical knowledge of their trade. Our Course offers the student the only feasible way of supplementmg his practical experience with a thorough Iknowledge of the theories and principles of sheet-metal pattern drafting; it is ifhe only Course that will fully quahfy 'him for the highest and best-paid posi- tions of his profession. b. Our Course is in full accord with the latest and best practice of sheet- metal pattern drafting. It teaches how to lay out patterns for sheet-metal work in exactly the same manner as employed in actual practice. The stu- dent is thus fully prepared on entering a modern pattern drafting room to take up his work at once without waiting to learn new methods; this is a great advantage and argues well for his rapid advancement. c. Drawing is universally the lan- guage of the industrial world. Drawings tell the Avorking man exactly what is wanted, where verbal explanations fail. A knowledge of this language is almost imperative to the sheet-metal worker; he must thoroughly understand the reading of working drawings in order to do his work intelligently. Through our instruction the journeyman sheet- metal worker can not only learn to 471 read working drawings, but also to lay out and cut patterns for the most com- plicated forms of sheet-metal work; and this knowledge will bring him an increase in salary. d. The foreman or superintendent in i charge of the sheet-metal pattern shop needs the information contained in our Course in order to make careful and intelligent estimates of the cost of new work he is bidding for. Our Course is a clear and concise statement of essential ' facts _ concerning sheet-metal pattern drafting, and furnishes information indi- spensable to every one connected with the sheet-metal industry; it offers the apprentice a means of advancing to the journeyman's position; it will qualify the journeyman for taking charge of the shop;_ and it will give the foreman a practical working knowledge that will enable him to efficiently direct and improve the work of the shop. e.^ A strong feature of our Course is a list of sixty representative shop problems, with specific instruction for the making of the necessary drawings and developments. These practical pattern problems have no equal for reference purposes. They are grouped in such a manner that workingmen engaged in the different branches of the sheet-metal trade may readily find their particular problems under separ- ate headings. The first twenty prob- lems relate to patterns for tin and sheet- iron ware; the next twenty to patterns for pipe and conveyer work; while the remainder have special reference to pat- terns for the heavy sheet-metal work 472 made by the boilerinaker and the copper- smith. These problems, with their de- tailed explanations, are of inestimable value to all persons engaged in the shop or the drafting room of a sheet-metal- working establishment. The sheet-metal worker can consult them when a diffi- culty arises pertaining to the work of which they treat, and in a moment find the solution to a problem that might otherwise take hours to master. /. Our Course thoroughly explains the laying out of patterns for nearly all the various moldings and miters met with in the daily practice of the sheet- metal worker. This information is invaluable to cornice and skylight makers, for they are frequently called on to develop patterns for this particular kind of sheet-metal work. Drawing Outfit Furnished The Complete Drawing Outfit is sent to the student as soon as he has paid SIO. A student unable to pay cash in advance or $10 dow^n can study the mathematics of his Course until his payments amount to $10, when the Outfit will be furnished- The student pays express charges. ■ Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. The average student requires a little more time. Note — The student may take up drawing in the Course as early as he pleases, without wait- ing till he has finished the mathematics. 473 Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instructioi Papers, Examination Questions, Draw ing Plates, and Keys of the Course They are the most valuable work eve; prepared on sheet-metal pattern draft ing. They treat the subject fully anc in detail. They are the only volume; in existence suitable for home study Some students have enrolled simply to secure these Bound Volumes, anc have achieved success through the stud} of them alone, without submitting recitations to us. b. They are fully indexed. Ever} important item is indexed with al initial letters under which it is likel) to be sought. c. They contain the latest and bes1 ideas on sheet-metal pattern work For reference purposes their value h almost unlimited. Nowhere else car; the student find such practical, helpfu; answers to the many different questions that come up in his daily practice; The student possessing these Bound Volumes has a complete up-to-date work unexcelled for clearness and con- ciseness, and containing exactly the information necessary to his success. d. They are a desirable addition tc( any sheet-metal worker's library. They contain the tried and proved facts and processes employed in the most success- ful shops of the country, arranged in aii orderly and systematic whole. 474 Ocean Navigation Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES Arithmetic 85 Elementary Algebra 39 Geometry and Trigonom- „^ , ^ ^ , etry 73 I. 1st Bound Logarithms'. ". 20 f Volume Spherical Trigonometry ... 46 Examination Questions 23 Keys 75 Navigation 245 1 ^ , .^ , Nautical Tables 180 2d Bound Examination Questions. . . . 23 f Volume Keys 46 J Nautical Astronomy 307 ^ Ocean Meteorology ^^ I , t. Rules of the Road and I 3d Bound Safety Arrangements 56 j Volume Examination Questions 27 j Keys 54 J Pages 1,385 Illustrations, 444 Instruction Papers, 17 Bound Volumes, 3 Note — No attempt is made to teach Pilotage for any particular locality. t>eculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- I tion Papers a. They impart to the student the Imatheinatical knowledge he must have in order to deal inteUigently with the methods used to determine the position of a ship at sea. b. They describe the system of lines by which the latitude and the longitude of any place on the earth are determined. The relation of longi- tude to time is clearly explained. c. They contain a full and clear description of the mariner's compass, the lead, and the log. The Instruction Papers describe the several errors of the 475 compass and explain how each is com- pensated for by means of artificial magnets and soft-iron spheres. d. They explain the use of the com-i- mon log and the patent log in determin- ing the distance run by the ship, as well' as how to use the lead and the sounding machine in finding the position of the ship in foggy weather. e. They describe all the standard methods used to find, by bearings oi known objects, the position of a ship when in sight of land. /. They treat of the different meth^ odsof dead-reckoning, showing how the position of a ship is found by keeping a record of the courses and the dis- tances run by the ship when out of sight of land. g. They explain the use of traverse tables and give all the methods of sail- ings for calculating latitude and longi- tude without astronomical observa- tions. h. They describe the construction and the use of charts in plotting the position of a ship, and fully explain how the day's work is carried out in. actual practice at sea. i. ^ They treat of all the astronomical principles connected with determining ■■ — by observations of the sun, moon, planets, or stars — the position of a ship at sea, and explain the construction and: the use of the sextant and the chronom- ■ eter. The manner of finding the error and the rate of the chronometer is given due consideration. /._ They explain the different kinds of time measurement, showing how each measurement is determined from the^ 476 movements of celestial bodies and tell- ing how to convert one kind of time into another. k. They describe all standard and approved methods of finding positions at sea by astronomical observations, and give full directions for proceeding with each separate sight. /. They contain numerous observa- tions worked out in detail, showing exactly the manner in which the work is done and how the various elements are taken from the Nautical Almanac and corrected. m. They contain a plate showing in their respective constellations all the principal stars used in navigation, together with instruction for locating them in the sky. n. They describe fully the manner of finding, by means of azimuths and , amplitudes, the deviation of the com- pass when in sight of land as well as when at sea. A diagram simplifying the operation and eliminating to a great extent the possibility of error is shown. o. They contain a clear and concise treatise on Sumner's method, a method the aspiring navigator of average ability has heretofore found extremely difficult to understand. The importance of Sumner's method in the practice of navigation cannot be overestimated; and the simple, yet thorough, manner in which this subject is explained in our Instruction Paper is frequently com- mended by our students. p. They give explanations of the causes of currents, winds, and storms, of their peculiarities, and of the neces- sary precautions to avoid the centers of 477'! hurricanes, together with valuable in- formation regarding the best way to maneuver a vessel in heavy weather and to foretell the approach of a danger- ous storm by means of the barometer and other accompanying character- istic features. q. They contain a practical discus- sion on tides and on the use of tide tables. Methods for avoiding con- cealed dangers are given. r. They embrace the new interna- tional code of signals, showing by means of colored plates various samples of hoists. The revised rules of the road for preventing collisions at sea are included. 5. They explain what should be done in case of a wreck or other disaster and give the duties of the shipmaster in such a case. Directions for restoring an apparently drowned person are included. And a list of questions is given — each accompanied with direc- tions for finding its answer — on subjects of which an applicant for a master's or an officer's certificate should have a knowledge. Persons That Should Enroll a. Officers in the merchant marine desiring to increase their efficiency and become first-class navigators. h. Boatswains, Quartermasters, Car- penters, Apprentices, and Seamen of all grades on both sail and steam vessels of the merchant marine. c. Petty Officers, Warrant Officers, and any enlisted men in the Navy wishing to obtain higher ratings. d. Boatswains and Gunners in the Navy desiring to prepare for the examination to become Commissioned Officers. e. Members of the Naval Reserve and the State Naval Militia. /. Yachtsmen, Yacht Owners, and Members of yacht clubs. g. Pilots and Pilots' Apprentices, Sailing Masters. h. Persons intending to prepare for examinations to become nautical experts. i. Persons employed in the United States Lighthouse Service and the United States Life-Saving Service. j. Persons intending to enter the United States Steamboat-Inspection Service. k. Persons interested in shipping and nautical affairs in general. Note — The person wanting to take up the study of Navigation, but not so fully as treated in the Ocean Navigation Course, should enroll for the Coastwise Navigation Course. The Lake Navigation Course is intended for only those persons engaged in lake navigation; it does not include any methods of navigation by observations. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The ship owner is constantly on the lookout for the man competent to take charge of a new vessel or to fill a vacancy on a vessel already in commission. A high standard of effi- ciency, however, is required of a man holding the position of officer on an ocean-going passenger vessel. Above all things he must be a first-class navigator. He must be able not only to practice all standard methods of finding the position of his ship at sea, 479 but he must also understand the principles on which they are founded. Seamen attending nautical schools con- ducted by retired shipmasters, are usually crammed with rules and given only a smattering of navigation — just enough to squeeze through the license examination. Knowledge of so exact a science as navigation acquired in so happy-go-lucky a fashion does not fit a young man for the great responsi- bilities of commanding a modem vessel. Our Ocean Navigation Course gives him a thorough knowledge of both the theory and practice of naviga- tion. It contains not only directions of how to make observations and work out the methods of finding the position of a ship, but it explains the principles underlying each method, gives the student a clear insight into the art, and enables him to judge intelligently of the value and the trustworthiness of the results obtained by each method under different conditions and cir- cumstances. The Course will help him pass the examination required to obtain a license for mate or master of any class of vessel. And because of our unique method of teaching, the movements of the student do not in; the least interfere with his studies. As a matter of fact, the student study- ing at sea has an advantage through; being able to put into daily practice: the knowledge acquired from his Course. The benefit of this is evident. b. No other navy in the world offers to its enlisted men so great opportunities for advancement as does the United States Navy. Under the 480 , Naval Personnel Act, twelve warrant officers may every year be appointed to the rank of Commissioned Officers. This means that a young man entering the service as an apprentice may rise- to the rank of Admiral ; he has the same chance as the graduate of the Naval Academy. But there is one thing a warrant officer must do before he can advance: he must pass an examination. To prepare for this examination he must study, and our instruction is particularly well suited to furnish him with the knowledge he is required to have for this purpose. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Chart- Work Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 10 months. The average student re- quires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They contain the Instruction Papers, Examination Questions, and Keys pi the Course, which were prepared especially to meet the requirements of ^6 481 the awaj^-from-school student. Instruc- tion for this purpose must be so force- fully written and illustrated that the student can take it into his rnind unaided. Our instruction anticipates every point likely to cause the student trouble. The utmost care has been taken to avoid ambiguous expressions. As the best way to make a state-, ment or description clear is to give a picture or diagram with it, illustra- tions have been used without stint. For self -instruction, our Bound Vol- umes are unequaled; they are clear, concise, and explain all the details lacking in the ordinary textbook on navigation; they are admittedly the clearest and most comprehensive books ever published on ocean navigation, and have received the most unquaHfied and hearty indorsement of officers both in the navy and in the merchant marine. b. They are intensly practical and have been so written as to be easil}; understood by the man of limited education. The general aim has beer to impart the information in such s manner that it can be readily put tc practical use. c. They possess almost unlimited value as reference books. They are re- plete with illustrative examples workec out in detail, showing exactly _ ho^\ the different observations are utilized in actual practice at sea. No_ refer^ ence library on nautical subjects is com- plete without these volumes. Ever}- important item is indexed with all the initial letters under which it is likeb to be sought. 482 Coastwise Navigation Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGEi Arithmetic 89 Elements of Navigation . . 47 Variation and Deviation. . 39 Elements of Geometry ... 26 Chart, Lead, and Log 46 Piloting 43 Examination Questions. . . 25 Keys 49 J Dead Reckoning 39" Latitude by Observation. 42 Longitude by Observation 40 Amplitude and Azimuth . . 42 Code Signals and Rules of the Road 37 Nautical Tables 143 Examination Ouestions. . . 21 Keys 30 1st Bound Volume 2d Bound Volume Pages 758 Illustrations, 225 Instruction Papers, 12 Bound Volumes, 2 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They do not contain any instruc- tion in algebra nor trigonometry. Just enough mathematics is included to lenable the student to understand and use intelligently all the approved methods of navigation practiced on the larger coastwise vessels. b. They treat fully of the errors and adjustments of the mariner's com- pass. c. They describe the lead, the log, and the sounding machine, and tell how to use them. d. They describe and illustrate the construction of the polyconic chart and the Mercatorial chart, and explain all matters pertaining to chart work, including the plotting of courses and 483 positions. The subject of correcting one course into another is fully ex- plained and numerous worked-out ex- amples are given. Explicit instruction is given in the important subject of proper piloting. e. They take up all the methods of navigation by dead reckoning, showing by many worked-out examples exactly how the work is done in practice. /. They give exact directions for determining, by astronomical observa- tions of the sun, the position of a ship at sea. Numerous sights of the sun for both latitude and longitude are worked out in detail. The sextant is clearly described and the manner of using it fully explained. g. They deal with amplitude and azimuth observations for finding at sea the errors of the compass. This instruction is especially valuable to the student, for it describes clearly the construction and the use of all azimuth instruments now in use, including the pelorus. h. They tell about fuel consumption, propulsion, and the speed of vessels, and put the student in possession of much useful information regarding the behavior of vessels due to the effects of the screw propeller and the rudder. i. They explain and illustrate the new international code of signals, and give the pilot rules governing the move- ments of vessels to prevent coUisions. y. They contain timely advice on how to proceed in case of shipwreck, giving directions for obtaining the best results from the efforts of the life- saving service on shore. 484 Persons That Should Enroll a. Masters and Mates of coastwise sailing vessels wishing to become first- class navigators. b. Officers of steam vessels engaged in coastwise navigation ' desiring to obtain a license of a higher grade. c. Quartermasters and Deck Hands on coastwise vessels wanting to secure an officer's license. d. Captains of harbor tugs, ocean tugs, and seagoing barges. e. Men employed on all kinds of fishing vessels and oyster boats. /. Owners of steam launches and yachts wanting to navigate their own craft. g. Employes of the United States Lighthouse Service . and the United States Life-Saving Service. h. Employes in nautical warehouses, in shipping offices, and in the offices of owners and agents of all classes of vessels. i. Persons desirous of getting a good insight into up-to-date methods and practices of navigation, but not caring to take up the study of the Ocean Navigation Course. Note — The Coastwise Navigation Course was prepared especially for men and officers engaged on coastwise vessels— both sail vessels and steam vessels— on the Pacific as well as the Atlantic seaboards, and for those desiring to get a thorough working knowledge of navigation in the shortest possible time. Persons wanting to study navigation more fully than treated in the Coastwise Navigation Course should enroll for the Ocean Navigation Course. The Lake Navigation Course is intended for only those persons engaged in, or wanting to engage in, lake navigation; it does not include instruction in the methods of navigation by observations. 485 Why Persons Should Enroll a. In many cases, the pilot or the master of a coastwise vessel depends almost entirely on dead-reckoning and on his knowledge of the coast line to conduct his 'ship to its destination. If from any cause he is driven seaward and loses his bearings, he must be able to determine the position of his ship by sights of the sun. In the West Indian trade this ability is particularly needed; for after leaving a northern port the vessel may be out of sight of land for several days, and its position must of necessity be determined by astronomical observations. Our Course gives exact directions for determining the position of a ship by observations of the sun. Numerous sights of the sun for latitude and longitude are worked out in detail, showing the stu- dent precisely how the work is done at sea and giving him invaluable informa- tion about practical methods of naviga- tion; the Course will increase his effi- ciency and do much to further his advancement to positions of more importance and greater income. b. A sailor's advancement depends on his own efforts. To forge ahead he must not only be a good seaman, but he must also understand the theory and practice of navigation. Experi- ence alone will not give this. But the man willing to spend part of his spare time in study, can — with our help — get a good knowledge of navigation. Pre- pared by nautical experts, our Course is in perfect harmony with the best practice, and gives the student the 486 theoretical knowledge he must have to advance. Our instruction is so plainly written and clearly illustrated as to make impossible a misunder- standing of what is read. The solutions of problems heretofore perplexing have been so simplified that the student now meets with little difficulty in solving them. In fact, just enough mathematics is included to give the student sufficient knowledge to solve the problems that daily arise. c. According to the rules and regulations of the United States Board of Supervising Inspectors of Steam Vessels, no original license as master or mate of coastwise steamers shall be issued, nor grade of license raised, nor route extended for any person that does not understand navigation; that is not able to determine a ship's posi- tion at sea by observation of the sun; that cannot obtain longitude by the chronometer; and that cannot deter- mine a ship's latitude by meridian altitude of either the sun, moon, or stars. Our Course explains how to do this. d. International commerce has reached gigantic proportions, and it is constantly growing. More ships are being built, and men competent to take charge of them are in demand. A high standard of efficiency, however, is required of the man in charge of a valuable ship. Besides being a practical seaman, he must have suffi- cient knowledge of navigation to pass a license examination. These examina- tions are not difficult to the person possessing the knowledge contained 487 in our Course. Indeed, some students have secured licenses before finishing their Courses. This fact alone proves conclusively how well adapted our instruction is to the man preparing for a license examination. Our Course will give the student information that will be invaluable to him as an officer of a vessel, and do much toward qualifying him as a first-class navigator. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Chart- Work Outfit as soon as he has paid SIO. The student pays express | charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying, 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 9 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will Be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course, and give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and practice of coastwise navigation — knowledge that he must have to pass the examination for a license. They contain all the subjects properly in- cluded in a coastwise navigation course, and give much information of great value to the student. b. They are invaluable to the stu- dent realizing the tragedy of idle moments and the infinite possibilities of spare-time study. Replete with practical information, the student so fortunate as to possess the Bound Volumes has a reference library full of knowledge indispensable to him in his work, written in a style so^ simple as to be easily understood, and indexed so thoroughly that every important subject can be found in an instant. The subjects are arranged in a logical order and are presented in that thorough, incisive, straight-to-the-point manner so essential to the home stu- dent. They are the only books satis- factory for home study. No ship officer's library is complete without our Bound Volumes. 16i 489 Lake Navigation Course LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 1 Arithmetic 89^ 2 . Rudiments of Algebra 33 3 Geometry and Mensuration 43 I 1st Bound Nautical Tables 80 ( Volume Examination Questions 12 Keys 43 J 4 Lake Navigation 278] o^ t>„„„^ Examination Questions. ... 21 ^ ^^^i °",^^ Keys 38j ^^^^"^^ Pages 637 Illustrations, 222 Instruction Papers, 9 Bound Volumes, 2 Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- tion Papers a. They contain all the instruction in mathematics a student must know to solve the navigator's daily problems. This instruction is presented in so simple and practical a manner as to make the subject most interesting. b. They show how to conduct safely a ship from one port to another with- out the aid of astronomical observations, and they explain the use of parallels of latitude and meridians of longitude in determining the position of a ship at sea. c. They describe in detail the mariner's compass, its location on shipboard, and the compensation of its errors by means of artificial magnets and soft-iron spheres. The patent log, the chip log, the hand lead, the sound- ing machine, and the pelorus are given ample attention. d. They explain the construction and the use of charts and tell about the correction of courses. 490 I e. They show how to determine the deviation of the compass when in sight of suitable objects on shore, or by the azimuth and the amphtude of the sun when at sea. The relation of longitude to time is clearly explained. /. They give instruction in naviga- tion by dead-reckoning and describe the use of the traverse tables. This instruction is supplemented with numer- ous worked-out examples showing ex- actly how these operations are carried out in practice. g. They contain full explanations of the various standard methods for determining the position of a ship when in sight of land. h. They describe the use of the sextant for measuring the angle between two objects on shore. The Instruction Papers do not, however, treat of the subject of determining the position of a ship at sea by observations of the sun. The methods known as the horizontal and danger angles are dealt with in a thorough manner. i. They tell about the different kinds of time measurements and explain the conversion of one kind of time to another. A practical dis- cussion of standard time and time signals is included. y. They take up the subjects of propulsion, fuel consumption, and speed of vessels, and give many timely remarks about the behavior of vessels due to the effects of the screw pro- peller and the rudder. k. They contain a thorough ex- planation of the nature of the severe storms traversing the great lakes; •491 describe their accompanying character- istic atmospheric conditions; and tell how their approach may be foretold by the barometer. This information is valuable to the navigator in helping him to avoid storm centers, or if they are unexpectedly encountered, to apply the best means of safely handling the ship. /. They give the weather signals of the United States and Canada as well as the pilot rules and other legal requirements adopted by the United States government for the navigation of vessels on the great lakes. m. They explain how to proceed in case of a shipwreck so as to secure the best results from the efforts of the life-saving service on shore. Valuable advice is given for resuscitating a person apparently drowned. Persons That Should Enroll a. Masters and Pilots of vessels plying on the Great Lakes desiring to become proficient navigators. h. Pilots on the Great Lakes wishing to obtain a higher grade license. c. Deck Hands and Wheelmen on lake vessels wishing to become mates and pilots. d. Men and Quartermasters of coast- ing vessels desirous of becoming mates. e. Captains of harbor tugs, launches, canal boats, and barges. /. Men employed on all kinds of fishing vessels and oyster boats. g. Owners of steam launches and yachts desiring to navigate their own craft. 492 h. Persons employed in the .United States Lighthouse Service and the United States Life-Saving Service. i. Persons employed in nautical warehouses, in shipping offices, and in the offices of owners and agents of all classes of vessels. ;. Persons wanting a short course in navigation and not caring to take up the study of the Ocean Navigation Course. Note — The Lake Navigation Course does not include instruction in any of the methods of navigation by observations; it is intended for only those persons engaged in, or wanting to engage in, lake navigation. The person wanting to study ocean navigation, but not so fully as treated in the Ocean Navigation Course should enroll for the Coastwise Navigation Course. Why Persons Should Enroll a. The pilot on the Great Lakes is not as a rule well informed regarding methods of navigation. He prefers to run in sight of landmarks, and when- ever the course takes him out of sight of land he is more or less uncertain as to the exact position of his ship. On account of the constant nearness of dangerous shores attending the naviga- tion of the lakes, the responsibilities of an officer in charge of a lake steamer are equal to those of an officer of an ocean-going steamer. Our instruction will fit the pilot or the officer on a lake steamer to cope successfully with the trying situations sure to present them- selves. It is a thorough treatise on the theoretical and the practical sides of lake navigation. h. No pilot on the Great Lakes with a first-class or a second-class license 493 should be content to remain in his present position when there is a chance open for him at the top of his profes- sion. The ambition of every holder of a first-class license should be to become a master; and the ambition of the holder of a second-class license should be to obtain a first-class license and finally to become a master. This can be easily brought about by acquir- ing those qualifications necessary to pass the government examination for a license. It is to meet the government requirements that our Lake Naviga- tion Course is offered. With the exception of piloting for any particular locality, it includes just the information a pilot must have to raise his papers to the highest grade. c. The sailor engaged in lake, harbor, and coastwise navigation has little to justify the hope of ever rising higher u.nless he is able to satisfy the examining board and secure a pilot's license. Heretofore, there has been no ready way to secure the necessary education. As a result there are today many sailors that have been in the same position for years and whose chances of promotion are as remote as ever. Many have gone before the examining board and failed, while only a comparative few have been able after repeated efforts to squeeze through the examination. The examination for a pilot's license is not extremely difficult and the sailor studying our Course should have little trouble to pass. The student can qualify for the lowest grade of license before he finishes his Course; and, as he continues with his 494 studies, he can apply for higher grade papers and keep at it until he secures the highest-grade license. Outfit Furnished The student is furnished with our Chart-Work Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The student pays express charges. Time Required to Finish the Course That depends altogether on the stu- dent's concentrative powers, his plan of studying, and the time he gives. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, finish the Course in about 7 months. The average student requires a little more time. Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- ence Library Will be Useful to the Student if for Any Reason He Is Unable to Send Us Written Recitations a. They are composed of the Instruc- tion Papers, Examination Questions, and Keys of the Course, and give the student a good knowledge of lake navigation. They are invaluable to the student realizing the tragedy of idle moments and the infinite possibilities of spare- time study. Replete with practical information, the student so fortunate as to possess the Bound Volumes has a reference library full of knowledge indispensable to him in his work, and indexed so thoroughly that he can find in a moment the solution to a problem that might otherwise take hours to master. 495 b. They are by far superior to all other books for home study. Of the two classes of ordinary textbooks — those for general reading and those for class-room teaching — neither is suitable for home study. Books for general reading are informative rather than instructive: their facts are not arrayed in that thorough, incisive, and straight-to-the-point manner so essential for the home student. Books for class- room work are still less sufficient for self-instruction: they are written for the hand of the teacher and of neces- sity must be supplemented with his personal work in the presence of the student. Our Bound Volumes meet the exacting requirements of the home- study student. They are so clearly written and illustrated as to make impossible a misunderstanding of what is read, and they contain logically arranged all the subjects properly included in a lake navigation course. The Bound Volumes give the student instruction obtained from the most practical and reliable sources, and presented by a simplified method of teaching that has been tried and proved a success. Our experience and con- stant endeavor to provide ideal instruc- tion for the student that must study out of the presence of a teacher has made our Bound Volumes the best textbooks in existence for home study. c. They are fully indexed. Each important item is indexed with all initial letters under which it is likely to be sought. 496 Index A Page Advanced Electric Lighting Course 137 Advanced Electric Railways Course 137 Advanced Engine Running Course 113 Advanced Show-Card Writing Course 451 Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid, Chemistry and Mantif acture of 234 Architecttiral Drawing Course 255 Architectural Rendering Course 249 B Banking and Banking Law Course 423 Bookcover Design Course 292 Bookkeeping and Business Foittls Course .... 412 Bridge Engineering Course 175 Building Contractors' Course 202 C Carpet Design Course ^ 274 Cement, Chemistry and Mantifacture of 235 Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course 223 Civil Engineering Course 154 Coastwise Navigation Course 483 Complete Advertising Course 444 Complete Architectural Course 194 Complete Coal Mining Course 319 Complete Commercial Course 406 Complete Commercial Law Course 437 Complete Cotton Course 345 Complete Electrical Engineering Course 61 Complete Electrotherapeutic Course and Its Subordinate Courses 430 Complete Heating Course 306 Complete Lettering and Sign Painting Course 460 Complete Plumbing and Heating Course. . . . 298 Complete Plumbing Course 306 Complete Steam Engineering Course 106 Complete Stenographic Course 418 Complete Textile Designing Course 374 Complete Woolen Course 359 Cotton Carding and Spinning Course 355 Cotton Carding, Spinning, and Plain Weav- ing Course 355 Cotton Designing Course 355 497 Page Cotton Warp Preparation and Plain Weav- ing Course 355 Cottonseed Oil and Products, Chemistry and Manufacture of 234 D Demonstration of Language Courses 399 Draftsmen's Course 44 Dynamo Running Course 78 E Electric Car Running Course 89 Electric Lighting and Railways Course 69 Electric Lighting Course 78 Electric Railways Course 78 Electrotherapeutic Courses 430 Engine and Dynamo Running Course 125 Engine Running Course 119 F Fancy Cotton Weaving Course 355 French Course 383 Full Mining Course 310 G Gas, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 General Chemistry Course 216 General Design Course 267 General Illustrating Course 238 German Course 388 H How to Secure Employment 6 Advertising 6 Architecture 7 Bridge Engineering 9 Building Contracting 8 Chemistry 8 Civil Engineering 9 Commerce 9 Electricity 10 Heating 17 Hydraulic Engineering 9 Illustration and Design 11 Mechanical Drawing 13 Mechanical Engineering 13 Mining 14 Municipal Engineering 9 Navigation 14 498 Page Plumbing 17 Railroad Engineering 9 Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting 22 Show-Card Writing 23 Steam Engineering 24 Steam Fitting 17 Structural Engineering 24 Surveying and Mapping _. . 9 Window Trimming and Mercantile Decoration 23 Hydraulic Engineering Course 188 I Interior Wiring Course 83 International Library of Technology 466 Iron and Steel, Chemistry and Manufacture of 234 L Lake Navigation Course 490 Leather, Chemistry and Manufacture of ... . 234 Linoleum Design Course 286 Little Items 5 M Marine Engineers' Course 142 Mechanical Course 31 Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) Course 50 Mechanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) Course 55 Mechanical Engineering Course 25 Metal Mining Course 332 Metal Prospectors' Course 339 Municipal Engineering Course 181 N Newspaper Illustrating Course 243 O Ocean Navigation Course 475 Our Plan 4 Our Work 3 P Packing-House Industries, Chemistry and . . . 234 Paper, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 Perspective Drawing Course 261 499 Page Petroleum and Petroleum Products, Chem- istry and Manufacture of 235 ' Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course 306 Plumbing Inspectors' Course 306 R Railroad Engineering Course 161 S Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting Course 469 Shop Practice Course 36 Short Coal Mining Course 327 Short Plumbing Course 306 Soap, Chemistry and Manufacture of 234 Spanish Cotirse 393 Stationary Firemen's Course 148 Steam-Electric Course 130 Steam Fitters' Course 306 Structural Engineering Course 208 Sugar, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 Sulphuric Acid, Chemistry and Manufacture of ....'. 234 Surveying and Mapping Course 168 T Telegraph Engineering Course 100 Telephone Engineering Course 93 W Wallpaper Design Course 280 Window Trimming and Mercantile Decora- tion Course 454 Woolen Carding and Spinning Course ....... 369 Woolen Carding, Spinning, and Weaving Course 369 Woolen Warp Preparation and Weaving Course 369 Woolen and Worsted Designing Course 369 Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving Course 369 500 APR 23 1907 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 029 944 064 ?